1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
124 \notefontcolor #0000ff
128 \color #00ff00 #ff00ff
133 \color #aa55ff #55aa00
141 \paragraph_separation skip
144 \math_numbering_side default
145 \quotes_style english
149 \paperpagestyle default
151 \tracking_changes true
152 \output_changes false
154 \postpone_fragile_content false
158 \docbook_table_output 0
159 \docbook_mathml_prefix 1
160 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
161 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
162 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
163 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
164 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
168 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
169 \author 244031559 "Yuriy"
170 \author 274215730 "scott"
171 \author 630872221 "Jean-Pierre Chrétien" jeanpierre.chretien@free.fr
172 \author 1064312605 "Udi Fogiel"
173 \author 1549938239 "Kornel Benko"
174 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
185 by the \SpecialChar LyX
190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
192 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation,
193 please send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
194 Documentation mailing list:
196 \begin_inset CommandInset href
198 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
210 \begin_inset Newline newline
214 \begin_inset Newline newline
218 \change_deleted -131811572 1600339801
220 \change_inserted -131811572 1600339801
224 \begin_inset Note Note
227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
228 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
229 \begin_inset Newline newline
234 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
242 \begin_layout Standard
243 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
244 LatexCommand tableofcontents
251 \begin_layout Chapter
255 \begin_layout Section
256 What is \SpecialChar LyX
260 \begin_layout Standard
262 is a document preparation system.
263 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
266 business letters and proposals,
268 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
272 It is unlike most other
273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
280 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core editing style.
281 That means that when you type a section header,
283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
287 \begin_inset Quotes erd
292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
297 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
312 takes care of the typesetting for you;
313 so you deal only with concepts,
317 \begin_layout Standard
318 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
323 If you haven't read it yet,
329 \begin_layout Standard
334 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
337 the format of all of the manuals.
338 If you don't read it,
339 you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
340 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
343 \begin_layout Section
348 \begin_layout Standard
349 Like most applications,
351 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its window.
352 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
353 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical scrollbar.
356 \begin_layout Standard
357 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
358 This is not a bug or an oversight,
360 When you read a book,
361 you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the next line.
362 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion,
363 hence the need for only a vertical scrollbar.
366 \begin_layout Standard
367 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
368 The first case is large images.
369 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen,
370 left click on the image and use the option
381 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than the \SpecialChar LyX
383 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
386 \begin_layout Standard
387 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
388 menus and toolbar buttons,
389 have a look at Appendix
394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
396 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
404 \begin_layout Section
408 \begin_layout Standard
409 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
411 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
413 Just select the manual you want to read from the
420 \begin_layout Section
421 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
423 \begin_inset CommandInset label
425 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
432 \begin_layout Standard
433 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
434 can be configured via the menu
436 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
440 \begin_inset Index idx
445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
452 is able to inspect your system to see what programs,
455 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
456 packages are available.
457 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences settings.
458 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
459 was installed on your system,
460 you might have some items that you installed locally,
462 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
466 \begin_inset space \space{}
469 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
471 which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
473 To force \SpecialChar LyX
474 to re-inspect your system use
476 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
480 \begin_inset Index idx
485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
486 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
492 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
493 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
496 \begin_layout Section
499 \begin_inset CommandInset label
501 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
508 \begin_layout Standard
509 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
510 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
511 installed but you will not be able to create PDFs
512 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
513 or print your documents
517 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
518 Some \SpecialChar LyX
519 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
528 which can produce PDFs and the like.
531 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
533 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
536 every \SpecialChar LyX
537 document can still be output as plain text
538 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
545 \begin_layout Standard
546 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
548 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
552 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required files installed,
553 but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
556 \begin_layout Standard
557 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
558 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
559 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view from the menu
561 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
569 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
572 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
576 \begin_inset Index idx
581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
582 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
590 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
597 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
601 \begin_layout Chapter
602 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
606 \begin_layout Section
607 Basic File Operations
608 \begin_inset Index idx
613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
622 \begin_layout Standard
627 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word processor as well as some more advanced operations:
630 \begin_layout Itemize
653 \begin_layout Itemize
670 arg "dialog-show lyxfiles templates"
676 \begin_layout Itemize
699 \begin_layout Itemize
707 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
711 \begin_layout Itemize
713 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
725 \begin_layout Itemize
738 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
742 \begin_layout Itemize
744 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
752 \begin_layout Itemize
775 \begin_layout Itemize
788 arg "buffer-write-as"
792 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
796 \begin_layout Itemize
798 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
810 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202805
814 \begin_layout Itemize
816 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202811
824 \begin_layout Itemize
838 \begin_layout Itemize
853 \begin_layout Standard
854 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors,
855 with a few minor differences.
858 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
869 command lists the available templates.
870 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
871 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
872 and possibly propose text fragments
876 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
879 you would otherwise need to
880 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
882 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
886 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
890 They can be of use for certain classes,
891 especially those for writing letters (see section
896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
898 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
905 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
906 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a \SpecialChar LyX
909 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
917 \begin_layout Standard
918 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
951 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
952 to open a file or create a new one,
954 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
959 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
964 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
976 \begin_layout Standard
998 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
1000 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
1003 people work on the same document at the same time.
1007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1008 If you plan to do this,
1009 you should check out the Version Control feature in \SpecialChar LyX
1011 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
1016 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
1017 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
1019 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1021 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1026 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1027 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
1036 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1041 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1049 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1060 \begin_inset space ~
1064 \begin_inset space ~
1069 will reload the document from disk.
1070 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document and want to restore it to the last save
1071 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1078 \begin_inset space ~
1083 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify them as your changes.
1084 \change_inserted -712698321 1676620203
1088 \begin_layout Section
1090 \change_inserted -712698321 1676622914
1091 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1093 name "sec:Safety-Nets"
1098 Rescuing Files If Things Go Awry
1101 \begin_layout Standard
1103 \change_inserted -712698321 1676623979
1105 lays much stress on safety.
1106 We know how much effort you invest in your work,
1107 and thus the last thing we want is that this work gets lost.
1109 we cannot completely prevent bad things from happening:
1111 might crash (although we put in all effort that it doesn't),
1112 you might face a power outage while you are working on a document with unsaved changes,
1113 disks might get corrupt or files might get lost or damaged during synchronization or simply because you deleted it by mistake.
1116 provides a multi-layered safety net that will hopefully prevent you from major hassles.
1117 This means that \SpecialChar LyX
1118 does not simply make a backup file,
1119 it makes several such files that might be useful in different scenarios.
1120 Parts of this multi-layered net can be switched off,
1121 if you prefer to go a bit more risky over having multiple files (see section
1122 \begin_inset space ~
1126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1128 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
1133 but all measures are on by default to provide you with most possible security.
1136 \begin_layout Standard
1138 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624009
1140 we elaborate on the diverse files and when they might become useful.
1143 \begin_layout Subsection
1145 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624109
1149 \begin_layout Standard
1151 \change_inserted -712698321 1676629660
1154 makes backup copies of files when they are saved.
1156 these files are stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same file name but the extension
1161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1170 If you prefer to have all backups in a central place (and maybe on a separate disk),
1175 in preferences (see section
1176 \begin_inset space ~
1180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1182 reference "sec:Paths"
1191 then all backups are stored there.
1192 In order to prevent file name clashes,
1193 the files then do not simply have the original file name,
1194 but also the path in their name,
1196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1204 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1210 !home!paula!work!myfile.lyx~
1215 \begin_layout Standard
1217 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624464
1218 Note that some file managers hide backup files by default,
1219 and you need to enable
1220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1227 in order to see them.
1230 \begin_layout Standard
1232 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624516
1233 Backup files provide the latest saved version of a document.
1234 They are never deleted by \SpecialChar LyX
1236 but overwritten if new changes are saved in the original file.
1239 \begin_layout Subsection
1241 \change_inserted -712698321 1676633415
1245 \begin_layout Standard
1247 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624657
1250 also makes automatic snapshots of all opened documents that have unsaved changes in a regular time interval (which can be adjusted in preferences,
1252 \begin_inset space ~
1256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1258 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
1263 As opposed to the backup files,
1264 these also contain unsaved changes and thus might be newer than the backups.
1267 \begin_layout Standard
1269 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624841
1270 These files are always stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same name,
1272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1280 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1289 Auto-save snapshots are deleted when a document is closed normally,
1291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1295 with all changes saved.
1296 They are left on disk in case of non-normal termination (e.
1297 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1301 program crash or power outage),
1302 and this is when they might become useful.
1305 \begin_layout Subsection
1307 \change_inserted -712698321 1676633419
1311 \begin_layout Standard
1313 \change_inserted -712698321 1676629567
1315 crashes and documents have unsaved changes,
1316 the program furthermore tries to write an emergency file,
1317 which is a version of the document containing all unsaved changes,
1318 even those that have been made after the latest snapshot.
1321 \begin_layout Standard
1323 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625158
1324 These files are always stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same name but the extension
1329 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1335 myfile.lyx.emergency
1338 When the respective document is reopened with \SpecialChar LyX
1340 the application recognizes the emergency file and asks you whether it should try to recover your file to that last state.
1343 and if this succeeds it will ask you next whether the emergency file can be deleted.
1344 Agree on this only after you checked that everything has been correctly recovered!
1347 \begin_layout Subsection
1349 \change_inserted -712698321 1676633427
1350 Backup Files from Old \SpecialChar LyX
1354 \begin_layout Standard
1356 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625452
1357 If you open a \SpecialChar LyX
1358 document for the first time with a new major version of \SpecialChar LyX
1360 it gets converted to the new file format (allowing for new features).
1363 keeps a copy of the old version,
1366 <filename>-lyxformat-<n>.lyx
1369 where <n> is the old format (e.
1370 \begin_inset space ~
1376 myfile-lyxformat-474.lyx
1379 Those files are stored at the same location than the backup files,
1380 that is alongside the original document or,
1382 in the backup directory.
1385 \begin_layout Standard
1387 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625483
1388 As with backup files,
1389 these files are never deleted by \SpecialChar LyX
1393 \begin_layout Subsection
1395 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625510
1396 When to Use Which File?
1399 \begin_layout Standard
1401 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625539
1402 Now why all these files?
1403 Because they have different purposes.
1407 \begin_layout Standard
1409 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625820
1411 terminates unexpectedly,
1414 \begin_layout Enumerate
1416 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625790
1417 first try to restore from the emergency file (by reopening the document in \SpecialChar LyX
1419 This file has the latest changes,
1420 even changes you made after the last auto-save snapshot has been made.
1423 \begin_layout Enumerate
1425 \change_inserted -712698321 1676634256
1426 If the rescue file way did not work because there is no rescue file (e.
1427 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1431 after a power outage) or the rescue file is damaged (it might happen in mean cases that the rescue files contains just that latest addition that makes \SpecialChar LyX
1433 look if there is an auto-save snapshot.
1435 remove the trailing # so that the file can be opened with \SpecialChar LyX
1436 (not the first # in order to keep the original file until you checked the snapshot) and see if that works for you.
1438 you will have lost five minutes of work in the worst case (with the default settings at least).
1441 \begin_layout Enumerate
1443 \change_inserted -712698321 1676626178
1444 If there is no auto-save snapshot or this one is garbled as well,
1445 use the backup file.
1446 It does not have all the unsaved changes,
1447 but it might still be the most recent you can get.
1448 This is particularly the case if the original file itself got lost or is damaged.
1451 \begin_layout Standard
1453 \change_inserted -712698321 1676626301
1454 The fourth type of file,
1455 the backup file from old versions,
1456 is useful if the conversion process did not work and results in a non-working document (although we put in all efforts to prevent this) or if you mistakenly opened and saved a document with a newer version (such as a development version) and actually want to keep on using the old version.
1459 \begin_layout Standard
1461 \change_inserted -712698321 1676629641
1462 So much for the safety net.
1463 We hope you will not need it,
1465 that it catches you as high up as possible.
1466 Now let us return to the actual writing process.
1471 \begin_layout Section
1472 Basic Editing Features
1473 \begin_inset Index idx
1478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1485 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1487 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1494 \begin_layout Standard
1495 Like most modern word processors,
1497 can perform cut and paste operations on blocks of text,
1498 can move by character,
1501 and can delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1502 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1503 editing features and how to access them.
1504 We will start with cut and paste.
1507 \begin_layout Standard
1508 As you might expect,
1513 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands,
1514 along with various other editing features.
1515 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1519 \begin_layout Itemize
1525 \begin_inset Index idx
1530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1560 \begin_layout Itemize
1566 \begin_inset Index idx
1571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1601 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 \begin_inset Index idx
1612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1638 \begin_layout Itemize
1642 \begin_inset space ~
1648 \begin_layout Itemize
1652 \begin_inset space ~
1658 \begin_layout Itemize
1662 \begin_inset space ~
1666 \begin_inset space ~
1672 \begin_inset Index idx
1677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1686 \begin_inset Index idx
1691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1707 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1717 arg "dialog-toggle findreplace"
1723 \begin_layout Standard
1724 The first three are self-explanatory.
1725 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1726 and other programs using
1748 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted) so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1753 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1754 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1755 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table,
1756 the text will be pasted into individual cells.
1760 \begin_inset space ~
1765 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1766 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list entry.
1769 \begin_layout Standard
1773 \begin_inset space ~
1778 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard contents.
1779 Possible formats include HTML,
1784 \begin_inset space ~
1791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1800 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1802 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1806 \begin_inset space \space{}
1809 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short text which is often meaningless.)
1812 \begin_layout Standard
1816 \begin_inset space ~
1819 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1821 \begin_inset space ~
1825 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1829 \begin_inset space ~
1838 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1839 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection is inserted as one paragraph.
1840 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1844 \begin_inset space ~
1850 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1851 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1856 \begin_inset space ~
1859 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1861 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1865 \begin_inset space ~
1873 \begin_inset space ~
1876 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1879 paste from the primary selection.
1880 This is normally the currently selected text.
1883 \begin_layout Standard
1886 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1888 \begin_inset space ~
1892 \begin_inset space ~
1900 \begin_inset space ~
1904 \begin_inset space ~
1910 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466403
1912 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466406
1916 Once you have found a word or expression,
1920 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466954
1925 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1928 \begin_inset space ~
1939 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466364
1941 \begin_inset space ~
1945 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466368
1947 \begin_inset space ~
1955 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466698
1969 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1973 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1977 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466747
1982 \begin_inset space ~
1994 arg "word-find-backward"
1997 shortcut) to search backwards
2001 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466989
2002 Even if you close the widget,
2012 arg "word-find-backward"
2015 will search further.
2020 \begin_layout Standard
2022 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467040
2027 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
2030 \begin_inset space ~
2035 field and searches the next match.
2041 \begin_inset space ~
2046 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
2048 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467539
2050 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467537
2054 \begin_layout Standard
2056 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467208
2058 the following options are available:
2061 \begin_layout Itemize
2064 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467225
2070 \begin_inset space ~
2076 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467228
2079 can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search word.
2080 If the toggle is set,
2082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2093 will not match the word
2094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2107 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467232
2111 \begin_layout Itemize
2114 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467234
2118 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467207
2122 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467237
2127 can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
2128 to only find complete words,
2130 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2134 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
2139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2164 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467241
2168 \begin_layout Itemize
2171 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467258
2176 will limit search and replace,
2178 to the current cursor selection.
2181 \begin_layout Itemize
2184 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467288
2189 starts searching (forwards) immediately on input,
2190 without pressing the
2193 \begin_inset space ~
2201 \begin_layout Itemize
2203 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467400
2208 starts from the beginning/end of the document if the end/beginning has been reached without asking.
2209 If this is not checked,
2210 a dialog will pop up asking you what to do.
2211 Note that responding to this dialog makes the cursor leave the search widget,
2212 so you need to put it back manually.
2215 \begin_layout Standard
2216 \paragraph_spacing single
2218 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
2219 The widget also has a
2223 button that lets you shrink the widget to only the first row (the search widget),
2224 hiding replace and options.
2227 \change_deleted 630872221 1620400535
2229 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
2234 button brings you back to the full size.
2237 \begin_layout Standard
2238 \paragraph_spacing single
2241 also offers an advanced
2244 \begin_inset space ~
2248 \begin_inset space ~
2253 feature that is described in section
2254 \begin_inset space ~
2258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2260 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
2268 \begin_layout Standard
2272 \begin_inset space \space{}
2276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2284 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
2285 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an inset and pressing
2289 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
2296 \begin_layout Standard
2300 arg "inset-select-all"
2303 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
2304 When the cursor is inside an inset
2307 arg "inset-select-all"
2310 selects the content of the inset.
2314 arg "inset-select-all"
2317 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and then to the whole document.
2321 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
2324 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end of the document.
2327 \begin_layout Section
2329 \begin_inset Index idx
2334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2341 \begin_inset Index idx
2346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2355 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
2362 \begin_layout Standard
2363 If you make a mistake,
2364 you can easily recover from it.
2366 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
2369 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2372 or the toolbar button
2379 If you accidentally undo too much,
2382 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2385 or the toolbar button
2392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2399 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
2400 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2403 steps to minimize memory overhead.
2406 \begin_layout Standard
2408 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338243
2409 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last saved,
2411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2418 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
2419 This is a consequence of the 100
2420 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2423 step undo limit mentioned above.
2426 \begin_layout Standard
2435 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
2437 However they will not undo or redo text character by character,
2438 but by blocks of text.
2441 \begin_layout Section
2443 \begin_inset Index idx
2448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2457 \begin_layout Standard
2458 These are the most basic mouse operations.
2461 \begin_layout Enumerate
2466 \begin_layout Itemize
2471 once anywhere in the edit window.
2472 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
2476 \begin_layout Enumerate
2481 \begin_layout Itemize
2488 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
2491 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2494 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
2495 's buffer (and the clipboard).
2497 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
2498 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected text.
2503 \begin_layout Itemize
2504 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
2507 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2514 \begin_layout Enumerate
2522 \begin_layout Standard
2523 Right-click on them to set their properties.
2524 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
2528 \begin_layout Section
2530 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2532 name "sec:Navigating"
2537 \begin_inset Index idx
2542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2551 \begin_layout Standard
2553 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
2556 \begin_layout Itemize
2561 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can click to jump to the corresponding document part.
2564 \begin_layout Itemize
2566 which is accessed either by the menu
2568 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
2570 \begin_inset space ~
2575 or by the toolbar button
2578 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
2584 \begin_layout Itemize
2585 You can set bookmarks in your document under
2587 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2590 and use the same menu to return to them.
2591 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
2594 \begin_layout Standard
2598 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
2603 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2604 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
2606 \begin_inset space ~
2611 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
2612 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your last editing position.
2615 \begin_layout Standard
2620 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
2624 \begin_layout Subsection
2626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2628 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
2633 \begin_inset Index idx
2638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2640 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2655 \begin_inset Index idx
2660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2669 \begin_layout Standard
2670 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists of tables and figures,
2672 labels and cross-references (see section
2673 \begin_inset space ~
2677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2679 reference "sec:Cross-References"
2686 or citations (see section
2687 \begin_inset space ~
2691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2693 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2699 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your document.
2702 \begin_layout Standard
2703 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2704 For example with citations,
2705 the context menu allows you to open the citation dialog and to modify the citation.
2708 \begin_layout Standard
2713 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2715 if you are displaying the list of
2717 Labels and References
2719 and wish to see only references to subsections,
2720 you can enter the text
2721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2728 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2731 \begin_layout Standard
2732 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further control the display.
2737 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2738 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2743 option keeps it in the current view state.
2744 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2745 \begin_inset space ~
2748 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2749 \begin_inset space ~
2753 the subsections of sections
2754 \begin_inset space ~
2757 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2762 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2763 \begin_inset space ~
2768 the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2777 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2780 \begin_layout Standard
2787 button refreshes the TOC (
2788 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2790 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2794 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2796 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2800 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2804 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2808 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2812 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2814 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2818 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2820 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2824 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2826 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2830 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2834 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2836 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2840 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2844 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2848 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2852 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2856 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2860 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2864 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2868 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2870 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2874 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections in your document.
2887 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2889 you can move section
2890 \begin_inset space ~
2894 \begin_inset space ~
2897 2.4 or after section
2898 \begin_inset space ~
2903 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2916 (or the corresponding key bindings
2924 ) you can change the level of sections.
2925 You can make section
2926 \begin_inset space ~
2930 \begin_inset space ~
2934 \begin_inset space ~
2940 \begin_layout Standard
2941 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole section to copy,
2945 \begin_layout Subsection
2946 Horizontal Scrolling
2947 \begin_inset Index idx
2952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2954 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2964 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2981 \begin_layout Standard
2983 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats such as ISO
2984 \begin_inset space ~
2987 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2988 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2992 \begin_layout Standard
2993 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2997 \begin_layout Itemize
2999 is used on a small tablet computer
3002 \begin_layout Itemize
3003 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
3007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3015 \begin_inset space ~
3028 \begin_layout Itemize
3029 Math constructs with long command names
3032 \begin_layout Standard
3033 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
3034 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor is moved.
3035 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
3036 window so that table
3037 \begin_inset space ~
3041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3043 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
3049 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the table.
3050 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
3053 \begin_layout Standard
3054 \begin_inset Float table
3061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3062 \begin_inset Caption Standard
3064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3065 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3067 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
3071 Horizontal scrolling test.
3079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3081 \begin_inset Tabular
3082 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
3083 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
3085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
3086 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
3088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3128 \begin_layout Section
3129 Input/Word Completion
3130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3132 name "sec:Input-Completion"
3137 \begin_inset Index idx
3142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3149 \begin_inset Index idx
3154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3185 \begin_layout Standard
3187 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently opened.
3188 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that is used to propose completions.
3191 \begin_layout Standard
3192 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
3195 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3200 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3207 \begin_inset space ~
3211 \begin_inset space ~
3216 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
3220 \begin_inset space ~
3225 the completions are always shown in a popup.
3226 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
3229 \begin_inset space ~
3235 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and popup completion,
3236 you can set the minimal number of characters a word must have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
3239 \begin_layout Standard
3241 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are completions available.
3246 key to accept a proposed completion.
3247 If several completions are possible,
3248 a popup is opened showing them.
3249 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
3250 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3254 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
3261 \begin_layout Standard
3262 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the corresponding options for text.
3264 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
3267 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
3269 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
3272 he special math option
3276 enables characters to be composed.
3278 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
3281 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
3286 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
3289 you want to insert the character
3290 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
3295 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
3298 input the characters
3299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3307 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3311 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
3313 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
3317 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
3319 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
3324 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
3326 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
3329 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the math toolbar.
3331 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
3333 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
3336 supported character combinations can be found in the file
3341 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
3343 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
3347 's installation folder.
3349 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
3350 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation mark key “!”.
3356 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
3361 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
3362 In the example above,
3368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3401 \begin_layout Section
3403 \begin_inset Index idx
3408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3415 \begin_inset Index idx
3420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3422 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
3425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3437 \begin_inset Index idx
3442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3444 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
3447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3461 \begin_layout Standard
3462 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
3478 which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
3481 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3485 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
3486 \begin_inset space ~
3490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3492 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
3500 \begin_layout Standard
3505 \begin_inset space ~
3514 \begin_inset space ~
3539 do exactly what you expect them to do.
3543 \begin_layout Labeling
3544 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3548 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3549 LatexCommand nomenclature
3551 description "Tabulator key"
3558 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
3560 If you do not understand this,
3562 \begin_inset space ~
3566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3568 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3576 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
3583 \begin_inset space ~
3587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3589 reference "subsec:Lists"
3598 If you are still confused,
3604 \begin_inset Newline newline
3612 key is only used to accept proposed input completions,
3613 to move the cursor in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or Enumerate.
3616 \begin_layout Labeling
3617 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3621 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3622 LatexCommand nomenclature
3624 description "Escape key"
3632 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3641 to cancel operations.
3642 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
3645 \begin_layout Labeling
3646 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3651 These move the cursor,
3653 to the beginning and end of a line,
3654 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning or end of the file.
3657 \begin_layout Standard
3658 There are three modifier keys:
3661 \begin_layout Labeling
3662 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3680 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3681 LatexCommand nomenclature
3683 description "Control key"
3688 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending on which keys it is used in combination with:
3692 \begin_layout Itemize
3702 it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
3705 \begin_layout Itemize
3715 it moves by words instead of characters.
3718 \begin_layout Itemize
3728 it moves to the beginning and the end of the document,
3733 \begin_layout Labeling
3734 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3752 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3753 LatexCommand nomenclature
3755 description "Shift key"
3760 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3763 \begin_layout Labeling
3764 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3782 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3783 LatexCommand nomenclature
3785 description "Alt or Meta key"
3790 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards,
3791 unless your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3792 If you have both keys,
3793 you will need to try out which one actually performs the
3798 \begin_inset Newline newline
3801 This key does many different things,
3802 but it also activates the
3804 menu accelerator keys
3807 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a menu or menu item,
3808 it selects that menu item.
3812 \begin_layout Standard
3815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3821 \begin_inset space ~
3825 \begin_inset space ~
3831 \begin_inset space ~
3839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3843 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3858 \begin_inset space ~
3864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3874 \begin_layout Standard
3879 manual lists all other things bound to the
3887 \begin_layout Standard
3888 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3889 because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
3890 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered and any existing key bindings for that action.
3892 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3893 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding it.
3894 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned,
3896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3911 followed by a capital
3918 \begin_layout Chapter
3921 \begin_inset Index idx
3926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3929 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3946 \begin_layout Section
3948 \begin_inset Index idx
3953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3955 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3972 \begin_layout Subsection
3976 \begin_layout Standard
3977 Before you do anything else,
3978 before you ever start writing a document,
3979 you need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3980 Different types of documents use different types of spacing,
3985 different documents use different paragraph environments,
3986 and format the title of your document differently.
3989 \begin_layout Standard
3994 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3995 By setting the document class,
3996 you automatically select these properties,
3997 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3998 If you don't choose a document class,
4000 picks one for you by default.
4001 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
4004 \begin_layout Subsection
4006 \begin_inset Index idx
4011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4013 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4028 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4030 name "sec:Document-Classes"
4037 \begin_layout Standard
4038 You can select a class using the
4040 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4041 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4045 \begin_inset Index idx
4050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4052 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4067 Select the class you want to use,
4068 and make any fine tunings of the options you may need.
4071 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4075 \begin_layout Standard
4076 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
4081 \begin_layout Description
4082 Article for basic articles
4085 \begin_layout Description
4086 Report for basic reports
4089 \begin_layout Description
4090 Book for writing a book
4093 \begin_layout Description
4094 Letter for US-style letters
4097 \begin_layout Standard
4098 There are also some non-standard classes,
4099 which \SpecialChar LyX
4100 only uses if you have installed the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
4102 though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
4103 distributions will include many of these.
4104 Here are some of the classes.
4105 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
4107 Special Document Classes
4116 \begin_layout Description
4117 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
4120 \begin_layout Description
4121 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry Society
4124 \begin_layout Description
4125 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical Union
4128 \begin_layout Description
4129 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
4130 There are three article layouts available.
4131 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc.,
4132 that prepends the section number to the number of the result.
4133 All result-type statements (propositions,
4135 and so on) are sequenced together,
4138 and the like have their own sequence.
4140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4143 sequential numbering
4144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4147 scheme does not place the section number with each result,
4148 but numbers them throughout the article in a single sequence.
4149 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
4150 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
4153 \begin_layout Description
4154 Beamer Layout for presentations
4157 \begin_layout Description
4158 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
4159 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
4161 but a new one that is distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
4165 \begin_layout Description
4166 Chess Layout to write about chess games
4169 \begin_layout Description
4171 \begin_inset space ~
4174 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
4177 \begin_layout Description
4178 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
4181 \begin_layout Description
4182 Foils Used to make transparencies
4185 \begin_layout Description
4186 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
4187 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
4189 but a new one that is distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
4193 \begin_layout Description
4194 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
4197 \begin_layout Description
4198 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
4201 \begin_layout Description
4202 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
4205 \begin_layout Description
4206 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes,
4207 offers many useful features like caption formatting,
4208 automatic print space calculation etc.
4209 (Is used by this document.)
4212 \begin_layout Description
4213 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
4216 \begin_layout Description
4217 Powerdot Layout for presentations
4220 \begin_layout Description
4225 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical Society (APS),
4226 American Institute of Physics (AIP),
4227 and Optical Society of America (OSA).
4228 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
4232 \begin_layout Description
4233 Slides Used to make transparencies
4236 \begin_layout Description
4238 \begin_inset space ~
4241 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
4244 \begin_layout Description
4245 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
4248 \begin_layout Standard
4249 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes here.
4250 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
4252 Special Document Classes
4260 we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all of the document classes.
4263 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4267 \begin_layout Standard
4268 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
4270 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4271 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4275 \begin_inset Index idx
4280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4282 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4305 If you open a document that uses such a class,
4306 you will receive a warning saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are not installed.
4307 So it may seem that something is wrong.
4310 \begin_layout Standard
4313 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
4320 are highly specialized.
4322 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
4323 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files,
4324 with a growing number.
4325 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
4326 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed by some document class.
4327 There are just too many of them.
4328 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
4331 \begin_layout Standard
4332 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
4333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4341 you just need to install the appropriate package files.
4342 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that document class for a new file.
4344 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
4347 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
4354 manual for information on how to install them.
4355 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
4361 \begin_layout Standard
4362 Although \SpecialChar LyX
4363 provides support for many different sorts of documents,
4364 it does not include support for every document class people might want to use.
4366 many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
4367 class files to be used for dissertations submitted to those universities.
4368 The \SpecialChar LyX
4369 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
4372 users can write their own layout files,
4373 and many users have done so.
4376 Installing New Document Classes,
4384 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
4387 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4389 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4391 name "subsec:Modules"
4396 \begin_inset Index idx
4401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4403 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4420 \begin_layout Standard
4421 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the chosen document class.
4422 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
4423 This is not available in any document class,
4424 so you have to load the corresponding module in the
4430 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4434 \begin_inset Index idx
4439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4441 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4456 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what it does.
4459 \begin_layout Standard
4460 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
4461 packages or file format converters that are not always installed by default.
4463 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter,
4464 and it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
4465 You can still use the module while editing your file,
4466 but you will not be able to export to PDF or print your document,
4467 since \SpecialChar LyX
4468 will not be able to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4469 file without the missing prerequisites.
4470 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output,
4471 then you need to install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
4474 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
4478 \begin_inset Index idx
4483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4484 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
4491 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
4495 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
4499 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
4508 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
4510 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
4521 manual for more information on installing required packages.
4524 \begin_layout Standard
4525 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4534 Some modules require other modules,
4535 and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
4537 will advise you about these things.
4545 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4549 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
4554 \begin_inset Index idx
4559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4561 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4578 \begin_layout Standard
4579 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
4580 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
4582 They are intended to be used in a variety of different documents.
4583 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different documents,
4584 you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
4587 a particular document has very special needs,
4588 but you need a specific inset or
4589 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
4591 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
4594 style only that one time.
4595 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
4597 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
4599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4615 manual for information on how to use it.
4618 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4622 \begin_layout Standard
4623 Each class has a default set of options.
4624 Here's a quick table describing them:
4627 \begin_layout Standard
4628 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4634 \begin_layout Standard
4636 \begin_inset Tabular
4637 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
4638 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
4639 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4640 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4641 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4642 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4643 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
5004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
5021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
5039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
5057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
5075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5097 \begin_layout Standard
5098 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
5104 \begin_layout Standard
5105 You're probably also wondering what
5106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5110 \begin_inset space ~
5114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5118 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
5119 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
5125 the rest do not and begin instead with the
5130 Some document classes,
5131 such as the ones for letters,
5132 don't use any section headings.
5153 We will describe these headings fully in section
5154 \begin_inset space ~
5158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5160 reference "subsec:Headings"
5168 \begin_layout Subsection
5170 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5172 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
5177 \begin_inset Index idx
5182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5184 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5199 \begin_inset Index idx
5204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5206 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5223 \begin_layout Standard
5224 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
5226 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5233 \begin_inset space ~
5241 \begin_inset space ~
5247 you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated list.
5248 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
5249 doesn't support special options you want to use for your document.
5250 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
5251 -class and its options,
5252 you have to read its manual.
5255 \begin_layout Standard
5257 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
5261 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
5265 \begin_inset space ~
5272 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5278 \begin_inset space ~
5283 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
5284 You can choose between the following five options:
5287 \begin_layout Labeling
5288 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5293 Use default page style of current class.
5296 \begin_layout Labeling
5297 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5302 No page numbers or headings.
5305 \begin_layout Labeling
5306 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5314 \begin_layout Labeling
5315 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5320 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
5321 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
5322 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the maximum sectioning level of the class.
5325 \begin_layout Labeling
5326 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5331 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5337 \begin_inset Index idx
5342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5345 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5360 How they are defined is explained in section
5361 \begin_inset space ~
5365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5367 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
5375 \begin_layout Standard
5376 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
5377 \begin_inset space ~
5381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5383 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5391 \begin_layout Subsection
5392 Paper Size and Orientation
5393 \begin_inset Index idx
5398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5400 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5415 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5417 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
5424 \begin_layout Standard
5425 You can find the following options in the menu
5428 \begin_inset space ~
5435 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5439 \begin_inset Index idx
5444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5446 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5463 \begin_layout Labeling
5464 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5468 \begin_inset space ~
5473 What size paper to print on.
5478 \begin_layout Itemize
5484 \begin_layout Itemize
5490 \begin_layout Itemize
5496 \begin_layout Itemize
5502 \begin_layout Itemize
5510 \begin_layout Itemize
5516 \begin_layout Itemize
5523 \begin_layout Labeling
5524 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5529 To choose whether to output as
5540 \begin_layout Labeling
5541 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5545 \begin_inset space ~
5550 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
5551 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
5554 \begin_layout Subsection
5556 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5558 name "subsec:Margins"
5563 \begin_inset Index idx
5568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5570 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5585 \begin_inset Index idx
5590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5599 \begin_layout Standard
5600 Paper margins are set in the menu
5602 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5606 \begin_inset Index idx
5611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5613 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5630 \begin_layout Standard
5631 If you use a KOMA-Script document class,
5632 you can use the default settings because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking the paper format and the font size into account.
5635 \begin_layout Subsection
5639 \begin_layout Standard
5640 If you change a document class,
5642 has to convert everything into the new class.
5643 That includes the paragraph environments.
5644 Some paragraph environments are standard,
5645 in so far as all of the document classes have them;
5646 but some classes have special paragraph environments.
5647 If this is the case,
5648 and you change the document class,
5650 will mark the paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
5651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5659 The name of the style is retained,
5660 in case you should want to go back to the old class.
5661 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting,
5662 so you will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraphs manually to a style present in your new document class.
5665 \begin_layout Section
5666 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
5667 \begin_inset Index idx
5672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5674 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5691 \begin_layout Subsection
5693 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5695 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
5702 \begin_layout Standard
5703 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments,
5704 we'd like to say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
5707 \begin_layout Standard
5708 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
5709 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
5710 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
5711 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
5715 paragraph of a section,
5726 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
5727 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document language than English.
5729 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
5732 \begin_layout Standard
5733 The space between paragraphs,
5734 like the line spacing,
5735 the space between headings and text —
5737 all the spacing for just about everything —
5738 is pre-coded into \SpecialChar LyX
5741 you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
5745 these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a range.
5748 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures fit on a page with text,
5749 so that sections don't start at the bottom of a page,
5754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5756 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
5757 goes to produce a printable file.
5763 pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
5765 gives you the ability globally to change
5769 these pre-coded spacings.
5770 We will explain more later.
5773 \begin_layout Subsection
5774 Paragraph Separation
5775 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5777 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5782 \begin_inset Index idx
5787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5789 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5806 \begin_layout Standard
5814 \begin_inset space ~
5822 \begin_inset space ~
5829 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5833 \begin_inset Index idx
5838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5840 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5854 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs,
5858 \begin_layout Subsection
5862 \begin_layout Standard
5863 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
5866 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5868 \begin_inset space ~
5873 dialog and toggle the
5876 \begin_inset space ~
5881 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
5884 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
5888 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation,
5889 this button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling this).
5892 \begin_layout Standard
5893 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph if you need to do some fine-tuning.
5896 \begin_layout Subsection
5898 \begin_inset Index idx
5903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5905 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5922 \begin_layout Standard
5925 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5929 \begin_inset Index idx
5934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5936 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5950 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
5953 \begin_inset space ~
5962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5963 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5969 \begin_inset Index idx
5974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5977 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5991 installed to use this feature.
5996 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5998 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6000 \begin_inset space ~
6005 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing is normally defined in the environment's style.
6008 \begin_layout Section
6009 Paragraph Environments
6010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6012 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
6017 \begin_inset Index idx
6022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6024 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6039 \begin_inset Index idx
6044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6045 Paragraph environments
6053 \begin_layout Subsection
6057 \begin_layout Standard
6058 Paragraph environments correspond to the
6061 \begin_layout Standard
6070 } \SpecialChar ldots
6080 \begin_inset Newline newline
6083 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6085 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
6087 or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally alien to you,
6088 we urge you to read the
6097 also contains many more examples than this section does.
6100 \begin_layout Standard
6101 A paragraph environment is simply a
6102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6109 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
6110 This can include a particular style of font,
6117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6124 the different environments inside one another,
6125 allowing one environment to inherit some of the properties of another.
6126 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy tab stops,
6127 on the fly margin adjustment,
6128 and other hangovers from the days of typewriters.
6129 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular document type.
6130 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
6133 \begin_layout Standard
6134 To choose a new paragraph environment,
6135 use the pull-down box
6136 \begin_inset Graphics
6137 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
6143 at the left end of the toolbar.
6145 will change the environment of the
6149 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
6150 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if you select them before choosing the new environment.
6153 \begin_layout Standard
6162 create a new paragraph using the
6166 paragraph environment.
6168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6175 because if you are in one of these environments:
6178 \begin_layout Itemize
6184 \begin_layout Itemize
6190 \begin_layout Itemize
6196 \begin_layout Itemize
6202 \begin_layout Itemize
6208 \begin_layout Itemize
6214 \begin_layout Itemize
6220 \begin_layout Standard
6222 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
6227 rather than resetting it to
6232 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
6233 \begin_inset space ~
6237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6239 reference "sec:Nesting"
6247 \begin_layout Subsection
6251 \begin_layout Standard
6252 The default paragraph environment is
6257 It creates a plain paragraph.
6259 resets the paragraph environment,
6260 this is the one it chooses.
6262 the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in this manual) are in the
6269 \begin_layout Standard
6270 You can nest a paragraph using the
6274 environment in just about anything else,
6275 but you can't really nest anything in a
6282 \begin_layout Subsection
6284 \begin_inset Index idx
6289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6291 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6308 \begin_layout Standard
6309 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
6310 title page has three parts:
6312 the name(s) of the author(s) and a
6313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6320 for thanks or contact information.
6321 For certain types of documents,
6323 places all of this on a separate page along with today's date.
6324 For other types of documents,
6326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6333 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
6336 \begin_layout Standard
6338 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph environments
6353 Here's how you use them:
6356 \begin_layout Itemize
6357 Put the title of your document in the
6364 \begin_layout Itemize
6365 Put the author name in the
6372 \begin_layout Itemize
6373 If you want the date to have a certain appearance,
6374 want to use a fixed date,
6375 or want other text to appear in place of today's date,
6376 put that text in the
6381 Note that using this environment is optional.
6382 If you don't provide any,
6384 will automatically insert today's date.
6385 If you don't want a date,
6388 Suppress default date on front page
6392 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6393 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
6395 \begin_inset space ~
6403 \begin_layout Standard
6404 You can use footnotes to insert
6405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6412 or contact information.
6415 \begin_layout Subsection
6417 \begin_inset Index idx
6422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6429 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6431 name "subsec:Headings"
6438 \begin_layout Standard
6439 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
6441 takes care of the numbering for you.
6444 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6446 \begin_inset Index idx
6451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6453 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6470 \begin_layout Standard
6471 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
6475 \begin_layout Enumerate
6481 \begin_layout Enumerate
6487 \begin_layout Enumerate
6493 \begin_layout Enumerate
6499 \begin_layout Enumerate
6505 \begin_layout Enumerate
6511 \begin_layout Enumerate
6517 \begin_layout Standard
6519 labels each heading with a series of numbers,
6520 separated by periods.
6521 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
6522 Unlike the other headings,
6523 parts are numbered with
6524 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
6526 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
6528 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
6534 \begin_layout Standard
6535 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
6537 suppose you're writing a book.
6538 You group the book into chapters.
6540 does a similar grouping:
6543 \begin_layout Itemize
6548 is divided into either
6559 \begin_layout Itemize
6571 \begin_layout Itemize
6583 \begin_layout Itemize
6595 \begin_layout Itemize
6607 \begin_layout Itemize
6619 \begin_layout Standard
6620 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6629 Not all document types use the
6633 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
6638 is the top-level heading.
6646 \begin_layout Standard
6652 environment to label a new sub-subsection,
6654 labels it with its number,
6655 along with the number of the subsection,
6658 chapter that it's in.
6660 the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the label
6661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6671 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6673 \begin_inset Index idx
6678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6680 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6697 \begin_layout Standard
6698 The unnumbered section headings have a
6699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6706 at the end of their name.
6707 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in the table of contents,
6709 \begin_inset space ~
6713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6723 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6724 Changing the Numbering
6725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6727 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
6734 \begin_layout Standard
6735 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear in the Table of Contents.
6737 this doesn't remove any of the levels;
6738 that's preset in the document class.
6739 Just as certain classes start with
6754 not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
6764 This is something you can change.
6767 \begin_layout Standard
6770 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6774 \begin_inset Index idx
6779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6781 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6798 \begin_inset space ~
6802 \begin_inset space ~
6807 you will see two counters.
6812 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
6813 numbers a section heading.
6814 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table of contents.
6817 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6818 Short Titles of Headings
6819 \begin_inset Index idx
6824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6826 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6841 \begin_inset Argument 1
6844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6851 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6853 name "sec:Short-Titles"
6860 \begin_layout Standard
6861 Some section or chapter titles,
6864 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
6866 if the header of the page is set to show the current section title,
6867 a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
6870 \begin_layout Standard
6872 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
6873 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
6874 avoiding the problem mentioned.
6875 To specify a short title,
6876 set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
6878 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6880 \begin_inset space ~
6886 This will insert a box labeled
6887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6891 \begin_inset space ~
6895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6898 which you can use to enter the short title text.
6899 This also works for captions inside floats.
6900 There can only be one short title per title.
6903 \begin_layout Standard
6904 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
6907 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6911 \begin_layout Standard
6912 The following information applies to all section headings:
6915 \begin_layout Itemize
6916 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
6919 \begin_layout Itemize
6920 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
6923 \begin_layout Itemize
6924 You can only use inline math in these environments.
6927 \begin_layout Itemize
6928 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
6931 \begin_layout Subsection
6935 \begin_layout Standard
6937 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
6953 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
6954 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
6955 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below the text they contain.
6956 They also allow nesting,
6966 as well as in some other paragraph environments.
6969 \begin_layout Standard
6970 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments:
6979 when you start a new paragraph.
6981 you can type in that poem and merrily enter
6985 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
6988 once you are done typing in that poem,
6989 you have to change back to the
6993 environment yourself.
6996 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6998 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7005 \begin_inset Index idx
7010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7019 \begin_layout Standard
7020 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments,
7021 it's time for the differences.
7030 are identical except for one difference:
7035 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
7044 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
7047 \begin_layout Standard
7048 Here's an example of the
7062 extending this line out further and further until it wraps.
7063 See – no indentation!
7067 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
7069 there's no indentation,
7070 but there is extra space between me and the other paragraph.
7073 \begin_layout Standard
7074 Here's another example,
7082 \begin_layout Quotation
7089 you will see the indentation.
7090 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting the first line,
7095 is the environment for you!
7101 you were quoting other text.
7104 \begin_layout Quotation
7105 Here's a new paragraph.
7106 I could ramble on and on,
7107 like a politician at election time.
7113 \begin_layout Standard
7114 As the examples show,
7119 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
7120 They should put quotes in the
7125 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
7129 paragraph environment for quoted text.
7132 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7134 \begin_inset Index idx
7139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7141 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7156 \begin_inset Index idx
7161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7177 \begin_layout Standard
7182 is a paragraph environment for poetry,
7191 \begin_inset Newline newline
7194 Which I did not rehearse!
7198 It could be much worse.
7199 This line could be long,
7202 so very long that it wraps around.
7203 It looks okay on screen,
7204 but in the printed version,
7205 the extra lines are indented a bit more than the first.
7207 so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
7213 \begin_inset Newline newline
7216 And make things look fine
7217 \begin_inset Newline newline
7223 arg "newline-insert newline"
7229 \begin_layout Standard
7235 does not indent both margins.
7236 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
7237 To separate the individual lines of a stanza,
7241 arg "newline-insert newline"
7247 \begin_layout Subsection
7249 \begin_inset Index idx
7254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7261 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7270 \begin_layout Standard
7272 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds of lists.
7283 labels your list items with bullets or numbers,
7295 lets you provide your own label.
7296 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after describing some general features of all four of them.
7299 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7303 \begin_layout Standard
7304 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments in several ways.
7307 treats each paragraph as a list item.
7316 reset the environment to
7320 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
7321 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
7322 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting depth,
7326 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
7330 If you do this at the top level of a list,
7331 it returns you to the
7338 \begin_layout Standard
7339 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
7342 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is nested.
7343 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments,
7344 we suggest you read all of section
7345 \begin_inset space ~
7349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7351 reference "sec:Nesting"
7359 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7361 \begin_inset Index idx
7366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7368 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7383 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7392 \begin_layout Standard
7393 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
7397 paragraph environment.
7398 It has the following properties:
7401 \begin_layout Itemize
7402 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
7406 \begin_layout Itemize
7408 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
7411 \begin_layout Itemize
7412 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
7416 \begin_layout Itemize
7417 The items can have any length.
7419 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
7420 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
7427 \begin_layout Itemize
7432 environment inside another
7437 the label changes to a new symbol.
7441 \begin_layout Itemize
7442 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
7445 \begin_layout Itemize
7447 always shows the same symbol on screen.
7450 \begin_layout Itemize
7452 \begin_inset space ~
7456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7458 reference "sec:Nesting"
7463 for a full explanation of nesting.
7467 \begin_layout Standard
7469 that explanation was also an example of an
7478 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
7481 \begin_layout Standard
7482 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
7483 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
7486 \begin_layout Itemize
7487 The label for the first level
7491 is a large black dot,
7496 \begin_layout Itemize
7497 The label for the second level is a dash.
7501 \begin_layout Itemize
7502 The label for the third is an asterisk.
7506 \begin_layout Itemize
7507 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
7511 \begin_layout Itemize
7512 Back out to the third level.
7516 \begin_layout Itemize
7517 Back to the second level.
7521 \begin_layout Itemize
7522 Back to the outermost level.
7525 \begin_layout Standard
7526 These are the default labels for an
7531 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
7533 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
7536 dialog in the submenu
7541 \begin_inset Index idx
7546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7548 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7562 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
7566 \begin_layout Standard
7567 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
7568 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths in section
7569 \begin_inset space ~
7573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7575 reference "sec:Nesting"
7583 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7585 \begin_inset Index idx
7590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7592 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7609 name "sec:Enumerate"
7616 \begin_layout Standard
7621 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
7622 It has these properties:
7625 \begin_layout Enumerate
7626 Each item has a numeral as its label.
7630 \begin_layout Enumerate
7631 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
7635 \begin_layout Enumerate
7637 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
7640 \begin_layout Enumerate
7645 environment resets the counter to one.
7648 \begin_layout Enumerate
7662 \begin_layout Enumerate
7663 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
7664 Items can have any length.
7667 \begin_layout Enumerate
7668 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
7671 \begin_layout Enumerate
7672 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
7675 \begin_layout Enumerate
7676 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
7680 \begin_layout Standard
7690 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
7692 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
7693 labels the four different levels in an
7700 \begin_layout Enumerate
7701 The first level of an
7705 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
7709 \begin_layout Enumerate
7710 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
7714 \begin_layout Enumerate
7715 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
7719 \begin_layout Enumerate
7720 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
7723 \begin_layout Enumerate
7725 notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth increases.
7729 \begin_layout Enumerate
7730 Back to the third level
7734 \begin_layout Enumerate
7735 Back to the second level.
7739 \begin_layout Enumerate
7740 Back to the outermost level.
7743 \begin_layout Standard
7744 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
7750 \begin_inset space ~
7754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7756 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7762 Such customization only shows up in the printed version,
7763 not in \SpecialChar LyX
7767 \begin_layout Standard
7768 There is more to nesting
7772 environments than we've stated here.
7773 You should read section
7774 \begin_inset space ~
7778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7780 reference "sec:Nesting"
7785 to learn more about nesting.
7788 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7790 \begin_inset Index idx
7795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7797 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7814 \begin_layout Standard
7815 Unlike the previous two environments,
7820 list has no fixed label.
7824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7831 of the first line as the label.
7835 \begin_layout Description
7837 This is an example of the
7844 \begin_layout Standard
7846 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the rest of the line.
7849 \begin_layout Standard
7851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7858 it is meant that the first usage of the
7862 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an item.
7863 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
7864 \change_deleted 177693 1654619261
7868 \change_inserted 177693 1654619261
7877 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7882 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7883 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7885 \change_deleted 177693 1654619271
7887 \change_inserted 177693 1654619271
7891 \begin_inset space ~
7898 \begin_inset space ~
7902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7904 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
7909 for more information.) Here is an example:
7912 \begin_layout Description
7914 \begin_inset space ~
7918 This one shows how to use a
7919 \change_deleted 177693 1654619281
7923 \change_inserted 177693 1654619281
7927 \begin_inset space ~
7939 \begin_layout Description
7945 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
7946 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text that describes it.
7947 It's not a good idea to use a
7951 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
7952 You're better off using
7964 paragraphs into them.
7967 \begin_layout Description
7973 environments inside one another,
7974 nest them in other types of lists,
7978 \begin_layout Standard
7979 Notice that after the first line,
7981 indents subsequent lines,
7982 offsetting them from the first line.
7985 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7987 \begin_inset Index idx
7992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7994 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8011 \begin_layout Standard
8016 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8017 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
8021 \begin_layout Standard
8030 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional features.
8031 Here are its properties:
8034 \begin_layout Labeling
8035 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8037 \begin_inset space ~
8040 labels \SpecialChar LyX
8042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8049 of each line as the item label.
8054 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
8055 If you need to use more than one word in an item label,
8057 \change_deleted 177693 1654619285
8059 \change_inserted 177693 1654619287
8062 space as described above.
8065 \begin_layout Labeling
8066 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8067 margins As you can see,
8069 uses different margins for the item label and the body of the item text.
8070 The body of the text has a larger left margin,
8071 which is equal to the default label width plus a little extra space.
8074 \begin_layout Labeling
8075 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8077 \begin_inset space ~
8080 width \SpecialChar LyX
8081 uses the width of the label,
8082 or the default width,
8084 If the label width is larger,
8086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8093 into the first line.
8095 the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left margin of the rest of the item text.
8098 \begin_layout Labeling
8099 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8101 \begin_inset space ~
8104 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all items in a
8108 environment has the same left margin.
8109 \begin_inset Newline newline
8112 To change the default width,
8113 select all items in the list.
8116 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8118 \begin_inset space ~
8123 dialog (toolbar button
8126 arg "layout-paragraph"
8133 \begin_inset space ~
8138 determines the default label width.
8139 You can use the text of your largest label here,
8140 but you can also use the letter
8141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8148 multiple times instead.
8149 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
8152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8159 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
8162 \begin_inset space ~
8167 every time you alter a label in a
8172 \begin_inset Newline newline
8175 The predefined default width is the length of
8176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8184 \begin_inset space ~
8190 \begin_layout Standard
8195 list the same way as the
8200 When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes it.
8205 environment gives you another way to do this,
8206 using a different overall layout.
8209 \begin_layout Standard
8214 lists inside one another,
8215 nest them in other types of lists,
8217 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
8219 \begin_inset space ~
8223 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8225 reference "sec:Nesting"
8230 to learn about nesting.
8233 \begin_layout Standard
8234 There is yet another feature of the
8239 As you can see in the examples,
8241 left-justifies the item labels by default.
8242 You can use additional
8245 \change_inserted 177693 1654621595
8250 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
8251 justifies the item label.
8255 \change_inserted 177693 1654621600
8257 \change_deleted 177693 1654621601
8259 \change_inserted 177693 1654621603
8264 are documented in section
8265 \begin_inset space ~
8269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8271 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
8277 Here are some examples:
8280 \begin_layout Labeling
8281 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8282 Left The default for
8289 \begin_layout Labeling
8290 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8291 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
8297 \change_inserted 177693 1654621610
8302 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
8305 \begin_layout Labeling
8306 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8307 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
8311 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
8317 \change_inserted 177693 1654621617
8322 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
8325 \begin_layout Subsection
8327 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8329 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
8334 \begin_inset Index idx
8339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8341 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8358 \begin_layout Standard
8359 The features described in this section require that the module
8361 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
8363 is loaded in the document settings.
8364 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8370 \begin_inset Index idx
8375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8378 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8395 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8396 Custom Enumerate Lists
8397 \begin_inset Index idx
8402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8404 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8414 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8431 \begin_layout Standard
8433 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional argument (menu
8435 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8438 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
8439 There you add the command
8442 \begin_layout Standard
8450 \begin_layout Standard
8462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8463 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
8466 \begin_inset space ~
8470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8472 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
8486 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
8493 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
8494 For capital Roman numerals replace
8506 in the command above.
8507 For Arabic numerals use
8515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8522 items with capital or small Latin letters use
8538 \begin_layout Standard
8540 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8549 You can only number 26
8550 \begin_inset space ~
8553 items with Latin letters,
8554 because this numbering is limited to single letters.
8562 \begin_layout Standard
8563 To change the numbering for the list sublevels,
8564 replace the 'i' in the command by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi,
8570 \begin_layout Standard
8571 Here is a list with custom numbering:
8574 \begin_layout Enumerate
8575 \begin_inset Argument 1
8578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8604 \begin_layout Enumerate
8605 \begin_inset Argument 1
8608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8631 \begin_layout Enumerate
8636 \begin_layout Enumerate
8637 \begin_inset Argument 1
8640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8664 \begin_layout Enumerate
8665 \begin_inset Argument 1
8668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8694 \begin_layout Standard
8695 For this list these commands were used:
8698 \begin_layout Standard
8709 \begin_inset Newline newline
8717 \begin_inset Newline newline
8725 \begin_inset Newline newline
8735 \begin_layout Standard
8742 makes the label emphasized and
8751 \begin_layout Standard
8752 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8761 When you change the label of a list level,
8762 it will be used for all following lists until you change the definition.
8770 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8772 \begin_inset Index idx
8777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8779 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8789 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8806 \begin_layout Standard
8807 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
8810 \begin_layout Enumerate
8811 \begin_inset Argument 1
8814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8833 \begin_inset Note Note
8836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8837 goes back to default numbering
8845 \begin_layout Enumerate
8849 \begin_layout Standard
8853 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
8857 \begin_layout Standard
8858 To resume an enumeration,
8865 \change_deleted -584632292 1616513280
8866 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
8867 to indicate that it is a resumed list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
8874 \begin_layout Standard
8875 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8884 If there is no previous enumeration to resume,
8885 you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
8894 \begin_layout Standard
8895 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the next one.
8896 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
8897 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item of a normal enumeration.
8902 \begin_layout Standard
8908 \begin_layout Standard
8913 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
8917 \begin_layout Enumerate
8921 \begin_layout Enumerate
8925 \begin_layout Standard
8926 Enumeration starting at a given value:
8929 \begin_layout Enumerate
8930 \begin_inset Argument 1
8933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8949 This enumeration starts at 4
8952 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8954 \begin_inset Index idx
8959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8961 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8978 \begin_layout Standard
8979 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items of a list.
8980 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
8983 \begin_layout Itemize
8987 \begin_layout Itemize
8988 with standard spacing
8991 \begin_layout Standard
8992 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item of the list.
8993 Add there the command
8997 to get no additional list space like in this example:
9000 \begin_layout Itemize
9001 \begin_inset Argument 1
9004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9023 \begin_layout Itemize
9027 \begin_layout Itemize
9031 \begin_layout Standard
9032 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
9038 \begin_inset Index idx
9043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9046 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9061 For more information see its documentation,
9063 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
9073 \begin_layout Standard
9074 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing and indentation.
9075 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs in the document and the label separation was set to 2
9076 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9079 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
9082 \begin_layout Enumerate
9083 \begin_inset Argument 1
9086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9108 \begin_layout Enumerate
9109 with negative indentation
9112 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9113 Further Customization
9114 \begin_inset Index idx
9119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9121 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9138 \begin_layout Standard
9139 You can also change the style of description lists.
9143 \begin_layout Standard
9149 \begin_layout Standard
9150 changes the description label font,
9154 \begin_layout Standard
9160 \begin_layout Standard
9161 sets the list style.
9164 \begin_layout Standard
9165 An example where the command
9168 \begin_layout Standard
9177 \begin_layout Standard
9181 \begin_layout Description
9183 \begin_inset space ~
9188 \begin_inset Argument 1
9191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9212 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules,
9213 therefore ionizing them.
9216 \begin_layout Description
9218 \begin_inset space ~
9222 In computer science,
9223 reference counting is a technique of storing the number of references,
9225 or handles to a resource such as an object,
9227 disk space or other resource.
9230 \begin_layout Standard
9231 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
9237 \begin_inset Index idx
9242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9245 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9260 For more information see its documentation
9261 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
9271 \begin_layout Subsection
9273 \begin_inset Index idx
9278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9287 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9289 \begin_inset space ~
9296 \begin_layout Standard
9297 Although \SpecialChar LyX
9298 has document classes for letters,
9299 we've also created two paragraph environments called
9306 \begin_inset space ~
9312 To use the letter class,
9313 you need to use specific paragraph environments in a specific order,
9314 otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
9315 gags on the document.
9324 \begin_inset space ~
9329 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
9330 You can even nest them inside other environments,
9331 though you can't nest anything in them.
9334 \begin_layout Standard
9336 you're not limited to using
9343 \begin_inset space ~
9352 \begin_inset space ~
9359 is useful for creating article titles like those used in some European academic papers.
9362 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9364 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9366 name "sec:Address-Usage"
9373 \begin_layout Standard
9378 environment formats text in the style of an address,
9379 which is also used for the opening and signature in some countries.
9384 \begin_inset space ~
9389 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address,
9390 which is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
9391 Here's an example of each:
9394 \begin_layout Right Address
9396 \begin_inset Newline newline
9400 \begin_inset Newline newline
9404 \begin_inset Newline newline
9411 \begin_layout Standard
9415 \begin_inset space ~
9421 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin,
9422 which \SpecialChar LyX
9423 sets to fit the largest block of text on a single line.
9424 Here's an example of the
9431 \begin_layout Address
9433 \begin_inset Newline newline
9436 Where do I send this
9437 \begin_inset Newline newline
9440 Your post office and country
9443 \begin_layout Standard
9452 \begin_inset space ~
9457 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
9462 in either of these environments,
9464 resets the nesting depth and sets the environment to
9479 and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
9488 arg "newline-insert newline"
9493 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
9494 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
9496 \begin_inset space ~
9500 \begin_inset space ~
9505 ) to start a new line in an
9512 \begin_inset space ~
9520 \begin_layout Subsection
9524 \begin_layout Standard
9525 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography or list of references.
9527 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
9530 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9532 \begin_inset Index idx
9537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9546 \begin_layout Standard
9551 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
9553 you could use this environment anywhere,
9554 but you really should only use it at the beginning of the document,
9557 don't bother trying to nest
9561 in anything else or vice versa.
9567 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
9568 The book document classes ignores the
9573 and it's utterly silly to use
9577 in a letter document class.
9580 \begin_layout Standard
9585 environment does several things for you.
9587 it puts the centered label
9588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9596 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical space.
9598 it typesets everything in a smaller font,
9599 just as you'd expect.
9601 it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and the subsequent text.
9603 that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
9605 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are using.
9608 \begin_layout Standard
9609 Starting a new paragraph by entering
9613 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9614 The new paragraph will still be in the
9620 you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you finish entering the abstract of your document.
9623 \begin_layout Standard
9624 \begin_inset Float figure
9631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9633 \begin_inset Graphics
9634 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
9641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9642 \begin_inset Caption Standard
9644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9645 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9647 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9668 \begin_layout Standard
9669 We would love to demonstrate the
9674 but since this document is in the
9675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9684 We inserted it therefore as figure
9685 \begin_inset space ~
9689 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9691 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9697 If you have never heard of an
9698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9706 you can safely ignore this environment.
9709 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9711 \begin_inset Index idx
9716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9725 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
9732 \begin_layout Standard
9737 environment is used to list references.
9739 you could use this environment anywhere,
9740 but you really should only use it at the end of the document.
9752 \begin_layout Standard
9753 When you first open a
9759 adds a large vertical space,
9760 followed by the heading
9761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9776 depending on the document class.
9777 The heading is in a large boldface font.
9778 Each paragraph of the
9782 environment is a bibliography entry.
9788 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9789 Each new paragraph is still in the
9796 \begin_layout Standard
9798 usually better way to include references in your document by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
9800 For more information on that,
9801 and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
9802 's bibliography handling,
9803 have a look at section
9804 \begin_inset space ~
9808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9810 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9818 \begin_layout Subsection
9819 Special Environments
9822 \begin_layout Standard
9824 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
9827 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9832 \begin_inset Index idx
9837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9845 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9847 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
9854 \begin_layout Standard
9860 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
9862 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
9867 key as a fixed whitespace.
9871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9883 \change_deleted 177693 1654619837
9887 \change_inserted 177693 1654619839
9891 \begin_inset space ~
9895 \change_deleted 177693 1654619842
9897 \change_inserted 177693 1654619844
9902 instead of an end-of-word marker.
9921 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in \SpecialChar LyX
9923 If you need to insert blank lines,
9924 you will still need to use
9927 arg "newline-insert newline"
9946 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9948 when you finish using the
9954 you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
9961 environment inside of others.
9964 \begin_layout Standard
9965 There are a few quirks with this environment:
9968 \begin_layout Itemize
9972 arg "newline-insert newline"
9975 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
9976 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9980 \begin_inset space \space{}
9990 arg "newline-insert newline"
9996 \begin_layout Itemize
10000 arg "newline-insert newline"
10010 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10016 \begin_layout Itemize
10017 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
10018 You must put at least one
10022 in any line you want blank.
10028 \begin_layout Itemize
10029 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
10033 since that will insert
10038 You get the typewriter double quotes with
10041 arg "self-insert \""
10047 \begin_layout Standard
10048 Here is an example:
10051 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10055 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10059 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10063 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10067 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10068 printf("Hello World!
10073 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10077 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10081 \begin_layout Standard
10082 This is just the standard
10083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10093 \begin_layout Standard
10101 such as program source,
10102 shell scripts and so on.
10103 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text as if you used a typewriter.
10104 \begin_inset Index idx
10109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10110 Paragraph environments
10115 For longer parts of programming code,
10116 use the listings inset that is described in the chapter
10118 Program Code Listings
10123 \begin_inset space ~
10131 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10135 \begin_inset Index idx
10140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10149 \begin_layout Standard
10154 environment is similar to the
10159 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a computer console text.
10164 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
10178 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a
10179 \change_deleted 177693 1654619849
10181 \change_inserted 177693 1654619851
10184 space) and you can have empty lines.
10198 \begin_layout Itemize
10199 have a certain language and a text style
10202 \begin_layout Itemize
10203 contain hyperlinks,
10205 foot- and margin notes,
10209 index- and nomenclature entries,
10214 floats and \SpecialChar TeX
10218 \begin_layout Standard
10219 Because of these properties
10223 works like a typewriter.
10224 Here is an example:
10227 \begin_layout Verbatim
10232 \begin_layout Verbatim
10236 The following 2 lines are empty:
10239 \begin_layout Verbatim
10243 \begin_layout Verbatim
10247 \begin_layout Verbatim
10249 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
10254 \begin_layout Standard
10259 environment is identical to
10263 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
10264 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
10271 \begin_layout Verbatim*
10276 \begin_layout Section
10277 Nesting Environments
10278 \begin_inset Index idx
10283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10285 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10300 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10309 \begin_layout Subsection
10313 \begin_layout Standard
10315 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific properties.
10316 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of another block.
10317 For example you have three main points in an outline,
10318 but point #2 also has two subpoints.
10320 you have a list inside of another list,
10321 with the inner list
10322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10332 \begin_layout Enumerate
10336 \begin_layout Enumerate
10341 \begin_layout Enumerate
10345 \begin_layout Enumerate
10350 \begin_layout Enumerate
10354 \begin_layout Standard
10355 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
10356 Nesting an environment is quite simple:
10359 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10361 \begin_inset space ~
10365 \begin_inset space ~
10373 \begin_inset space ~
10377 \begin_inset space ~
10382 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are nested).
10383 Instead of the menu,
10384 you can also use the toolbar buttons
10387 arg "depth-increment"
10393 arg "depth-decrement"
10396 or the key bindings
10407 arg "depth-increment"
10413 arg "depth-decrement"
10417 The change will work on the current selection,
10418 if you have made one (allowing you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once),
10419 or the current paragraph.
10422 \begin_layout Standard
10423 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
10424 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
10425 If it is invalid to do so,
10426 nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
10428 if you change the depth of one paragraph,
10429 it affects the depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
10432 \begin_layout Standard
10433 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
10434 In \SpecialChar LyX
10436 you can nest just about anything inside anything else,
10437 as you're about to find out.
10438 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
10441 \begin_layout Subsection
10442 What You Can and Can't Nest
10445 \begin_layout Standard
10446 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you,
10447 we need to tell you a little bit more about how nesting works.
10450 \begin_layout Standard
10451 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated than a simple yes or no.
10452 There are three types of paragraph environments:
10455 \begin_layout Itemize
10456 Completely unnestable
10459 \begin_layout Itemize
10461 you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other things inside them.
10464 \begin_layout Itemize
10466 you can nest them into other environments,
10467 but you can't nest anything into them.
10470 \begin_layout Standard
10471 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior,
10472 and which paragraph environments have them:
10475 \begin_layout Description
10476 Unnestable Can't nest them.
10477 Can't nest into them.
10481 \begin_layout Itemize
10487 \begin_layout Itemize
10493 \begin_layout Itemize
10499 \begin_layout Itemize
10505 \begin_layout Itemize
10512 \begin_layout Description
10514 \begin_inset space ~
10517 Nestable You can nest them.
10518 You can nest other things into them.
10522 \begin_layout Itemize
10528 \begin_layout Itemize
10534 \begin_layout Itemize
10540 \begin_layout Itemize
10546 \begin_layout Itemize
10552 \begin_layout Itemize
10558 \begin_layout Itemize
10564 \begin_layout Itemize
10571 \begin_layout Itemize
10577 \begin_layout Itemize
10584 \begin_layout Description
10585 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
10586 You can't nest anything into them.
10590 \begin_layout Itemize
10596 \begin_layout Itemize
10602 \begin_layout Itemize
10608 \begin_layout Itemize
10614 \begin_layout Itemize
10620 \begin_layout Itemize
10626 \begin_layout Itemize
10632 \begin_layout Itemize
10638 \begin_layout Itemize
10644 \begin_layout Itemize
10650 \begin_layout Itemize
10656 \begin_layout Itemize
10662 \begin_layout Itemize
10668 \begin_layout Itemize
10672 \begin_inset space ~
10678 \begin_layout Itemize
10685 \begin_layout Standard
10686 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10695 Although it is possible,
10697 to nest numbered section headings like
10708 \begin_inset space ~
10712 it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas nested section headings violate this.
10720 \begin_layout Subsection
10721 Nesting Other Things:
10726 \begin_inset Index idx
10731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10733 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10750 \begin_layout Standard
10751 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments,
10752 but which are affected by nesting anyhow.
10756 \begin_layout Itemize
10760 \begin_layout Itemize
10764 \begin_layout Itemize
10768 \begin_layout Standard
10770 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10779 Figures and tables in
10783 are not affected by this.
10788 Have a look at section
10789 \begin_inset space ~
10793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10795 reference "sec:Floats"
10800 for more information about
10807 \begin_layout Standard
10809 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
10812 or an equation is inline,
10813 it goes wherever the paragraph it is in goes.
10816 \begin_layout Standard
10818 if you have an equation,
10819 figure or table in a
10820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10828 it behaves just like a
10829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10836 paragraph environment.
10837 You can nest it into any environment,
10838 but you obviously can't nest anything into it.
10841 \begin_layout Standard
10842 Here's an example with a table:
10845 \begin_layout Enumerate
10850 \begin_layout Enumerate
10851 This is (a) and it's nested.
10855 \begin_layout Standard
10856 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10862 \begin_layout Standard
10864 \begin_inset Tabular
10865 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10866 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10867 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10868 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10952 \begin_layout Standard
10953 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10960 \begin_layout Enumerate
10962 The table is actually nested inside (a).
10966 \begin_layout Enumerate
10970 \begin_layout Standard
10971 If we hadn't nested the table at all,
10972 the list would look like this:
10975 \begin_layout Enumerate
10980 \begin_layout Enumerate
10981 This is (a) and it's nested.
10985 \begin_layout Standard
10986 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10992 \begin_layout Standard
10994 \begin_inset Tabular
10995 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10996 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10997 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10998 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11082 \begin_layout Standard
11083 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11089 \begin_layout Enumerate
11097 it's not nested at all.
11100 \begin_layout Enumerate
11104 \begin_layout Standard
11105 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested,
11106 but is also the first item of a new list!
11109 \begin_layout Standard
11110 There's another trap you can fall into:
11112 but not going deep enough.
11114 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
11117 \begin_layout Enumerate
11122 \begin_layout Enumerate
11123 This is (a) and it's nested.
11126 \begin_layout Standard
11127 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11133 \begin_layout Standard
11135 \begin_inset Tabular
11136 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
11137 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11138 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11139 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11224 \begin_layout Standard
11225 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11231 \begin_layout Enumerate
11233 The table is actually nested inside Item One,
11241 \begin_layout Enumerate
11245 \begin_layout Standard
11247 item (b) turned into the first item of a new list,
11253 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
11255 if you nest tables,
11256 figures or equations,
11257 make sure you go to the right depth!
11260 \begin_layout Subsection
11261 Usage and General Features
11264 \begin_layout Standard
11265 Speaking of levels,
11267 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
11270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11277 is the innermost possible depth.
11278 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
11281 \begin_layout Enumerate
11282 level #1 – outermost
11286 \begin_layout Enumerate
11291 \begin_layout Enumerate
11296 \begin_layout Enumerate
11301 \begin_layout Itemize
11306 \begin_layout Itemize
11315 \begin_layout Standard
11316 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit,
11317 and you can see both of them in the example.
11318 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments,
11319 you can only perform a four-fold nesting with the
11329 if we tried to nest another
11334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11342 we would get errors.
11345 \begin_layout Subsection
11347 \begin_inset Index idx
11352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11354 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
11357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11371 \begin_layout Standard
11372 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
11373 We have several examples of nested environments.
11375 we explain how we created the example,
11376 so that you can reproduce them.
11379 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11381 The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
11384 \begin_layout Labeling
11385 \labelwidthstring MMM
11386 #1-a This is the outermost level.
11395 \begin_layout Labeling
11396 \labelwidthstring MMM
11397 #2-a This is level #2.
11398 We created it by using
11401 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11407 arg "depth-increment"
11414 \begin_layout Labeling
11415 \labelwidthstring MMM
11416 #3-a This is level #3.
11426 arg "depth-increment"
11430 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
11434 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11440 arg "depth-increment"
11447 \begin_layout Standard
11454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11464 We did this by entering
11467 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11474 arg "depth-increment"
11478 then changing the paragraph environment to
11483 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph —
11484 it also works for the
11501 \begin_layout Standard
11511 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11517 \begin_layout Labeling
11518 \labelwidthstring MMM
11519 #4-a This is level #4.
11523 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11526 and changed the paragraph environment back to
11532 we can't nest anything inside a
11537 which is why we're still at level #4.
11543 keep nesting things inside
11544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11555 \begin_layout Labeling
11556 \labelwidthstring MMM
11557 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
11562 \begin_layout Labeling
11563 \labelwidthstring MMM
11564 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
11565 and this is level #6.
11567 you should know how we made these two.
11571 \begin_layout Labeling
11572 \labelwidthstring MMM
11573 #5-b Back to level #5.
11577 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11583 arg "depth-decrement"
11590 \begin_layout Labeling
11591 \labelwidthstring MMM
11595 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11601 arg "depth-decrement"
11605 we're back at level #4.
11609 \begin_layout Labeling
11610 \labelwidthstring MMM
11611 #3-b Back to level #3.
11612 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
11616 \begin_layout Labeling
11617 \labelwidthstring MMM
11618 #2-b Back to level #2.
11622 \begin_layout Labeling
11623 \labelwidthstring MMM
11625 back to the outermost level,
11627 After this sentence,
11632 and change the paragraph environment back to
11639 \begin_layout Standard
11640 We could have also used the
11659 environment in place of the
11664 The example would have worked exactly the same.
11667 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11672 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11673 This is the LyX-Code environment,
11678 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11688 arg "depth-increment"
11693 \begin_inset Newline newline
11697 we will change to the
11705 \begin_layout Enumerate
11714 \begin_layout Enumerate
11715 Notice how the nested
11719 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
11724 but also inherits its font and spacing!
11728 \begin_layout Standard
11729 We ended this example by entering
11735 we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
11739 and reset the nesting depth by using
11742 arg "depth-decrement"
11748 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11761 \begin_inset Argument 1
11764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11767 Levels and other list environments
11775 \begin_layout Enumerate
11781 paragraph environment.
11782 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
11786 \begin_layout Enumerate
11791 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11797 arg "depth-increment"
11802 what happens if we nest an
11806 environment inside of this one?
11807 It will be at level #3,
11808 but what will its label be?
11813 \begin_layout Itemize
11825 even though it's at level #3.
11827 its label is a bullet.
11828 (We got here by using
11831 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11838 arg "depth-increment"
11842 then changing the environment to
11850 \begin_layout Itemize
11855 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11862 arg "depth-increment"
11866 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
11871 \begin_layout Enumerate
11873 to get to level #5.
11876 we also changed the paragraph environment back to
11881 Notice the type of numbering,
11887 because we are in the
11895 environment (that is,
11911 \begin_layout Enumerate
11916 change the paragraph environment,
11917 but decrease the nesting depth?
11918 What type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
11922 \begin_layout Enumerate
11924 as if you couldn't guess by now,
11928 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11931 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
11934 \begin_layout Enumerate
11938 arg "depth-decrement"
11941 to decrease the depth after the next
11944 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11951 \begin_layout Enumerate
11953 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
11958 \begin_layout Enumerate
11960 Even though we've changed levels,
11962 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral as the label.Why?
11965 \begin_layout Enumerate
11967 even though the nesting depth has changed,
11979 that \SpecialChar LyX
11984 reset the counter for the label.
11988 \begin_layout Enumerate
11992 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11998 arg "depth-decrement"
12002 and we're back to level #2.
12004 we not only changed the nesting depth,
12005 but we also moved back into the twofold-nested
12013 \begin_layout Enumerate
12014 The same thing happens if we do another
12017 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12023 arg "depth-decrement"
12026 sequence and return to level #1,
12027 the outermost level.
12030 \begin_layout Standard
12032 we reset the environment to
12038 the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling \SpecialChar LyX
12048 The number of other
12052 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
12058 The same rule applies for the
12066 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12071 \begin_layout Enumerate
12072 We're going to go totally nuts now.
12073 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples,
12074 nor will we go into the same detail with how we did it.
12084 \begin_layout Standard
12093 arg "depth-increment"
12102 level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created the example in parentheses someplace.
12104 the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
12105 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
12106 Either before or after this,
12107 we will put in the level.
12111 \begin_layout Enumerate
12118 level #1) This is the next item in the list.
12122 \begin_layout Verse
12123 Now we will add verse.
12124 \begin_inset Newline newline
12127 It will get much worse.
12128 \begin_inset Newline newline
12139 arg "depth-increment"
12151 \begin_layout Verse
12154 \begin_inset Newline newline
12157 Bippitey boppitey boo!
12158 \begin_inset Newline newline
12164 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12172 \begin_layout Verse
12173 Here comes a table:
12177 \begin_layout Standard
12178 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
12184 \begin_layout Standard
12186 \begin_inset Tabular
12187 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
12188 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
12189 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
12190 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
12192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
12195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
12233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12275 \begin_layout Verse
12279 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12291 arg "depth-increment"
12298 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12305 \begin_inset Newline newline
12313 arg "depth-decrement"
12320 \begin_layout Enumerate
12327 level #1) This is another item.
12328 Note that selecting a
12332 resets the nesting depth to level #1,
12333 so we increased the nesting depth 3 times to put the table inside the
12340 \begin_layout Quotation
12341 We're now ending the
12345 list and changing to
12350 We're still at level #1.
12351 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
12352 The next set of paragraphs is a
12353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12360 We will nest both the
12367 \begin_inset space ~
12372 environments inside of this one,
12373 then use another nested
12377 for the letter body.
12381 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12384 to preserve the depth.
12385 Remember that you need to use
12388 arg "newline-insert newline"
12391 to create multiple lines inside the
12398 \begin_inset space ~
12408 \begin_layout Right Address
12410 \begin_inset Newline newline
12415 \begin_inset Newline newline
12421 \begin_layout Address
12423 \begin_inset space ~
12429 \begin_layout Quotation
12430 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
12431 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12434 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
12436 several of our cows have mysteriously exploded,
12437 creating a backlog in our orders for methane.
12438 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order as soon as possible.
12440 we thank you for your patience.
12443 \begin_layout Quotation
12446 now have a special on beef.
12447 If you are interested,
12448 please return the enclosed pricing and order form with your order,
12449 along with payment.
12452 \begin_layout Quotation
12453 We thank you again for your patience.
12456 \begin_layout Address
12458 \begin_inset Newline newline
12465 \begin_layout Quotation
12466 That ends that example!
12469 \begin_layout Standard
12471 nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
12472 gives you a lot of power with just a few keystrokes.
12473 We could have easily nested an
12495 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
12498 \begin_layout Subsection
12500 \begin_inset Index idx
12505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12507 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12522 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12524 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
12531 \begin_layout Standard
12532 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
12533 For example you need two different enumerations:
12536 \begin_layout Enumerate
12541 \begin_layout Enumerate
12546 \begin_layout Enumerate
12550 \begin_layout Standard
12551 \begin_inset Separator plain
12557 \begin_layout Itemize
12563 \begin_layout Standard
12564 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
12570 \begin_layout Enumerate
12574 \begin_layout Enumerate
12578 \begin_layout Enumerate
12582 \begin_layout Standard
12583 To split an existing list into two lists,
12584 set the cursor at the end of a list item and use the menu
12586 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12587 Separated <Name> Above
12591 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12592 Separated <Name> Below
12595 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
12596 ) and before or behind it the new list.
12597 Inside nested environments,
12598 it is also possible to split the outer environment.
12601 \begin_layout Standard
12602 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
12603 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
12606 \begin_layout Standard
12608 you get an environment separator when you press
12611 arg "paragraph-break"
12618 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
12621 \begin_layout Section
12623 Pagination and Line Breaks
12624 \begin_inset Index idx
12629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12638 \begin_layout Standard
12640 While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors,
12642 offers you more spaces:
12643 spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot be broken at the end of a line.
12644 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are useful.
12647 \begin_layout Subsection
12649 \change_deleted 177693 1654619480
12651 \change_inserted 177693 1654619480
12655 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12657 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
12662 \begin_inset Index idx
12667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12669 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12674 \change_deleted 177693 1654619483
12676 \change_inserted 177693 1654619483
12692 \begin_layout Standard
12694 \change_deleted 177693 1654619488
12696 \change_inserted 177693 1654619490
12700 It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
12701 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
12703 \change_inserted 177693 1654619513
12706 break the line at that point.
12707 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks,
12711 \begin_layout Quote
12712 Further documentation is given in section
12713 \begin_inset Newline newline
12717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12719 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12727 \begin_layout Standard
12729 it would be a good thing to put a
12730 \change_deleted 177693 1654619535
12732 \change_inserted 177693 1654619537
12736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12744 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12750 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12761 \change_deleted 177693 1654619542
12763 \change_inserted 177693 1654619544
12768 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12769 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12771 \change_deleted 177693 1654619548
12773 \change_inserted 177693 1654619548
12777 \begin_inset space ~
12785 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
12791 \begin_layout Subsection
12793 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12795 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12800 \begin_inset Index idx
12805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12807 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12824 \begin_layout Standard
12825 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
12827 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12828 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12832 The length units are listed in Appendix
12833 \begin_inset space ~
12837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12839 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12847 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12849 \change_deleted 177693 1654667894
12851 \change_inserted 177693 1654667898
12855 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
12857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12859 name "subsec:Normal-Space"
12864 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
12866 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12868 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
12875 \begin_inset Index idx
12880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12882 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12887 \change_deleted 177693 1654667939
12889 \change_inserted 177693 1654667939
12905 \begin_layout Standard
12906 With the introduction of typewriters,
12907 it became conventional in some countries to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters at the ends of sentences.
12908 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
12909 automatically takes care about this.
12911 you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation followed by a period;
12913 \begin_inset space ~
12917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12919 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
12925 To insert a normal space,
12928 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12929 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12931 \change_deleted 177693 1654667953
12933 \change_inserted 177693 1654667953
12937 \begin_inset space ~
12945 arg "space-insert normal"
12951 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12953 \change_inserted 177693 1654668020
12957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12959 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
12964 \begin_inset Index idx
12969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12971 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12988 \begin_layout Standard
12990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12994 \change_inserted 177693 1654668039
12998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13001 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
13002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13006 \change_deleted 177693 1654619681
13008 \change_inserted 177693 1654619683
13012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13016 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide,
13018 inside abbreviations:
13021 \begin_layout Quote
13023 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13027 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
13030 \begin_layout Standard
13031 or between values and units.
13032 Compare for example this:
13033 \begin_inset Newline newline
13037 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13041 \begin_inset Newline newline
13044 10 kg (normal space
13045 \change_inserted 177693 1654668105
13051 \begin_layout Standard
13052 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
13054 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13055 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13057 \change_inserted 177693 1654668120
13059 \begin_inset space ~
13065 \begin_inset space ~
13073 arg "space-insert thin"
13079 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13083 \begin_layout Standard
13084 You can also insert the following space types:
13087 \begin_layout Description
13089 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
13091 \begin_inset space ~
13097 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13101 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
13105 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13109 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
13111 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
13114 space between the arrows.
13115 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
13119 \begin_layout Description
13121 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
13123 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
13127 \begin_inset space ~
13130 space A line with a
13131 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13135 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
13139 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13143 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
13145 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
13148 space between the arrows.
13151 \begin_layout Description
13153 \begin_inset space ~
13157 \begin_inset space ~
13160 space A line with a
13161 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13165 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
13169 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13172 negative thin space between the arrows.
13175 \begin_layout Description
13177 \begin_inset space ~
13181 \begin_inset space ~
13184 space A line with a
13185 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13189 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
13193 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13196 negative medium space between the arrows.
13199 \begin_layout Description
13201 \begin_inset space ~
13205 \begin_inset space ~
13208 space A line with a
13209 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13213 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
13217 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13220 negative thick space between the arrows.
13223 \begin_layout Description
13225 \change_deleted 177693 1654668288
13227 \change_inserted 177693 1654668297
13229 \begin_inset space ~
13235 \begin_inset space ~
13239 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13243 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13247 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
13251 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13255 \change_deleted 177693 1654668308
13257 \change_inserted 177693 1654668324
13259 \begin_inset space ~
13265 \begin_inset space ~
13269 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13272 em) space between the arrows.
13275 \begin_layout Description
13277 \begin_inset space ~
13281 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13285 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13289 \begin_inset space \quad{}
13293 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13297 \change_deleted 177693 1654668332
13299 \change_inserted 177693 1654668332
13303 \begin_inset space ~
13307 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13310 em) space between the arrows.
13313 \begin_layout Description
13315 \change_deleted 177693 1654668340
13317 \change_inserted 177693 1654668345
13319 \begin_inset space ~
13325 \begin_inset space ~
13329 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13333 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13337 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
13341 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13345 \change_deleted 177693 1654668349
13347 \change_inserted 177693 1654668352
13349 \begin_inset space ~
13353 \change_deleted 177693 1654668352
13357 \begin_inset space ~
13361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13364 em) space between the arrows.
13367 \begin_layout Description
13369 \begin_inset space ~
13373 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13377 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
13382 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13386 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13389 cm space between the arrows.
13392 \begin_layout Standard
13394 \begin_inset space ~
13398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13400 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
13405 lists the different space sizes.
13408 \begin_layout Standard
13409 \begin_inset Float table
13416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13417 \begin_inset Caption Standard
13419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13422 name "tab:Width-of-the"
13426 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
13434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13436 \begin_inset Tabular
13437 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
13438 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
13439 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
13440 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
13442 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13453 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13466 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13475 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13480 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13490 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13495 \change_deleted 177693 1654619715
13497 \change_inserted 177693 1654621248
13498 Non-breaking Normal
13505 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13510 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13520 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13529 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13534 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13538 \change_inserted 177693 1654620497
13540 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13544 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13555 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
13556 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13561 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13567 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13572 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13574 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13583 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
13584 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13589 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13595 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13600 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13602 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13612 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13621 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13626 \change_deleted 177693 1654620640
13628 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13632 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13638 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13648 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13657 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13662 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13672 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13681 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13686 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13696 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13701 \change_deleted 177693 1654620687
13703 \change_inserted 177693 1654620689
13707 \change_deleted 177693 1654620678
13709 \change_inserted 177693 1654620679
13713 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13721 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13726 \change_deleted 177693 1654620674
13728 \change_inserted 177693 1654620676
13732 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13736 \change_inserted 177693 1654620708
13738 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13742 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13754 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13767 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13772 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13782 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13787 \change_deleted 177693 1654668383
13789 \change_inserted 177693 1654668384
13793 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13801 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13806 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13827 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13829 \begin_inset Index idx
13834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13836 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13853 \begin_layout Standard
13854 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
13855 feature for adding extra space in a uniform fashion.
13857 \change_inserted 177693 1654621642
13860 Fill is actually a variable length space,
13861 whose length always equals the remaining space between the left and right margins.
13862 If there is more than one H
13863 \change_inserted 177693 1654621633
13867 they divide the available space equally between themselves.
13870 \begin_layout Standard
13871 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
13874 \begin_layout Quote
13876 This is on the left side
13877 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13880 This is on the right
13883 \begin_layout Quote
13886 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13890 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13896 \begin_layout Quote
13899 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13903 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13907 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13913 \begin_layout Standard
13914 That was an example in the
13920 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13924 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13928 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13931 is one in a standard paragraph.
13932 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text,
13937 sitting in-between the two arrows.
13940 \begin_layout Standard
13942 \change_deleted 177693 1654621654
13944 \change_inserted 177693 1654621654
13947 s can be made visible when you choose one of the
13950 \begin_inset space ~
13955 s in the space dialog:
13956 The following patterns are available:
13959 \begin_layout Standard
13962 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
13966 \begin_inset space ~
13972 \begin_layout Standard
13975 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
13979 \begin_inset space ~
13985 \begin_layout Standard
13988 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
13992 \begin_inset space ~
13998 \begin_layout Standard
14001 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
14005 \begin_inset space ~
14011 \begin_layout Standard
14013 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
14015 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
14019 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
14020 (= opened downwards)
14024 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
14028 \begin_inset space ~
14034 \begin_layout Standard
14036 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
14038 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
14042 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
14047 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
14051 \begin_inset space ~
14057 \begin_layout Standard
14058 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14068 \change_deleted 177693 1654621656
14070 \change_inserted 177693 1654621656
14073 is at the beginning of a line,
14078 in the first line in a paragraph,
14082 \change_deleted 177693 1654621657
14084 \change_inserted 177693 1654621657
14087 s from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
14088 If you need space in this case anyway,
14090 \change_deleted 177693 1654668432
14094 \change_inserted 177693 1654668434
14099 option in the space dialog.
14107 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14109 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14111 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14116 \begin_inset Index idx
14121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14123 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14140 \begin_layout Standard
14141 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
14143 you want to create the following multiple choice question:
14146 \begin_layout Standard
14147 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
14150 What is correct English?:
14151 \begin_inset Newline newline
14155 \begin_inset Newline newline
14159 \begin_inset space ~
14162 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
14163 \begin_inset Newline newline
14167 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14178 \begin_inset Newline newline
14182 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14193 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
14199 \begin_layout Standard
14201 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
14202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14206 \begin_inset space ~
14210 \begin_inset space ~
14214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14219 you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
14221 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14222 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14226 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two lines and insert
14227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14231 \begin_inset space ~
14235 \begin_inset space ~
14239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14242 into the phantom inset (note the space after
14243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14251 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
14252 That is why it is named
14253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14261 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
14262 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding dimension.
14265 \begin_layout Subsection
14267 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14269 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
14274 \begin_inset Index idx
14279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14281 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14298 \begin_layout Standard
14299 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph,
14302 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14303 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14305 \begin_inset space ~
14311 There you find the following sizes:
14314 \begin_layout Standard
14318 \change_inserted 177693 1654621302
14327 \change_inserted 177693 1654621304
14335 \change_inserted 177693 1654621306
14340 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
14341 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
14345 \change_inserted 177693 1654621298
14350 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
14352 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14353 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14355 \begin_inset space ~
14361 \begin_inset Index idx
14366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14368 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14382 for the paragraph separation.
14383 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
14386 \change_inserted 177693 1654621292
14394 \change_inserted 177693 1654621294
14400 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
14404 \begin_layout Standard
14406 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
14415 equal to the height,
14416 or half the height,
14417 of a line in the current font size including line spacing.
14422 \begin_layout Standard
14426 \change_inserted 177693 1654621333
14432 \begin_inset Index idx
14437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14439 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14453 is a variable space,
14454 set so that the space is maximal within one page.
14456 you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
14461 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second one at the bottom,
14462 because the space between them is then maximal.
14466 \change_inserted 177693 1654621321
14474 \change_inserted 177693 1654621325
14480 they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
14484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14488 \change_inserted 177693 1654621587
14493 s are described in section
14494 \begin_inset space ~
14498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14500 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
14510 If there are several
14513 \change_inserted 177693 1654621344
14519 they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
14520 You can therefore use
14523 \change_inserted 177693 1654621329
14528 s to center text on a page,
14529 or even place text 2/3 down a page.
14532 \begin_layout Standard
14537 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
14538 \begin_inset space ~
14542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14544 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
14552 \begin_layout Standard
14553 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14564 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of a page,
14565 the space is only added if you have also checked the option
14577 \begin_layout Subsection
14578 Paragraph Alignment
14579 \begin_inset Index idx
14584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14586 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14603 \begin_layout Standard
14604 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
14606 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14609 dialog (toolbar button
14612 arg "layout-paragraph"
14616 There are five possibilities:
14619 \begin_layout Itemize
14627 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
14633 \begin_layout Itemize
14641 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
14647 \begin_layout Itemize
14655 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
14661 \begin_layout Itemize
14669 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
14675 \begin_layout Itemize
14683 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
14689 \begin_layout Standard
14690 The default in most cases is justified alignment,
14691 in which the inter-word spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between the left and right margins.
14692 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory,
14693 and look like this:
14696 \begin_layout Standard
14698 This paragraph is right aligned,
14701 \begin_layout Standard
14703 this one is centered,
14706 \begin_layout Standard
14708 this one is left aligned.
14711 \begin_layout Subsection
14713 \begin_inset Index idx
14718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14720 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14735 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14737 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
14744 \begin_layout Standard
14745 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
14746 does the page breaks in your document,
14747 you can force a page break where you want one.
14748 Normally this will not be necessary,
14749 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
14750 is good at page breaking.
14751 Only if you use a lot of
14757 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
14760 \begin_layout Standard
14761 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished and you have checked in the preview to see if you
14765 have to change the page breaking.
14768 \begin_layout Standard
14769 There are two types of page breaks:
14770 One that ends the page without any special action.
14771 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
14773 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14774 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14776 \begin_inset space ~
14783 that is inserted via the menu
14785 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14786 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14788 \begin_inset space ~
14794 ends a page but stretches the content of the page,
14795 so that it fills out the complete page.
14796 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page on which only the last few lines are absent.
14799 \begin_layout Standard
14800 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears at the top of a page.
14803 the wrong way to do it.
14805 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables appear at the top of a page (or the bottom,
14806 or on their own page) without having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
14808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14810 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
14815 to learn more about
14822 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14824 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14826 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
14831 \begin_inset Index idx
14836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14838 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14855 \begin_layout Standard
14856 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed directly on the next page,
14857 you can also clear pages while breaking them.
14858 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything,
14859 including unprocessed floats,
14860 from the earlier part of the document are placed after it,
14861 if necessary by adding pages.
14864 \begin_layout Standard
14865 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
14867 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14868 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14870 \begin_inset space ~
14876 When you have a two-sided document like a book,
14877 you can use the menu
14879 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14880 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14882 \begin_inset space ~
14886 \begin_inset space ~
14891 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand page (odd-numbered),
14892 if necessary by adding a page.
14893 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706231
14897 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14899 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706295
14900 Suppressing Page Breaks
14903 \begin_inset Index idx
14908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14910 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706382
14914 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14929 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005685
14931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14933 name "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
14938 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706444
14942 \begin_layout Standard
14944 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
14945 To discourage page break at
14946 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005668
14948 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
14949 certain point you can use
14953 \SpecialChar menuseparator
14955 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706512
14958 \SpecialChar menuseparator
14960 \change_deleted 5381 1686690158
14962 \change_inserted 5381 1686690161
14964 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706556
14971 \change_inserted 5863208 1602707015
14972 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
14977 \begin_layout Subsection
14979 \begin_inset Index idx
14984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14991 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14993 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
15000 \begin_layout Standard
15001 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks:
15002 one simply breaks the line.
15003 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
15005 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15006 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
15008 \begin_inset space ~
15012 \begin_inset space ~
15020 arg "newline-insert newline"
15024 Another type that is inserted via the menu
15026 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15027 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
15029 \begin_inset space ~
15033 \begin_inset space ~
15041 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
15044 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between the page margins.
15045 This is useful to avoid
15046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15050 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15053 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
15056 \begin_layout Standard
15057 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
15059 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
15060 is very good at line breaking.
15063 a number of situations where it is necessary to set a line break actively,
15065 in a poem or for an address (see sections
15066 \begin_inset space ~
15070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15072 reference "sec:Quote"
15079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15081 reference "sec:Verse"
15087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15089 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
15097 \begin_layout Subsection
15099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15101 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
15106 \begin_inset Index idx
15111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15120 \begin_layout Standard
15122 \begin_inset CommandInset line
15133 \begin_layout Standard
15137 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15138 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
15140 \begin_inset space ~
15145 you can insert horizontal lines.
15146 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline of the current text line or the paragraph.
15147 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
15150 \begin_layout Standard
15152 \begin_inset CommandInset line
15163 \begin_layout Section
15164 Characters and Symbols
15167 \begin_layout Standard
15168 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
15169 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter,
15171 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
15173 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15179 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
15184 for information on how this is done.
15187 \begin_layout Standard
15188 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard,
15193 dialog via the menu
15195 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15196 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
15202 \begin_layout Standard
15203 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
15206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15212 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
15214 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
15222 \begin_layout Section
15223 Fonts and Text Styles
15224 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15226 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
15233 \begin_layout Subsection
15235 \begin_inset Index idx
15240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15242 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15259 \begin_layout Standard
15260 There are two types of fonts:
15263 \begin_layout Description
15265 \begin_inset space ~
15269 \begin_inset Index idx
15274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15276 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15290 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
15291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15295 characters) in the font.
15296 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are well suited for scaling to any requested size.
15297 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
15298 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
15299 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
15300 \begin_inset Newline newline
15303 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
15304 But to achieve a better quality,
15305 many fonts define several font sizes.
15306 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font sizes than at small ones.
15307 \begin_inset Newline newline
15323 \begin_inset space ~
15331 \begin_layout Description
15333 \begin_inset space ~
15337 \begin_inset Index idx
15342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15344 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15359 are defined by bitmap graphics from the start;
15360 so they will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
15362 they don't scale well,
15363 because in order to scale a glyph,
15364 each pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
15365 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an image manipulation program.
15366 In order to mitigate this effect,
15367 bitmap fonts are typically provided in several fixed sizes typically from around 8
15368 \begin_inset space ~
15371 pixels high up to 34
15372 \begin_inset space ~
15375 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
15376 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary to display each glyph;
15377 so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than scalable fonts.
15378 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have to be scaled by doubling pixels,
15380 \begin_inset Newline newline
15383 Bitmap fonts are named
15386 \begin_inset space ~
15391 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
15394 \begin_layout Standard
15395 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are designed for,
15396 while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
15397 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
15398 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs use scalable fonts.
15401 \begin_layout Standard
15402 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document,
15403 look at its document properties.
15406 \begin_layout Standard
15407 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards specifying
15408 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
15410 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
15413 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
15415 instead of changing to an italicized version of the current font,
15416 to emphasize text you use an
15417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15425 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
15427 In \SpecialChar LyX
15429 you do things based on contexts,
15430 rather than focusing on typesetting details.
15433 \begin_layout Subsection
15436 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15438 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15445 \begin_layout Standard
15448 used its own fonts.
15450 you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your operating system,
15451 but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
15453 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
15454 needs some extra information about the fonts,
15455 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
15456 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared to a word processor.
15457 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts are generally of very good quality,
15458 and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
15459 files are very portable across different machines.
15461 the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
15462 has increased a lot in the meantime;
15463 so you can find packages for many free and commercial fonts.
15465 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface (see section
15466 \begin_inset space ~
15470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15472 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
15478 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
15479 code in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
15482 \begin_layout Standard
15483 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
15484 engines that are also able directly to access fonts that are installed for your operating system,
15485 namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
15486 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15488 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
15491 you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font that is installed on your system.
15492 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
15495 \begin_layout Standard
15496 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
15499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15506 some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
15508 or other font deficiencies;
15509 so you might have to experiment.
15517 \begin_layout Subsection
15518 Document Font and Font size
15519 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15521 name "subsec:Document-Font"
15526 \begin_inset Index idx
15531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15533 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15548 \begin_inset Index idx
15553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15555 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15572 \begin_layout Standard
15573 You can set the document fonts in the
15575 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15579 \begin_inset Index idx
15584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15586 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15605 section of the dialog,
15606 you can specify which font should be used for the three different font shapes —
15611 \begin_inset space ~
15621 and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors for (some) sans
15622 \begin_inset space ~
15625 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
15628 \begin_layout Standard
15634 you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
15635 This requires that you use
15648 as the output format,
15650 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15654 \begin_inset space \space{}
15657 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
15658 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15659 installed (see section
15660 \begin_inset space ~
15664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15666 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15672 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
15674 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
15675 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
15677 \begin_inset space ~
15682 since \SpecialChar LyX
15683 cannot determine the family.
15684 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts,
15685 due to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15688 cannot determine this in advance,
15689 so you might need to experiment.
15692 \begin_layout Standard
15693 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
15694 fonts (which is the default),
15695 the possible options for the font include
15699 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
15706 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
15708 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
15710 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
15715 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
15717 depending on the document language,
15721 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
15722 either the standard \SpecialChar TeX
15724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15730 \begin_inset space ~
15736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15746 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
15747 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
15749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15755 \begin_inset space ~
15761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15769 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
15774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15791 European Computer Modern
15794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15803 some classes set different default fonts.
15806 \begin_layout Standard
15812 it looks pixelated in PDF output,
15813 especially when you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
15817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15818 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
15821 \begin_inset space ~
15826 version 6 or later,
15827 because this program includes a special bitmap font renderer.
15832 To get rid of pixelated fonts,
15833 you have to use a vector font.
15834 Depending on how your document should look,
15838 \begin_layout Itemize
15842 \begin_inset space ~
15848 which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
15860 \begin_inset space ~
15865 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15866 community in order to replace
15870 as the default font.
15871 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
15872 Except for some details,
15873 where the appearance was improved,
15877 \begin_inset space ~
15890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15891 One difference is improved kerning.
15899 \begin_layout Itemize
15900 If you do not like the look of
15909 you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided,
15911 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15915 \begin_inset space ~
15921 \begin_inset space ~
15931 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
15932 \begin_inset space ~
15935 serif and typewriter fonts,
15939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15940 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
15941 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15948 \begin_inset space ~
15957 for sans serif text),
15958 or different shapes of the same font,
15960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15964 \begin_inset space \space{}
15972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15976 \begin_inset space \space{}
15982 \begin_inset space ~
15990 \begin_inset space ~
16000 but you can also select your own.
16001 \begin_inset Newline newline
16004 The differences between roman,
16008 \begin_inset space ~
16017 fonts are explained in section
16018 \begin_inset space ~
16022 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16024 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16030 \begin_inset Newline newline
16036 \begin_inset space ~
16041 was originally designed for newspapers.
16042 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit into the small newspaper columns.
16046 \begin_inset space ~
16051 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
16054 \begin_layout Standard
16055 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
16071 Some classes provide additional sizes.
16076 depends on the class you are using.
16077 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
16080 \begin_layout Standard
16081 Note that the font size is the
16086 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
16087 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used in footnotes,
16089 and subscripts) by this value.
16090 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
16093 \begin_inset space ~
16099 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
16100 \begin_inset space ~
16104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16106 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16114 \begin_layout Standard
16118 \begin_inset space ~
16123 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should be roman,
16125 \begin_inset space ~
16128 serif or typewriter.
16133 selection uses what is preset by the class,
16134 the other selections override this.
16145 but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
16148 \begin_layout Standard
16153 LaTeX font encoding
16155 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16161 \begin_inset Index idx
16166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16169 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16184 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
16186 \begin_inset space ~
16190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16192 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
16201 you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
16202 Unless you have specific reasons,
16204 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
16208 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
16216 \begin_layout Standard
16220 Use Old Style Figures
16224 Use True Small Caps
16227 These are extra features some fonts provide.
16230 Use Old Style Figures
16233 old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures) are used.
16234 Old style figures are the numerals (0
16235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16239 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16242 9) with ascenders and descenders,
16243 which makes them fit nicely with lowercase letters.
16246 Use True Small Caps
16248 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made of scaled capitals.
16249 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets;
16250 they generally look better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
16251 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
16255 \begin_layout Standard
16257 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
16260 you can add additional (comma-separated) options provided by the font package (or the
16265 if you use non-TeX fonts),
16271 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
16277 \begin_layout Standard
16282 allows users of the languages Chinese,
16284 Korean (CJK) to specify a font to display the script characters.
16288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16289 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16295 \begin_inset Index idx
16300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16303 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16317 So this has no effect for the document language
16333 \begin_layout Standard
16336 Enable micro-typographic extensions
16338 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16344 \begin_inset Index idx
16349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16352 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16370 \begin_layout Standard
16373 Disallow line breaks after dashes
16375 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
16379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16380 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
16382 if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16388 instead of ligatures (--,
16390 \begin_inset space ~
16394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16396 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16407 \begin_layout Standard
16408 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
16412 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
16415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16421 When you choose a new font or font size,
16427 change the screen font!
16428 You will only see a difference in the printed output;
16429 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
16431 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
16433 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
16438 \begin_inset space ~
16442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16444 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
16457 \begin_layout Subsection
16461 \begin_layout Standard
16462 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
16463 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document font.
16464 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
16465 fonts for your document,
16466 you can explicitly choose a math font in the dialog
16468 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16472 \begin_inset Index idx
16477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16479 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16494 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
16495 automatically selects a math font.
16496 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
16497 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
16498 's default font family
16499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16505 \begin_inset space ~
16511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16516 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the document font is available.
16519 \begin_layout Standard
16520 Note that the math font will not be used for
16524 (which is inserted with the shortcut
16530 or by the insertion of the command
16537 Also note that some math fonts are sans
16538 \begin_inset space ~
16542 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs while the math characters do not.
16544 \begin_inset space ~
16547 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
16550 \begin_inset space ~
16558 \begin_inset space ~
16563 in the document font settings.
16566 \begin_layout Standard
16567 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
16568 fonts for the document,
16569 you can only choose for math to use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
16570 font (in most cases
16571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16577 \begin_inset space ~
16583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16586 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
16587 variant of the document's class default font (in most cases
16588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16594 \begin_inset space ~
16600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16606 \begin_layout Subsection
16608 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
16610 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
16614 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
16616 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16618 name "subsec:charstyles"
16625 \begin_inset Index idx
16630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16637 \begin_inset Index idx
16642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16651 \begin_layout Standard
16652 As we've already seen,
16654 automatically changes the
16655 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
16658 style for certain paragraph environments.
16660 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
16662 we will explain how the style of selected text passages can by changed.
16663 This is where we meet the concept of
16669 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
16671 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
16675 \begin_layout Standard
16677 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
16683 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
16685 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
16699 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
16706 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16710 available with all document classes.
16712 some document classes and modules provide
16716 for specific purposes.
16717 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
16720 \begin_layout Standard
16722 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
16725 allow us just a few words of what we mean by
16734 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
16739 if you wanted to emphasize a word,
16740 you selected it and chose e.
16741 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16762 encourage the use of
16774 instead (although formal markup is still possible;
16776 \begin_inset space ~
16780 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16782 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16788 Rather than fiddling with
16793 they encourage the use of
16798 who are defined with regard to their function (e.
16799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16804 \begin_inset Quotes els
16808 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16813 \begin_inset Quotes els
16817 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16821 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
16823 using functional categories keeps you thinking about why you are actually marking up,
16824 if your markup is consistent and systematic,
16825 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
16826 On a more practical level,
16827 it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
16828 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names in
16833 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
16834 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16840 you would have to change any single occurrence.
16841 With a semantic markup (such as
16847 you'd just need to change the definition of
16852 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16855 semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions of a document,
16856 using different markup semantics.
16859 \begin_layout Standard
16861 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
16863 we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided by \SpecialChar LyX
16869 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16871 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
16872 Builtin Text Styles
16873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16875 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16882 \begin_layout Standard
16884 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
16885 The two builtin text styles can be
16886 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
16890 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
16894 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
16895 both of these styles
16898 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
16902 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006132
16904 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006135
16906 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
16913 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
16921 \begin_layout Standard
16927 do one of the following:
16930 \begin_layout Itemize
16931 click on the toolbar button
16940 \begin_layout Itemize
16941 use the key binding
16948 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
16952 \begin_layout Itemize
16954 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16958 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006154
16960 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006157
16962 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16970 arg "dialog-show character"
16974 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16978 arg "dialog-show character"
16982 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006237
16983 as described in section
16984 \begin_inset space ~
16988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16990 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16996 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006263
17006 \begin_layout Standard
17008 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006284
17010 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006284
17014 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006286
17018 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006290
17020 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006291
17024 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006296
17033 style is already active,
17034 they deactivate it.
17037 \begin_layout Standard
17038 One typically uses the
17042 style for proper names.
17045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17052 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
17054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17058 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
17062 \begin_layout Standard
17064 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
17070 is producing text in
17075 but the definition can be changed.
17080 \begin_layout Standard
17082 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
17084 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
17092 You can activate (or deactivate —
17093 it's also a toggle) the
17100 \begin_layout Itemize
17101 clicking on the toolbar button
17110 \begin_layout Itemize
17111 using the keybindings
17118 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
17122 \begin_layout Itemize
17124 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
17128 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006353
17130 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006356
17132 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
17140 arg "dialog-show character"
17144 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
17148 arg "dialog-show character"
17152 \change_deleted 630872221 1621007331
17153 as described in section
17154 \begin_inset space ~
17158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17160 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
17166 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006374
17176 \begin_layout Standard
17181 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
17183 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
17185 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
17188 packages use a different font
17189 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
17191 and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17197 \begin_layout Standard
17198 We've been using the
17202 style all over the place in this document.
17203 Here's one more example:
17206 \begin_layout Quotation
17210 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
17212 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
17218 \begin_layout Standard
17219 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
17220 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
17221 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other,
17222 we should also avoid the common tendency to overuse
17223 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
17225 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
17230 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
17232 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
17236 \begin_layout Standard
17238 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
17239 In contrast to the custom text styles,
17240 the builtin styles are represented only as font changes and integrated in the
17248 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
17251 always reset to the default font using the key binding
17258 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
17260 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
17264 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
17267 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17269 \begin_inset space ~
17272 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
17274 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
17284 arg "dialog-show character"
17290 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
17292 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
17298 arg "dialog-show character"
17302 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
17306 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17308 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
17310 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17312 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
17319 \begin_layout Standard
17321 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
17322 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class,
17323 a module (see section
17324 \begin_inset space ~
17328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17330 reference "subsec:Modules"
17339 or local layout settings (see section
17340 \begin_inset space ~
17344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17346 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
17352 As the two builtin styles,
17357 markup for specific functions.
17364 module that provides,
17365 among other things,
17366 some custom text styles to markup linguistic levels:
17378 \begin_inset Quotes els
17382 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17388 \begin_layout Standard
17390 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
17391 These styles can be found,
17395 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17397 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006495
17399 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
17405 \begin_layout Standard
17407 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
17408 For the purpose of demonstration,
17409 we have loaded in this document the optional module
17413 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
17414 By example of the emphasized style,
17415 we can see the differences in look and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same):
17420 appears as normal font change,
17421 the custom text style
17422 \begin_inset Flex Emph
17425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17427 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
17435 appears as an inset,
17436 with a label below that identifies its semantics.
17437 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
17439 the three others from the module we have loaded are:
17441 \begin_inset Flex Code
17444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17446 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
17456 \begin_inset Flex Strong
17459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17461 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
17471 \begin_inset Flex Noun
17474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17476 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
17485 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate on screen their formal appearance.
17490 \begin_layout Subsection
17492 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
17494 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
17498 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
17504 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
17506 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
17512 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
17514 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
17518 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17520 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
17525 \begin_inset Index idx
17530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17539 \begin_layout Standard
17540 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
17541 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
17545 so \SpecialChar LyX
17547 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
17549 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
17553 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
17554 the properties of text passages
17555 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
17560 an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
17562 writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts from ordinary dialog.
17563 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
17567 \begin_layout Standard
17569 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
17570 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module for this purpose (which is,
17572 generally the better way of handling such issues),
17573 you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak the properties of the respective text passages.
17578 comes in as a last resort.
17583 \begin_layout Standard
17584 Before we document how to
17585 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
17586 use custom character style
17587 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
17588 tweak the text properties
17591 we want to issue a warning yet again:
17593 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
17595 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
17600 \begin_inset Newline newline
17603 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
17606 \begin_layout Standard
17608 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
17609 use custom character styles
17610 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
17611 tweak text properties
17615 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
17618 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17620 \begin_inset space ~
17623 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
17631 arg "dialog-show character"
17634 dialog or press the toolbar button
17637 arg "dialog-show character"
17642 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
17645 boxes in this dialog,
17646 each corresponding to a different
17647 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
17649 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
17652 property that you can choose.
17653 You can choose an option for one of these properties,
17657 \begin_inset space ~
17663 which keeps the current state of that property.
17665 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
17669 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
17671 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
17676 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
17677 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph environments all at once.
17680 \begin_layout Standard
17682 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
17684 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006625
17688 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006625
17690 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
17694 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006629
17696 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006628
17702 and their options (in addition to
17705 \begin_inset space ~
17711 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
17715 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
17723 \begin_layout Labeling
17724 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17738 The possible options are:
17742 \begin_layout Labeling
17743 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17748 This is the Roman font family.
17749 Normally a serif font.
17750 It's also the default family.
17760 \begin_layout Labeling
17761 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17765 \begin_inset space ~
17772 This is the Sans Serif font family.
17784 \begin_layout Labeling
17785 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17792 This is the Typewriter font family.
17798 arg "font-typewriter"
17804 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
17808 \begin_layout Standard
17810 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
17811 The general differences of these families are:
17814 \begin_layout Itemize
17816 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
17821 fonts use characters with serifs.
17822 These are the small
17823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17830 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
17831 The following example shows the difference:
17832 \begin_inset Newline newline
17836 \begin_inset Newline newline
17841 text without serifs
17844 \begin_inset Newline newline
17847 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
17848 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
17855 \begin_layout Itemize
17857 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17862 is not recommended for use as a base type.
17863 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
17864 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
17867 \begin_layout Itemize
17869 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17883 which means every character has the same width;
17885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17902 \begin_inset Newline newline
17906 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
17909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17911 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17924 \begin_inset Note Note
17927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17929 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17930 For more on phantoms see section
17931 \begin_inset space ~
17935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17937 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
17948 \begin_inset Newline newline
17957 \begin_layout Labeling
17958 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17963 This corresponds to the print weight.
17968 \begin_layout Labeling
17969 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17974 This is the Medium font series.
17975 It's also the default series.
17978 \begin_layout Labeling
17979 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17986 This is the Bold font series.
17999 \begin_layout Labeling
18000 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18005 As the name implies.
18010 \begin_layout Labeling
18011 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18016 This is the Upright font shape.
18017 It's also the default shape.
18020 \begin_layout Labeling
18021 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18031 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
18036 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
18041 s the Italic font shape
18047 \begin_layout Labeling
18048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18055 This is the Slanted font shape
18057 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
18059 this is different from italic).
18062 \begin_layout Labeling
18063 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18067 \begin_inset space ~
18074 This is the Small caps font shape
18081 \begin_layout Labeling
18082 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18084 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18089 Alters the text color.
18090 Note that not all DVI
18091 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
18093 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18094 viewers are able to display colors.
18098 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
18100 \begin_inset space ~
18104 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18108 which means that the document default color set in
18110 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18111 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18117 \begin_inset space ~
18124 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
18126 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18128 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
18130 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18225 \begin_inset Index idx
18230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18232 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18247 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
18253 \begin_layout Labeling
18254 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18256 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
18261 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from the language of the document.
18262 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
18263 workarea in blue to indicate the change
18264 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
18265 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
18267 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
18269 \begin_inset Newline newline
18272 If you have for example,
18273 an extract of German text in a non-German document,
18275 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
18276 When using the spell checking (see section
18277 \begin_inset space ~
18281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18283 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
18288 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
18289 \begin_inset Newline newline
18292 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked,
18295 Exclude from Spellchecking
18298 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
18299 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
18303 \begin_layout Labeling
18304 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18309 Alters the size of the font.
18311 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
18313 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
18317 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
18320 numerical values here;
18321 all possible sizes are actually proportional to the document font size.
18323 you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
18325 but a general description of what you want to do.
18330 \begin_layout Labeling
18331 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18352 arg "font-size tiny"
18358 \begin_layout Labeling
18359 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18380 arg "font-size scriptsize"
18386 \begin_layout Labeling
18387 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18399 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18408 arg "font-size footnotesize"
18414 \begin_layout Labeling
18415 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18436 arg "font-size small"
18442 \begin_layout Labeling
18443 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18457 It's also the default size.
18461 arg "font-size normal"
18467 \begin_layout Labeling
18468 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18489 arg "font-size large"
18495 \begin_layout Labeling
18496 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18517 arg "font-size larger"
18523 \begin_layout Labeling
18524 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18545 arg "font-size largest"
18551 \begin_layout Labeling
18552 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18573 arg "font-size huge"
18579 \begin_layout Labeling
18580 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18601 arg "font-size giant"
18607 \begin_layout Labeling
18608 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18613 This increases the size by one step (for instance,
18615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18634 arg "font-size increase"
18640 \begin_layout Labeling
18641 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18646 This decreases the size by one step (for instance,
18648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18667 arg "font-size decrease"
18673 \begin_layout Standard
18679 don't go crazy with this feature.
18680 You should almost never need to change the font size.
18682 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments —
18684 This is here for fine-tuning only!
18685 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006744
18690 \begin_layout Standard
18692 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006776
18693 Another combo box allows to tweak
18700 \begin_layout Labeling
18701 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18703 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
18708 Alters the text color.
18709 Note that not all DVI viewers are able to display colors.
18715 which means that the document default color set in
18717 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18718 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18724 \begin_inset space ~
18824 \begin_inset Index idx
18829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18831 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
18835 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18840 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
18858 \begin_layout Labeling
18859 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18861 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
18865 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
18871 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
18872 change a few other things at the character level
18873 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
18874 have text passages being underlined
18878 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
18879 Avoid using underlining if you can!
18880 It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
18881 when you could not change fonts.
18882 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
18883 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
18884 because some people
18888 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
18895 \begin_layout Labeling
18896 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18898 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
18905 This is text with emphasize on
18908 This might seem like the same as
18913 but it is actually a bit different.
18919 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized text.
18920 Normally this font is equal to italic.
18921 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
18925 \begin_layout Labeling
18926 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18928 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
18933 Don't use underlining.
18938 \begin_layout Labeling
18939 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18941 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
18945 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
18953 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
18955 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
18964 arg "font-underline"
18970 \begin_inset Newline newline
18974 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
18977 Avoid using underbar if you can!
18978 It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
18979 when you could not change fonts.
18980 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
18981 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
18982 because some people
18986 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
18991 \begin_layout Labeling
18992 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18996 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
18998 \begin_inset space ~
19007 This is text with Double under
19008 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
19010 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
19019 arg "font-underunderline"
19023 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
19025 \begin_inset Newline newline
19028 As we just warned you against using underbar,
19029 you can imagine what we think about double underbar
19034 \begin_layout Labeling
19035 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19039 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
19041 \begin_inset space ~
19050 This is text with Wavy under
19051 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
19053 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
19062 arg "font-underwave"
19066 \begin_inset Newline newline
19069 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
19070 Keep antinausea pills handy.
19071 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
19076 \begin_layout Labeling
19077 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19079 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
19084 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
19090 \begin_layout Labeling
19091 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19093 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
19098 Don't use strikethrough.
19101 \begin_layout Labeling
19102 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19106 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
19108 \begin_inset space ~
19112 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
19120 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
19122 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
19123 Single strikethrough
19131 arg "font-strikeout"
19135 \begin_inset Newline newline
19138 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been changed in the meantime.
19141 \begin_layout Labeling
19142 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19144 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
19148 \begin_inset space ~
19152 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
19154 \begin_inset space ~
19158 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
19166 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
19168 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
19174 \begin_inset Newline newline
19177 This is used to make text hardly readable.
19181 \begin_layout Standard
19183 \change_inserted 630872221 1621007597
19184 A drop-down menu allows to change the parameters for the
19187 \begin_layout Labeling
19188 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19190 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006898
19195 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from the language of the document.
19196 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
19197 workarea in blue to indicate the change.
19198 \begin_inset Newline newline
19201 If you have for example,
19202 an extract of German text in a non-German document,
19204 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
19205 When using the spell checking (see section
19206 \begin_inset space ~
19210 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19212 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
19217 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
19218 \begin_inset Newline newline
19221 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked,
19224 Exclude from Spellchecking
19227 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
19230 \begin_layout Standard
19232 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
19233 In addition to all the formal markup described above,
19234 the dialog also provides you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
19235 \begin_inset space ~
19239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19241 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
19247 \change_inserted 630872221 1621181776
19251 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
19257 \begin_layout Itemize
19259 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
19267 This is text with emphasize on
19272 \begin_layout Itemize
19276 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
19284 This is text with Noun on.
19286 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
19294 this is a logical attribute.
19295 Normally it's equivalent to
19298 \begin_inset space ~
19308 \begin_layout Standard
19309 So you have a huge number of combinations to
19310 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
19312 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
19317 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
19318 chosen a new character style
19319 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
19320 applied a text property
19323 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
19326 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
19328 \begin_inset space ~
19331 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
19339 arg "dialog-show character"
19345 arg "dialog-show character"
19350 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
19354 You can activate the
19355 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
19357 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
19358 last applied properties
19360 by using the toolbar button
19363 arg "textstyle-apply"
19367 The button lets you apply
19368 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
19369 your custom character style
19370 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
19373 even when the dialog isn't visible.
19375 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
19376 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again,
19377 a press on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
19378 20) most recently applied settings,
19379 from which you can select one.
19384 \begin_layout Standard
19385 To completely reset the
19386 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
19388 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
19389 text properties of a selection
19393 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
19395 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
19405 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
19410 from the menu of the toolbar button
19413 arg "textstyle-apply"
19420 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
19421 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose you just set the shape to
19422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19441 \begin_inset space ~
19455 \begin_layout Standard
19457 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19458 You should also know something about the differences between the three main font types
19466 \begin_inset space ~
19479 \begin_layout Itemize
19481 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19491 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19495 which means every character has the same width;
19497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19514 \begin_inset Newline newline
19518 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
19521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19532 \begin_inset Note Note
19535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19536 For more on phantoms see section
19537 \begin_inset space ~
19541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19543 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
19554 \begin_inset Newline newline
19560 \begin_layout Itemize
19562 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19567 fonts use characters with serifs.
19568 These are the small
19569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19576 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
19577 The following example shows the difference:
19578 \begin_inset Newline newline
19582 \begin_inset Newline newline
19587 text without serifs
19590 \begin_inset Newline newline
19593 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
19594 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
19601 \begin_layout Itemize
19603 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19608 is not recommended for use as a base type.
19609 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
19610 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
19615 \begin_layout Standard
19617 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
19618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19625 refers to applying or removing font properties.
19626 When a property is marked for toggling in the
19629 \begin_inset space ~
19635 applying the style to text that already has the property will cause the property to be removed.
19638 apply a style with properties A,
19639 B and C to text that currently has font properties B,
19642 and if B is set to toggle and C is set not to toggle,
19643 the text ends up with properties A,
19647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19662 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
19663 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
19664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19672 toggling behavior is up to you.
19676 \begin_inset space ~
19682 all of the left side properties are toggled;
19687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19716 \begin_inset space ~
19722 then apply the style to bold face text,
19723 the text will revert to the default series (
19724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19732 no matter how many times you apply the style.
19737 \begin_layout Standard
19739 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
19742 with the same warning once again:
19743 Do not overuse the fonts!
19745 more often than not,
19746 a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
19749 \begin_layout Section
19750 Printing and Previewing
19753 \begin_layout Subsection
19757 \begin_layout Standard
19758 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation using \SpecialChar LyX
19760 you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
19761 Before we tell you that,
19762 we want to give you a quick explanation of what goes on behind-the-scenes.
19763 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
19765 Additional Features
19770 \begin_layout Standard
19772 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
19775 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
19776 typesetting system,
19777 but to prevent confusion,
19778 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19781 is what you use to do your actual writing.
19784 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19785 to turn your writing into printable output.
19786 This happens in two stages:
19789 \begin_layout Enumerate
19792 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
19794 generating a file with the extension,
19796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19810 \begin_layout Enumerate
19813 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19814 to use the commands in the
19818 file to produce printable output.
19821 \begin_layout Subsection
19822 Output file formats
19823 \begin_inset Index idx
19828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19835 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19837 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19844 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19846 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337594
19848 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337596
19852 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337574
19856 \begin_inset Index idx
19861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19863 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19868 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337607
19870 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337612
19886 \begin_layout Standard
19887 This file type has the extension
19888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19900 It contains your document as plain text
19901 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337643
19903 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337647
19904 following the rules of the
19905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19908 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
19909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19917 \begin_layout Standard
19918 You can export your document to
19919 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337684
19921 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337686
19926 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19927 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19929 \begin_inset space ~
19936 this will not export any externally generated material such as a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
19937 bibliography (section
19938 \begin_inset space ~
19942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19944 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
19950 If your document includes such material,
19953 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19954 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19956 \begin_inset space ~
19960 \begin_inset space ~
19964 \begin_inset space ~
19972 \begin_inset space ~
19976 \begin_inset space ~
19982 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to
19983 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337720
19985 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337722
19991 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19994 \begin_inset Index idx
19999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20001 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20019 \begin_layout Standard
20020 This file type has the extension
20021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20032 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20033 program to process your document.
20034 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
20036 you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
20037 -Errors or to process it manually with console commands.
20038 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
20039 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
20040 's temporary directory whenever you view or export your document.
20043 \begin_layout Standard
20044 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20045 -file using the menu
20047 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20048 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20052 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
20053 export variants are explained in section
20054 \begin_inset space ~
20058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20060 reference "subsec:Export"
20068 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20070 \begin_inset Index idx
20075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20077 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20094 \begin_layout Standard
20095 This file type has the extension
20096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20117 because it is completely portable;
20118 you can move them from one machine to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
20119 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
20123 \begin_layout Standard
20124 DVI files do not contain images,
20125 they only link to them.
20126 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
20127 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make them visible when you scroll the DVI,
20128 this can slow down your computer when you view the DVI.
20129 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
20132 \begin_layout Standard
20133 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
20135 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20136 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20141 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20142 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20144 \begin_inset space ~
20150 The latter option uses the program
20152 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20158 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20161 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
20162 \begin_inset space ~
20166 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20168 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
20174 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20175 is still a work in progress,
20176 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
20180 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20182 \begin_inset Index idx
20187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20189 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20206 \begin_layout Standard
20207 This file type has the extension
20208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20220 PostScript was developed by the company
20224 as a printer language.
20225 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the file.
20226 PostScript can be seen as a
20227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20230 programming language
20231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20235 you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
20239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20240 If you are interested in learning more about this,
20241 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20247 \begin_inset Index idx
20252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20255 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20274 As a result of this,
20275 the files are often bigger than PDFs.
20278 \begin_layout Standard
20279 PostScript can only contain images in the format
20280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20283 Encapsulated PostScript
20284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20301 As \SpecialChar LyX
20302 allows you to use any known image format in your document,
20303 it has to convert them in the background to EPS.
20307 \begin_inset space ~
20310 images in your document,
20313 \begin_inset space ~
20316 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
20317 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
20319 So if you plan to use PostScript,
20320 you can insert your images directly as EPS to avoid this problem.
20323 \begin_layout Standard
20324 You can export to PostScript using the menu
20326 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20327 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20335 \begin_inset Index idx
20340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20342 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20357 \begin_inset Index idx
20362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20371 \begin_layout Standard
20372 This file type has the extension
20373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20389 Portable Document Format
20390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20397 was derived from PostScript.
20398 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
20400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20408 it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output looks exactly the same.
20411 \begin_layout Standard
20412 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
20413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20416 Joint Photographic Experts Group
20417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20449 Portable Network Graphics
20450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20467 You can also use any other image format,
20468 because \SpecialChar LyX
20469 converts them in the background to one of these formats.
20470 But as described in the section about PostScript,
20471 the image conversion will slow down your workflow.
20472 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
20475 \begin_layout Standard
20476 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
20478 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20484 \begin_layout Description
20486 \begin_inset space ~
20489 (pdflatex) This uses the program
20493 which converts your file directly to PDF.
20496 \begin_layout Description
20498 \begin_inset space ~
20505 ) This uses the program
20507 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20510 which converts your file directly to PDF.
20513 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20522 that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
20523 \begin_inset space ~
20527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20529 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
20535 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20536 is still a work in progress,
20537 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
20541 \begin_layout Description
20543 \begin_inset space ~
20550 ) This uses the program
20555 that converts your file directly to PDF.
20561 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
20562 \begin_inset space ~
20566 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20568 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
20574 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts,
20576 vertically written Japanese.
20579 \begin_layout Description
20581 \begin_inset space ~
20584 (cropped) This is the same as
20587 \begin_inset space ~
20592 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
20593 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
20594 to generate good-looking formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
20597 \begin_layout Description
20599 \begin_inset space ~
20602 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
20606 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to PDF.
20609 \begin_layout Description
20611 \begin_inset space ~
20614 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
20618 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
20619 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
20623 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
20624 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
20627 \begin_layout Standard
20631 \begin_inset space ~
20640 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions,
20643 and works without problems.
20644 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
20645 or specific OpenType fonts,
20646 you might want to try out
20649 \begin_inset space ~
20657 \begin_inset space ~
20663 bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature as
20670 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20672 \begin_inset Index idx
20677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20679 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20694 \begin_inset Index idx
20699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20708 \begin_layout Standard
20709 This file type has the extension
20710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20722 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
20723 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
20724 When \SpecialChar LyX
20726 it also generates corresponding images in formats suitable for the purpose.
20727 For the math output you can choose in the menu
20729 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20730 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20733 between different formats,
20734 which are described in section
20736 Math Output in XHTML
20741 \begin_inset space ~
20749 \begin_layout Standard
20750 XHTML output remains
20751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20759 and not all \SpecialChar LyX
20760 features are supported yet.
20764 and the World Wide Web
20769 Additional Features
20772 for more information.
20775 \begin_layout Standard
20776 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
20778 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20779 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20785 \begin_layout Subsection
20787 \begin_inset Index idx
20792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20794 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20811 \begin_layout Standard
20812 To get a look at the final version of your document,
20813 with all of the page breaks in place,
20814 the footnotes correctly numbered,
20824 or use the toolbar button
20831 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default output format,
20832 which is globally set in the preferences (see section
20833 \begin_inset space ~
20837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20839 reference "sec:File-Formats"
20844 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings (see section
20845 \begin_inset space ~
20849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20851 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
20857 Further output formats can be selected via
20859 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20860 View (Other Formats)
20862 or the toolbar button
20871 \begin_layout Standard
20872 If you have changed your document,
20873 you can refresh the output in the same viewer window using the menu
20875 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20880 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20881 Update (Other Formats)
20887 \begin_layout Standard
20888 When you preview a file,
20889 the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
20890 's temporary directory.
20891 To have a real output,
20892 export your document.
20895 \begin_layout Section
20896 A few Words about Typography
20897 \begin_inset Index idx
20902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20911 \begin_layout Subsection
20913 Dashes and Minus Signs
20914 \begin_inset Index idx
20919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20926 \begin_inset Index idx
20931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20940 \begin_layout Standard
20941 In \SpecialChar LyX
20944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20955 symbol comes in four variants:
20976 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
20982 \begin_layout Standard
20983 \begin_inset Box Frameless
20993 height_special "totalheight"
20998 backgroundcolor "none"
21001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21002 \begin_inset Tabular
21003 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
21004 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21005 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21006 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21007 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21008 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21009 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21037 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21038 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21047 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21077 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21078 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21100 system key combination
21104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21106 the en dash is entered with
21109 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21113 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21118 and the em dash with
21121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21134 is the Mac label for the right
21144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21157 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21158 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21181 system key combination or
21182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21196 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21209 \begin_inset Formula $-$
21217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21248 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
21254 \begin_layout Standard
21255 Dashes can also be inserted with
21257 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21259 \begin_inset space ~
21262 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
21270 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash and 2014 for the en dash).
21273 \begin_layout Standard
21274 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign,
21275 which appears in math mode and has a length of its own.
21276 Here are some examples:
21279 \begin_layout Enumerate
21280 line- and page-breaks
21281 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21291 \begin_layout Enumerate
21294 \begin_inset space ~
21298 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21308 \begin_layout Enumerate
21309 The em dash is used without spaces:
21312 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21322 \begin_layout Enumerate
21323 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
21327 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21337 \begin_layout Standard
21339 \begin_inset CommandInset href
21341 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
21342 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
21350 \begin_layout Subsection
21351 Dashes and Line Breaks
21352 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21354 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
21361 \begin_layout Standard
21362 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use case and locale,
21364 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21370 \begin_layout Itemize
21372 line breaks are generally allowed after the dash,
21373 but no line break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
21376 \begin_layout Itemize
21378 dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start a new line.
21381 \begin_layout Itemize
21382 In French and Spanish,
21383 dashes around parenthetical statements are treated similar to brackets:
21384 line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
21387 \begin_layout Standard
21389 dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
21390 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21401 allows line breaks after hyphens
21402 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
21405 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
21408 en-dashes and em-dashes.
21411 \begin_layout Enumerate
21412 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
21413 \begin_inset space ~
21416 – common in British English and generally recommended by
21418 The Elements of Typographic Style
21421 \begin_inset space ~
21424 – can be prevented using
21425 \change_deleted 177693 1654619779
21427 \change_inserted 177693 1654619781
21433 \begin_layout Enumerate
21434 Unwanted line breaks
21439 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
21441 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
21444 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
21448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21451 Prevent Hyphenation
21456 \begin_inset space ~
21472 in \SpecialChar TeX
21474 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
21477 \change_deleted 177693 1654619787
21479 \change_inserted 177693 1654619789
21481 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
21482 space does not suffice
21486 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
21491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21493 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
21494 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not in the document language.
21495 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French and Spanish.
21508 \begin_layout Itemize
21510 \begin_inset space ~
21514 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21524 height_special "totalheight"
21529 backgroundcolor "none"
21532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21541 \begin_layout Itemize
21543 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21553 height_special "totalheight"
21558 backgroundcolor "none"
21561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21563 \begin_inset space ~
21571 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
21572 \begin_inset space ~
21575 – sont très utiles.
21578 \begin_layout Itemize
21583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21593 un inciso con rayas—
21598 \begin_layout Standard
21599 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
21600 \begin_inset space ~
21603 – in contrast to an overfull line
21604 \begin_inset space ~
21607 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21611 \begin_layout Standard
21612 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes,
21613 you can select the option
21615 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21616 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21617 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
21618 Disallow line breaks after dashes
21623 \begin_layout Enumerate
21624 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
21625 They can be prevented using
21626 \change_deleted 177693 1654619794
21628 \change_inserted 177693 1654619796
21631 spaces (without need for a makebox or \SpecialChar TeX
21637 \begin_layout Itemize
21639 \begin_inset space ~
21642 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
21643 \begin_inset space ~
21646 – sont très utiles.
21650 \begin_layout Enumerate
21651 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
21652 \begin_inset Newline newline
21657 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21658 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21660 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
21662 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
21664 \begin_inset space ~
21670 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
21672 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
21674 \begin_inset space ~
21685 \begin_layout Itemize
21686 Em-dashes without spaces—
21687 \SpecialChar allowbreak
21688 common in American English—
21689 \SpecialChar allowbreak
21690 should be followed by a line break opportunity.
21693 \begin_layout Standard
21694 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
21695 \begin_inset space ~
21699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21701 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
21713 \begin_layout Enumerate
21716 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em or en dashes (see section
21717 \begin_inset space ~
21721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21723 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
21734 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21735 Changes and Backwards Compatibility
21738 \begin_layout Standard
21739 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
21741 \begin_inset space ~
21745 consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
21747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21754 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
21762 \begin_layout Standard
21763 Since \SpecialChar LyX
21765 \begin_inset space ~
21769 consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21770 in a way that prevents ligation to dashes.
21772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21779 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters (except in
21784 typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately after the input (unless the current text font is
21792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21793 The behavior was changed since
21794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21812 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output as non-breakable dashes.
21813 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
21821 \begin_layout Standard
21824 \begin_inset space ~
21832 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
21834 \begin_inset space ~
21837 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
21840 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21841 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21842 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
21843 Disallow line breaks after dashes
21845 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
21850 If you used both literal and
21851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21858 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
21860 \begin_inset space ~
21864 you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
21867 \begin_layout Subsection
21869 \begin_inset Index idx
21874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21883 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
21890 \begin_layout Standard
21891 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
21892 but automatically in the output.
21893 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21899 \begin_inset Index idx
21904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21907 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21921 following the rules of the document language.
21923 does not hyphenate text in the
21927 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
21930 \begin_layout Standard
21932 hyphenates almost perfectly;
21933 it only has problems with text in the
21937 font and with unusual constructs,
21939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21947 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
21948 cannot break a word correctly,
21949 you can set hyphenation points manually.
21950 This is done with the menu
21952 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21953 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21955 \begin_inset space ~
21961 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21963 If no hyphenation is necessary,
21968 \begin_layout Standard
21969 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
21970 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document in the form
21971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21980 would then see the hyphen
21981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21988 as a line break possibility.
21989 A line break at this point would look ugly.
21990 To prevent the shortcut from being broken,
21992 \change_deleted 177693 1654619800
21994 \change_inserted 177693 1654619804
21999 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22000 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
22002 \change_deleted 177693 1654619809
22004 \change_inserted 177693 1654619812
22009 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
22011 Prevent Hyphenation
22016 \begin_inset space ~
22024 \begin_layout Subsection
22026 \begin_inset Index idx
22031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22040 \begin_layout Subsubsection
22041 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
22042 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22044 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
22051 \begin_layout Standard
22052 When \SpecialChar LyX
22053 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
22054 to generate the final version of your document,
22056 automatically distinguishes between words,
22061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22064 appropriate amount of space.
22065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22068 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and the next word.
22069 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word gets after another word.
22072 \begin_layout Standard
22074 the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does not work in all cases.
22076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22087 is at the end of a lowercase letter,
22088 it's the end of a sentence;
22089 if it's at the end of a capitalized letter,
22090 it's an abbreviation.
22093 \begin_layout Standard
22094 Here are some examples of
22098 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
22101 \begin_layout Itemize
22106 \begin_layout Itemize
22111 \begin_layout Standard
22112 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
22115 \begin_layout Itemize
22117 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22121 this is too much space!
22124 \begin_layout Itemize
22129 \begin_layout Standard
22130 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
22133 \begin_layout Standard
22134 To fix this problem,
22135 use one of the following:
22138 \begin_layout Enumerate
22142 \begin_inset space ~
22147 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
22148 \begin_inset space ~
22152 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
22154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22156 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
22162 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
22164 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22166 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
22174 \begin_inset Index idx
22179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22181 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22198 \begin_layout Enumerate
22202 \begin_inset space ~
22207 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
22208 \begin_inset space ~
22212 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22214 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
22220 \begin_inset Index idx
22225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22227 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22244 \begin_layout Enumerate
22248 \begin_inset space ~
22252 \begin_inset space ~
22256 \begin_inset space ~
22263 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22265 \begin_inset space ~
22270 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
22271 This function is also bound to
22274 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
22280 \begin_layout Standard
22281 With the corrections,
22282 our earlier examples look like this:
22285 \begin_layout Itemize
22287 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22291 \begin_inset space \space{}
22294 this is too much space!
22297 \begin_layout Itemize
22298 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
22302 \begin_layout Standard
22303 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
22304 If your language is such a language,
22305 you don't need to worry,
22306 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
22307 will take care of this.
22310 \begin_layout Standard
22311 For those that do need to bother,
22312 there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
22316 \begin_inset space ~
22322 feature described in the section
22324 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
22329 Additional Features
22334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
22336 \begin_inset Index idx
22341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22343 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22358 \begin_inset Index idx
22363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22365 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22382 \begin_layout Standard
22384 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
22386 it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted text,
22387 and use a closing mark at the end.
22390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22398 The keyboard character,
22404 generates this automatically.
22407 \begin_layout Standard
22408 You can specify what character the
22412 key produces by using the submenu
22418 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22422 \begin_inset Index idx
22427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22429 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22443 dialog and switching the
22447 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
22448 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
22450 \change_deleted -712698321 1606924196
22452 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924196
22456 \begin_inset space ~
22462 \begin_layout Labeling
22463 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22475 \begin_inset space ~
22479 \begin_inset space ~
22483 \begin_inset Quotes els
22487 \begin_inset Quotes ers
22493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22501 \begin_inset Quotes els
22505 \begin_inset Quotes ers
22508 quotation marks (as common,
22510 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22517 \begin_layout Labeling
22518 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22521 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22525 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22529 \begin_inset space ~
22533 \begin_inset space ~
22537 \begin_inset Quotes sls
22541 \begin_inset Quotes srs
22547 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22551 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22555 \begin_inset Quotes sls
22559 \begin_inset Quotes srs
22562 quotation marks (as common,
22564 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22571 \begin_layout Labeling
22572 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22575 \begin_inset Quotes gld
22579 \begin_inset Quotes grd
22583 \begin_inset space ~
22587 \begin_inset space ~
22591 \begin_inset Quotes gls
22595 \begin_inset Quotes grs
22601 \begin_inset Quotes gld
22605 \begin_inset Quotes grd
22609 \begin_inset Quotes gls
22613 \begin_inset Quotes grs
22616 quotation marks (as common,
22618 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22625 \begin_layout Labeling
22626 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22629 \begin_inset Quotes pld
22633 \begin_inset Quotes prd
22637 \begin_inset space ~
22641 \begin_inset space ~
22645 \begin_inset Quotes pls
22649 \begin_inset Quotes prs
22655 \begin_inset Quotes pld
22659 \begin_inset Quotes prd
22663 \begin_inset Quotes pls
22667 \begin_inset Quotes prs
22670 quotation marks (as common,
22672 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22679 \begin_layout Labeling
22680 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22683 \begin_inset Quotes cld
22687 \begin_inset Quotes crd
22691 \begin_inset space ~
22695 \begin_inset space ~
22699 \begin_inset Quotes cls
22703 \begin_inset Quotes crs
22709 \begin_inset Quotes cld
22713 \begin_inset Quotes crd
22717 \begin_inset Quotes cls
22721 \begin_inset Quotes crs
22724 quotation marks (as common,
22726 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22733 \begin_layout Labeling
22734 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22737 \begin_inset Quotes ald
22741 \begin_inset Quotes ard
22745 \begin_inset space ~
22749 \begin_inset space ~
22753 \begin_inset Quotes als
22757 \begin_inset Quotes ars
22763 \begin_inset Quotes ald
22767 \begin_inset Quotes ard
22771 \begin_inset Quotes als
22775 \begin_inset Quotes ars
22778 quotation marks (as common,
22780 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22787 \begin_layout Labeling
22788 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22791 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
22795 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
22799 \begin_inset space ~
22803 \begin_inset space ~
22807 \begin_inset Quotes qls
22811 \begin_inset Quotes qls
22817 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
22821 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
22825 \begin_inset Quotes qls
22829 \begin_inset Quotes qls
22832 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
22835 \begin_layout Labeling
22836 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22839 \begin_inset Quotes bld
22843 \begin_inset Quotes brd
22847 \begin_inset space ~
22851 \begin_inset space ~
22855 \begin_inset Quotes bls
22859 \begin_inset Quotes brs
22865 \begin_inset Quotes bld
22869 \begin_inset Quotes brd
22873 \begin_inset Quotes bls
22877 \begin_inset Quotes brs
22880 quotation marks (as common,
22882 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22889 \begin_layout Labeling
22890 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22893 \begin_inset Quotes fld
22897 \begin_inset Quotes frd
22901 \begin_inset space ~
22905 \begin_inset space ~
22909 \begin_inset Quotes fls
22913 \begin_inset Quotes frs
22919 \begin_inset Quotes fld
22923 \begin_inset Quotes frd
22927 \begin_inset Quotes fls
22931 \begin_inset Quotes frs
22934 quotation marks (as common,
22936 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22943 \begin_layout Labeling
22944 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22947 \begin_inset Quotes ild
22951 \begin_inset Quotes ird
22955 \begin_inset space ~
22959 \begin_inset space ~
22963 \begin_inset Quotes ils
22967 \begin_inset Quotes irs
22973 \begin_inset Quotes ild
22977 \begin_inset Quotes ird
22981 \begin_inset Quotes ils
22985 \begin_inset Quotes irs
22988 quotation marks (another style common in France)
22992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22993 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
22994 since these look identical to the inner marks.
22995 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where the inner marks differ).
23003 \begin_layout Labeling
23004 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23007 \begin_inset Quotes rld
23011 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
23015 \begin_inset space ~
23019 \begin_inset space ~
23023 \begin_inset Quotes rls
23027 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
23033 \begin_inset Quotes rld
23037 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
23041 \begin_inset Quotes rls
23045 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
23048 quotation marks (as common,
23050 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23057 \begin_layout Labeling
23058 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23061 \begin_inset Quotes wld
23065 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
23069 \begin_inset space ~
23073 \begin_inset space ~
23077 \begin_inset Quotes wls
23081 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
23087 \begin_inset Quotes wld
23091 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
23095 \begin_inset Quotes wls
23099 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
23102 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
23103 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924211
23107 \begin_layout Labeling
23108 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23110 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924279
23113 \begin_inset Quotes pld
23117 \begin_inset Quotes prd
23121 \begin_inset space ~
23125 \begin_inset space ~
23129 \begin_inset Quotes ald
23133 \begin_inset Quotes ard
23141 \begin_inset Quotes pld
23149 \begin_inset Quotes prd
23157 \begin_inset Quotes ald
23165 \begin_inset Quotes ard
23170 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
23175 \begin_layout Labeling
23176 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23177 \begin_inset Quotes jld
23185 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
23191 \begin_inset space ~
23195 \begin_inset space ~
23201 \begin_inset Quotes jls
23209 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
23213 \begin_inset Quotes jld
23217 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
23221 \begin_inset Quotes jls
23225 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
23228 quotation marks (as common,
23230 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23240 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338376
23241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23243 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
23249 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
23257 \begin_layout Labeling
23258 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23259 \begin_inset Quotes kld
23267 \begin_inset Quotes krd
23273 \begin_inset space ~
23277 \begin_inset space ~
23283 \begin_inset Quotes kls
23291 \begin_inset Quotes krs
23295 \begin_inset Quotes kld
23299 \begin_inset Quotes krd
23303 \begin_inset Quotes kls
23307 \begin_inset Quotes krs
23310 quotation marks (as common,
23312 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23316 in North Korea and China)
23317 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
23319 \begin_inset script superscript
23321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23323 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
23324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23326 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
23342 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338417
23347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23348 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
23354 \change_inserted 1064312605 1690963146
23358 \begin_layout Labeling
23359 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23361 \change_inserted 1064312605 1690963188
23364 \begin_inset Quotes dld
23368 \begin_inset Quotes drd
23372 \begin_inset space ~
23376 \begin_inset space ~
23380 \begin_inset Quotes dls
23384 \begin_inset Quotes drs
23390 \begin_inset Quotes dld
23396 \begin_inset Quotes drd
23402 \begin_inset Quotes dls
23408 \begin_inset Quotes drs
23413 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
23418 \begin_layout Standard
23419 Inner quotation marks
23423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23424 In many writing cultures,
23425 these are single quotation marks.
23426 But as the British and French styles show,
23427 this is not necessarily the case (and specifically the British style shows that
23428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23435 does not necessarily mean
23436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23440 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23444 This is why we call them
23445 \begin_inset Quotes els
23449 \begin_inset Quotes ers
23453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23465 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages,
23467 \begin_inset Quotes els
23471 \begin_inset Quotes ers
23474 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
23477 arg "quote-insert inner"
23482 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23488 \begin_layout Standard
23490 the quotation mark styles are persistent.
23492 a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when it was inserted,
23493 even if the document-wide style changes.
23494 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
23495 If you check the setting
23497 Use dynamic quotation marks
23501 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
23502 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
23507 special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
23508 they appear in a special color).
23509 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
23510 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in one step (e.
23511 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23515 if your publisher requests a different style).
23518 \begin_layout Standard
23519 Individual quotation marks (i.
23520 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23524 their level [inner,
23528 and style) can be easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a mark.
23531 \begin_layout Subsection
23533 \begin_inset Index idx
23538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23540 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23555 \begin_inset Index idx
23560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23562 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
23565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23577 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23579 name "subsec:Ligatures"
23586 \begin_layout Standard
23587 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and print them as single characters.
23588 These groups are known as
23593 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
23594 knows about ligatures,
23595 your documents will contain them too in the output.
23596 Here are the standard ligatures:
23599 \begin_layout Itemize
23603 \begin_layout Itemize
23607 \begin_layout Itemize
23611 \begin_layout Itemize
23615 \begin_layout Itemize
23619 \begin_layout Standard
23620 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
23623 \begin_layout Standard
23625 you don't want a ligature in a word.
23626 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
23628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23635 it looks really weird in compound words,
23637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23652 To break a ligature,
23655 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23656 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
23658 \begin_inset space ~
23665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23676 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
23678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23693 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
23695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23701 \begin_layout Subsection
23703 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
23705 \begin_inset Index idx
23710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23713 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23730 \begin_layout Standard
23733 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23734 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
23739 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
23742 \begin_layout Description
23744 The name of the game.
23747 \begin_layout Description
23749 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
23753 \begin_layout Description
23755 The \SpecialChar TeX
23756 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
23760 \begin_layout Description
23761 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
23762 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
23766 \begin_layout Standard
23767 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23773 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
23777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23781 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
23782 world to give programs geek version numbers.
23783 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
23784 converges to the number
23785 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
23789 The actual version is
23790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23799 the previous one was
23800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23811 \begin_layout Subsection
23813 \begin_inset Index idx
23818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23820 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23837 \begin_layout Standard
23838 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal space between two words.
23839 As you can see in the example below,
23840 it looks better when the space is smaller.
23842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23849 for units use the menu
23851 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23852 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
23854 \begin_inset space ~
23862 arg "space-insert thin"
23868 \begin_layout Standard
23869 Here is an example to show the differences:
23872 \begin_layout Standard
23873 \begin_inset Tabular
23874 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
23875 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23876 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
23877 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
23879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
23882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23884 \begin_inset space ~
23888 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
23896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
23899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23900 space between number and unit
23907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
23910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23912 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23916 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
23924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
23927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23928 half space between number and unit
23941 \begin_layout Subsection
23943 \begin_inset Index idx
23948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23950 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23967 \begin_layout Standard
23968 In the early days of word processors,
23969 page breaks went wherever the page happened to end.
23970 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
23971 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom of the page,
23972 the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page,
23973 or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
23974 These bits of text became known as
23985 \begin_layout Standard
23988 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
23989 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
23990 But what about widows and orphans,
23991 where the page breaks leave one line of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page?
23992 There are rules built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
23993 governing page breaks,
23994 and some of those rules are there specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
23995 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them,
23996 you can add the commands
23997 \begin_inset Newline newline
24005 \begin_inset Newline newline
24013 \begin_inset Newline newline
24016 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24017 preamble of your document to avoid them.
24018 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
24020 \begin_inset space ~
24024 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
24026 key "latexcompanion"
24032 \begin_inset space ~
24036 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
24043 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
24044 's page break mechanism.
24047 \begin_layout Chapter
24051 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24053 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
24060 \begin_layout Standard
24061 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
24064 \begin_inset space ~
24070 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
24073 \begin_layout Section
24075 \begin_inset Index idx
24080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24087 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24096 \begin_layout Standard
24098 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
24101 \begin_layout Description
24104 \begin_inset space ~
24107 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
24108 \begin_inset Newline newline
24112 \begin_inset Note Note
24115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24116 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
24124 \begin_layout Description
24125 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
24126 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
24129 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
24130 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
24132 \begin_inset space ~
24138 \begin_inset Newline newline
24142 \begin_inset Note Comment
24145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24146 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
24155 \begin_layout Description
24157 \begin_inset space ~
24160 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can set in the document settings under
24162 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
24164 \begin_inset space ~
24170 \begin_inset Newline newline
24174 \begin_inset Newline newline
24178 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
24181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24187 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
24188 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
24193 of a comment that appears in the output.
24199 \begin_inset Newline newline
24203 \begin_inset Newline newline
24206 As you can see in the example,
24207 greyed out notes can have footnotes.
24210 \begin_layout Standard
24211 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
24219 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24223 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
24226 \begin_layout Section
24228 \begin_inset Index idx
24233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24240 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24242 name "sec:Footnotes"
24249 \begin_layout Standard
24251 uses boxes to display footnotes:
24252 When you insert a footnote using the menu
24254 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24257 or the toolbar button
24260 arg "footnote-insert"
24274 \begin_inset Graphics
24275 filename clipart/footnote.png
24284 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
24285 's representation of your footnote.
24295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24319 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
24320 Clicking on the box label again will close
24333 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote,
24334 simply highlight it and click on the footnote
24349 \begin_layout Standard
24350 Here is an example footnote:
24358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24359 To close a footnote,
24360 click on the footnote box label.
24368 \begin_layout Standard
24369 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text position where the footnote box is placed.
24370 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
24371 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
24372 according to the document class.
24374 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme,
24375 but you can get other schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
24381 ey are described in the
24384 \begin_inset space ~
24392 \begin_layout Section
24394 \begin_inset Index idx
24399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24406 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24408 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
24415 \begin_layout Standard
24416 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
24418 When you insert a margin note via the menu
24420 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24422 \begin_inset space ~
24427 or the toolbar button
24430 arg "marginalnote-insert"
24450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24457 appearing within your text.
24458 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
24459 's representation of your margin
24468 \begin_layout Standard
24469 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
24473 \begin_inset Marginal
24476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24478 This is a marginal note.
24486 \begin_layout Standard
24487 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
24488 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even pages,
24489 right on odd pages.
24492 \begin_layout Standard
24493 For further information about marginal notes see the section
24496 \begin_inset space ~
24504 \begin_inset space ~
24512 \begin_layout Section
24513 Graphics and Images
24514 \begin_inset Index idx
24519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24526 \begin_inset Index idx
24531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24538 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24540 name "sec:Graphics"
24547 \begin_layout Standard
24548 To insert an image in your document,
24549 place the cursor at the text position you want and click on the toolbar icon
24552 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24557 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24561 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
24564 \begin_layout Standard
24565 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
24570 tab allows you to choose your image file.
24571 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling factor.
24572 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
24573 \begin_inset space ~
24577 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24579 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
24587 \begin_layout Standard
24592 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width of the image in the output.
24593 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
24596 \begin_inset space ~
24600 \begin_inset space ~
24609 \begin_inset space ~
24613 \begin_inset space ~
24617 \begin_inset space ~
24622 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
24623 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore the tab
24630 \begin_layout Standard
24634 \begin_inset space ~
24638 \begin_inset space ~
24643 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
24644 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
24646 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
24651 \begin_inset space ~
24656 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output,
24657 only a frame with the image size is printed.
24660 \begin_layout Standard
24661 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
24662 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are in the text.
24663 This is an example image within a separate,
24664 horizontally centered paragraph:
24667 \begin_layout Standard
24669 \begin_inset Graphics
24670 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
24678 \begin_layout Standard
24679 If you need image captions or want to reference images,
24680 you have to put the image into a float,
24682 \begin_inset space ~
24686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24688 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24696 \begin_layout Subsection
24698 \begin_inset Index idx
24703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24705 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
24708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24720 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24722 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
24729 \begin_layout Standard
24730 You can insert images in any known file format.
24731 But as we explained in section
24732 \begin_inset space ~
24736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24738 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
24744 every output document format allows only a few image formats.
24746 therefore uses the program
24750 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
24751 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
24752 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
24753 \begin_inset space ~
24757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24759 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
24767 \begin_layout Standard
24768 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
24771 \begin_layout Description
24773 \begin_inset space ~
24776 images consist of pixel values,
24777 often in a compressed form.
24778 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
24779 Well-known bitmap image formats are
24780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24783 Graphics Interchange Format
24784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24801 \begin_inset Index idx
24806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24808 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
24811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24827 Portable Network Graphics
24828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24845 \begin_inset Index idx
24850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24852 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
24855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24871 Joint Photographic Experts Group
24872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24901 \begin_inset Index idx
24906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24908 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
24911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24925 \begin_layout Description
24927 \begin_inset space ~
24930 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without data loss.
24931 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations,
24932 because presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
24933 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
24934 \begin_inset Newline newline
24937 Scalable image formats can be
24938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24941 Scalable Vector Graphics
24942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24959 \begin_inset Index idx
24964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24966 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
24969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24985 Encapsulated PostScript
24986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25003 \begin_inset Index idx
25008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25010 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
25013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25029 Portable Document Format
25030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25047 \begin_inset Index idx
25052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25068 because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the result will not be scalable.
25069 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original image.
25073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25074 In the case of PDF,
25075 the original image is additionally compressed.
25083 \begin_layout Standard
25084 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one,
25092 \begin_layout Subsection
25093 Grouping of Image Settings
25094 \begin_inset Index idx
25099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25101 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
25104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25118 \begin_layout Standard
25119 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing group.
25120 Images within such a group share their settings,
25121 so adjusting one image of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in the same way.
25122 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the need to manually change each of them.
25125 \begin_layout Standard
25126 A new group can be set by pressing the button
25129 \begin_inset space ~
25133 \begin_inset space ~
25145 \begin_inset space ~
25149 \begin_inset space ~
25155 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image and checking the name of the desired group.
25158 \begin_layout Section
25160 \begin_inset Index idx
25165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25172 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25181 \begin_layout Standard
25182 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
25185 arg "tabular-insert"
25190 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25194 A dialog will appear,
25195 asking you for the number of rows and columns
25196 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
25198 and you can select a specific (border) style
25201 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated from the rest of the table.
25202 This separation appears due to a double line:
25203 The cells of the first row have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above them.
25204 Here is an example table:
25207 \begin_layout Standard
25209 \begin_inset Tabular
25210 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
25211 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25212 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25213 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25214 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
25215 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25409 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
25413 \begin_layout Standard
25415 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
25416 This corresponds to the
25417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25424 table style listed in the style selection.
25427 \begin_layout Standard
25429 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
25430 Other available styles include:
25433 \begin_layout Itemize
25435 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
25437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25444 which looks line the above table,
25445 but without the first row being separated via double line,
25448 \begin_layout Itemize
25450 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
25451 a border-less table with no lines at all,
25454 \begin_layout Itemize
25456 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
25458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25465 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and bold top/bottom lines (see
25476 \change_inserted 630872221 1621434190
25477 It is also possible to have an horizontal (thin) Footline above the last line.
25482 \begin_layout Standard
25484 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
25485 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar button can be changed in
25487 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25488 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
25492 So if the default style above is not the one you need,
25493 you should alter this setting.
25496 \begin_layout Subsection
25500 \begin_layout Standard
25501 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and then choosing
25503 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
25507 This brings up the table dialog.
25508 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell,
25509 row and/or column where the cursor is placed currently.
25510 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
25511 This means that if you select more cells,
25512 columns or rows the action is done on all of your selection.
25515 \begin_layout Standard
25516 In addition to the table dialog,
25520 \begin_inset space ~
25525 helps you in setting table properties.
25526 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
25529 \begin_layout Standard
25533 \begin_inset space ~
25538 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
25539 If you add a row or column,
25540 it will be inserted right beside or below the current cell respectively.
25541 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width is given.
25542 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs of text,
25544 \begin_inset space ~
25548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25550 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
25558 \begin_layout Standard
25559 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell using the check box
25568 This will merge the cells to
25573 spread over more than one column/row.
25574 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows,
25575 so that the alignment,
25577 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
25578 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one in the last row without the upper border:
25581 \begin_layout Standard
25583 \begin_inset Tabular
25584 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
25585 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
25586 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25587 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
25588 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
25589 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25600 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25609 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25685 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25720 \begin_layout Standard
25721 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
25722 -arguments for the table.
25723 They are necessary for special table formatting,
25724 such as the multirow cells,
25725 explained in the chapter
25732 \begin_inset space ~
25738 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
25739 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
25740 but are visible in the output.
25743 \begin_layout Standard
25744 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25753 Most DVI-viewers are
25757 able to display rotations.
25765 \begin_layout Standard
25770 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
25775 adds lines for all cell borders.
25778 \begin_layout Subsection
25780 \begin_inset Index idx
25785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25787 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
25790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25802 \begin_inset Index idx
25807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25816 \begin_layout Standard
25817 If the table is too long to fit on one page,
25818 you can use the option
25821 \begin_inset space ~
25825 \begin_inset space ~
25833 \begin_inset space ~
25838 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
25839 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
25842 \begin_layout Description
25848 The current row and all rows above,
25849 that don't have any special options defined,
25850 are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
25851 Except for the first page,
25855 \begin_inset space ~
25863 \begin_layout Description
25867 \begin_inset space ~
25873 The current row and all rows above,
25874 that don't have any special options defined,
25875 are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
25878 \begin_layout Description
25884 The current row and all rows below,
25885 that don't have any special options defined,
25886 are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
25887 except for the last page,
25891 \begin_inset space ~
25899 \begin_layout Description
25903 \begin_inset space ~
25909 The current row and all rows below,
25910 that don't have any special options defined,
25911 are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
25914 \begin_layout Description
25916 The first row is reset as a single column.
25917 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
25919 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25923 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
25926 \begin_inset space ~
25934 \begin_layout Standard
25935 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
25936 If you set more than one option in the same table row,
25937 you should be aware that then only the first option is used;
25938 the others will be defined as
25944 first means first in this order:
25949 \begin_inset space ~
25963 \begin_inset space ~
25969 see the following longtable to see how it works:
25972 \begin_layout Standard
25974 \begin_inset Tabular
25975 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
25976 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
25977 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
25978 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25979 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25980 <row endfirsthead="true">
25981 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25987 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
25992 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26001 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26011 <row endfirsthead="true">
26012 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26023 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26032 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26044 <row endhead="true">
26045 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26056 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26065 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26075 <row endhead="true">
26076 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26087 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26096 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26108 <row endfoot="true">
26109 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26120 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26129 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26160 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26501 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27102 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27111 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
27114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27120 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27131 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27162 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27193 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27224 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27255 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27286 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27317 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27348 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27379 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27410 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27441 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27472 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27503 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27534 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27565 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27596 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27616 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27627 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27658 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27689 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27720 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27751 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27782 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27814 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27845 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27876 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27907 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27938 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27969 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28000 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28031 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28062 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28092 <row endlastfoot="true">
28093 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28104 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
28107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28113 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28130 \begin_layout Subsection
28132 \begin_inset Index idx
28137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28139 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28154 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28156 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
28163 \begin_layout Standard
28164 A table cell can contain text,
28168 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
28169 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
28170 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
28176 nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
28179 \begin_layout Standard
28180 To have multi-line entries in table cells,
28181 you have to declare a fixed width for the column in the table dialog.
28182 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
28186 \begin_layout Standard
28188 \begin_inset Tabular
28189 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
28190 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28191 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28192 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
28193 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28213 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28282 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
28287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28338 This is longer now.
28343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28394 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
28395 This is longer now.
28400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28426 \begin_layout Standard
28427 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
28428 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
28432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28433 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
28438 Selection with the mouse or with
28442 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
28443 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting the selection from outside the table.
28446 \begin_layout Section
28448 \begin_inset Index idx
28453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28469 \begin_layout Subsection
28473 \begin_layout Standard
28474 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label,
28475 which doesn't have a fixed location.
28477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28484 forward or backward a page or two,
28485 to wherever it fits best.
28493 \begin_inset space ~
28499 because they can float to the next page when there are too many notes on the current page.
28502 \begin_layout Standard
28503 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
28504 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace and pages without text.
28505 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and the image/table,
28506 every float can be referenced in the text.
28507 Floats are therefore numbered.
28508 Referencing is described in section
28509 \begin_inset space ~
28513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28515 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28523 \begin_layout Standard
28527 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28531 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
28532 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in the output.
28533 After the label you can insert the caption text.
28534 \begin_inset Index idx
28539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28541 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28555 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate paragraph within the float.
28556 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
28557 -document readable,
28558 you can open and close the float box by left-clicking on the box label.
28559 A closed float box looks like this:
28561 \begin_inset Graphics
28562 filename clipart/float.png
28567 – a gray button with a red label.
28570 \begin_layout Standard
28571 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
28572 -errors that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
28575 \begin_layout Subsection
28577 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28579 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
28584 \begin_inset Index idx
28589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28591 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28608 \begin_layout Standard
28610 \begin_inset space ~
28614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28616 reference "fig:A-star-in"
28621 was created using the menu
28623 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28624 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
28630 arg "float-insert figure"
28634 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and using the menu
28636 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28642 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
28646 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor to the left or right of the image and using the menu
28648 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28650 \begin_inset space ~
28658 arg "layout-paragraph"
28664 \begin_layout Standard
28665 \begin_inset Float figure
28672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28674 \begin_inset Graphics
28675 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
28684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28685 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28688 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28690 name "fig:A-star-in"
28707 \begin_layout Standard
28708 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference to it:
28709 Insert a label into the caption using the menu
28711 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28720 ) and refer to it using the menu
28722 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28728 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28732 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using vague references like
28733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28742 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28743 will reposition the floats in the final document,
28745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28753 For more about cross-references,
28755 \begin_inset space ~
28759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28761 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28769 \begin_layout Standard
28770 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float,
28771 but sometimes you might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
28772 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
28773 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures as described in section
28774 \begin_inset space ~
28778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28780 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28787 \begin_inset space ~
28791 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28793 reference "fig:Two-images"
28798 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
28799 You can also set the images one below the other.
28801 \begin_inset space ~
28805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28807 reference "fig:Undefinable"
28813 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28815 reference "fig:Star"
28820 are the subfigures.
28823 \begin_layout Standard
28824 \begin_inset Float figure
28831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28832 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
28836 \begin_inset Float figure
28843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28844 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28847 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28849 name "fig:Undefinable"
28861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28862 \begin_inset Graphics
28863 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
28875 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
28879 \begin_inset Float figure
28886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28887 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28890 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28905 \begin_inset Graphics
28906 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
28918 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
28924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28925 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28928 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28930 name "fig:Two-images"
28947 \begin_layout Subsection
28949 \begin_inset Index idx
28954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28956 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28973 \begin_layout Standard
28974 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
28976 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28977 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
28980 or the toolbar button
28983 arg "float-insert table"
28987 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures and that the label begins with “tab:”.
28989 \begin_inset space ~
28993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28995 reference "tab:Table-float"
29003 \begin_layout Standard
29004 \begin_inset Float table
29011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29012 \begin_inset Caption Standard
29014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29015 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29017 name "tab:Table-float"
29029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29031 \begin_inset Tabular
29032 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
29033 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
29034 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29035 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29036 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29163 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
29171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29184 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
29187 \end{array}\right]$
29195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29208 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
29229 \begin_layout Subsection
29231 \begin_inset Index idx
29236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29238 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29255 \begin_layout Standard
29257 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
29258 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme,
29259 to control the float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float caption.
29260 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
29267 \begin_inset space ~
29275 \begin_layout Section
29277 \begin_inset Index idx
29282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29291 \begin_layout Standard
29293 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
29296 all the usual rules of indentation,
29299 \begin_inset space \space{}
29305 \begin_layout Standard
29306 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
29307 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
29309 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29313 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage and its alignment within the page.
29316 \begin_layout Standard
29318 \begin_inset Box Frameless
29328 height_special "totalheight"
29333 backgroundcolor "none"
29336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29339 This is a minipage.
29340 The text is set in an italic style.
29343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29346 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs another formatting.
29354 \begin_layout Standard
29355 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
29358 If you place two minipages side-by-side,
29363 as described in section
29364 \begin_inset space ~
29368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29370 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
29376 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
29382 \begin_layout Standard
29383 \begin_inset Box Frameless
29393 height_special "totalheight"
29398 backgroundcolor "none"
29401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29402 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
29403 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
29409 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
29413 \begin_inset Box Frameless
29423 height_special "totalheight"
29428 backgroundcolor "none"
29431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29432 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
29433 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
29441 \begin_layout Standard
29442 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29448 \begin_layout Standard
29449 When you right-click on a minipage box,
29450 you can transform the box to another box type.
29451 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
29458 \begin_inset space ~
29466 \begin_layout Chapter
29467 Mathematical Formulas
29468 \begin_inset Index idx
29473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29480 \begin_inset Index idx
29485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29487 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
29490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29502 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29504 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
29511 \begin_layout Standard
29512 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
29517 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
29520 \begin_layout Section
29522 \begin_inset Index idx
29527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29529 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29546 \begin_layout Standard
29547 To create a math formula,
29548 you can just click on the toolbar icon
29561 That will create a little blue rectangle,
29562 with purple markers around its corners.
29563 That blue rectangle is the formula itself;
29564 the purple markers indicate what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
29565 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
29567 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29573 \begin_layout Standard
29574 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done with the
29577 \begin_inset space ~
29583 that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
29586 \begin_layout Standard
29587 There are two main types of formulas,
29588 inline formulas and display formulas.
29589 Inline formulas appear within a text line,
29593 \begin_layout Standard
29594 This is a line with an inline formula
29595 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
29601 \begin_layout Standard
29602 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate paragraph,
29604 \begin_inset Formula
29611 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
29614 \begin_layout Standard
29616 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
29620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29634 followed by a space,
29635 in a formula will create the Greek letter
29636 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
29640 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
29643 \begin_inset space ~
29651 \begin_layout Subsection
29652 Navigating in Formulas
29653 \begin_inset Index idx
29658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29660 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29677 \begin_layout Standard
29678 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is achieved with the arrow keys.
29680 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
29681 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
29686 will leave a formula construct (a square root
29687 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
29692 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
29697 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
29700 \end{array}\right]$
29708 will leave the formula,
29709 placing the cursor after the formula.
29714 can be used to move horizontally in a formula;
29716 through the cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
29719 \begin_layout Standard
29725 printed in this document as
29726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29730 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29738 seems to do nothing in a formula,
29739 since it does not add a space between characters,
29740 but it does exit a nested structure.
29742 you have to be careful about using
29749 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
29758 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29768 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29772 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29778 since in the latter case only the
29781 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
29786 will be under the square root sign:
29788 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
29794 \begin_layout Standard
29795 You can leave many parts of a formula,
29797 partially filled in,
29799 \begin_inset Formula
29801 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
29810 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in,
29811 or a subscript with nothing in it,
29812 the results will be unpredictable,
29813 but most constructs don't mind.
29816 \begin_layout Subsection
29820 \begin_layout Standard
29821 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
29822 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want,
29827 and a cursor movement key to select text.
29828 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
29830 you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
29831 That text can then be cut or copied,
29832 and then pasted within any formula,
29833 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
29837 \begin_layout Subsection
29838 Exponents and Subscripts
29839 \begin_inset Index idx
29844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29846 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29861 \begin_inset Index idx
29866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29868 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29885 \begin_layout Standard
29886 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
29889 arg "math-superscript"
29895 arg "math-subscript"
29899 but it is often much easier to use a command.
29901 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
29908 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29918 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
29925 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
29930 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
29937 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29943 If you use characters in the superscript,
29944 that could be accented with the circumflex
29945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29953 you have to use an extra
29957 to separate the circumflex and the character.
29960 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
29967 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29973 Subscripts are similar:
29975 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
29982 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29990 \begin_layout Subsection
29992 \begin_inset Index idx
29997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29999 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30016 \begin_layout Standard
30017 Create a fraction either with the command
30023 or by using the icon
30026 arg "math-insert \\frac"
30032 \begin_inset space ~
30038 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
30039 The cursor is above the fraction line.
30040 To move it to the bottom,
30052 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction,
30053 as this example shows:
30054 \begin_inset Formula
30056 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
30059 \end{array}\right)}\right]
30067 \begin_layout Subsection
30069 \begin_inset Index idx
30074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30076 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30093 \begin_layout Standard
30094 Roots can be created using the
30097 \begin_inset space ~
30105 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
30111 arg "math-insert \\root"
30133 you can produce roots of higher orders,
30141 always produces a square root.
30144 \begin_layout Subsection
30145 Operators with Limits
30146 \begin_inset Index idx
30151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30153 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30168 \begin_inset Index idx
30173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30175 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30190 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30192 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
30199 \begin_layout Standard
30201 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
30205 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
30208 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
30209 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
30210 by entering them as you would enter a super- or subscript,
30211 directly after the symbol.
30212 The sum operator will automatically place its
30213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30220 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas,
30221 and to the side in inline formulas,
30223 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
30228 \begin_inset Formula
30230 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
30237 will place the limits to the side in both formula types.
30240 \begin_layout Standard
30241 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in display mode.
30242 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly behind the operator and using the menu
30244 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30245 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
30247 \begin_inset space ~
30251 \begin_inset space ~
30265 \begin_layout Standard
30266 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
30267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30276 \begin_inset Index idx
30281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30283 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30298 \begin_inset Formula
30300 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
30305 which will place the
30306 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
30310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30318 In inline formulas it looks like this:
30320 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
30326 \begin_layout Standard
30327 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
30334 Have a look at section
30335 \begin_inset space ~
30339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30341 reference "subsec:Functions"
30346 for an explanation of function macros.
30349 \begin_layout Subsection
30351 \begin_inset Index idx
30356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30358 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30375 \begin_layout Standard
30376 Most math symbols can be found in the
30379 \begin_inset space ~
30384 under one of several categories;
30405 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
30408 \begin_layout Standard
30409 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30410 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
30411 you don't have to use the
30414 \begin_inset space ~
30420 you can type the command directly into the formula.
30422 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
30425 \begin_layout Subsection
30427 \begin_inset Index idx
30432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30434 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30451 \begin_layout Standard
30452 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that \SpecialChar LaTeX
30458 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
30464 \begin_inset space ~
30472 arg "math-insert \\space"
30476 This generates a small space,
30477 and shows a small marker on the screen.
30485 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
30488 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
30490 \begin_inset Graphics
30491 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
30496 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind the space marker and enter space again several times.
30497 With every space enter the size will be changed.
30498 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
30500 because they are negative spaces.
30501 Here are two examples:
30504 \begin_layout Standard
30515 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
30521 \begin_layout Standard
30532 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
30538 \begin_layout Subsection
30540 \begin_inset Index idx
30545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30547 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30562 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30564 name "subsec:Functions"
30571 \begin_layout Standard
30575 \begin_inset space ~
30580 contains under the button
30583 arg "math-insert \\functions"
30586 a number of function macros,
30588 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
30593 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
30602 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
30609 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to avoid confusions,
30611 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
30615 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
30621 \begin_layout Standard
30622 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
30624 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
30628 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
30634 \begin_layout Standard
30635 For some mathematical objects,
30637 the macro changes where subscripts are placed,
30638 as described in section
30639 \begin_inset space ~
30643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30645 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
30653 \begin_layout Subsection
30655 \begin_inset Index idx
30660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30662 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30679 \begin_layout Standard
30680 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text mode.
30681 This may depend on your keyboard,
30682 or the bindings file you use.
30683 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
30687 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
30690 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
30691 Our example is entered by typing
30696 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30703 \begin_inset space ~
30707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30709 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
30714 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
30717 \begin_layout Standard
30718 \begin_inset Float table
30725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30726 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30731 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
30735 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
30743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30745 \begin_inset Tabular
30746 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
30747 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30748 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
30749 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
30750 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
30752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30834 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
30844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30888 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
30898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30942 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
30952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30996 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
31006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31050 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
31060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31104 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
31114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31158 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
31168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31212 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
31222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31266 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
31276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31311 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
31332 \begin_layout Standard
31333 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
31336 \begin_inset space ~
31344 arg "math-insert \\hat"
31348 this will apply to any selection you have made within a formula too.
31351 \begin_layout Section
31352 Brackets and Delimiters
31353 \begin_inset Index idx
31358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31360 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31375 \begin_inset Index idx
31380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31382 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31399 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
31406 \begin_layout Standard
31407 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
31410 using just the keys
31415 But if you want to surround a large structure,
31416 like a matrix or a fraction,
31417 or if you have several layers of brackets,
31418 it is better to use the math toolbar delimiter icon
31421 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
31426 if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
31427 \begin_inset Formula
31429 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
31437 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
31439 the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
31442 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
31445 and the expression on the right was entered using the
31451 \begin_inset Formula
31453 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
31461 \begin_layout Standard
31462 If you use the delimiter icon,
31464 and other brackets from that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is inside.
31467 \begin_layout Standard
31468 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the left side and right side.
31469 If you use the option
31472 \begin_inset space ~
31478 the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
31479 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
31481 If you want one side not to have a bracket,
31487 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
31488 with a dotted line,
31489 but nothing will be printed.
31492 \begin_layout Standard
31493 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures,
31494 like a square root,
31495 you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that is to go inside the brackets.
31496 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
31501 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses,
31504 on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
31506 to insert a pair of parentheses,
31507 select the structure and enter
31510 arg "math-delim ( )"
31516 \begin_layout Section
31517 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
31518 \begin_inset Index idx
31523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31525 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31540 \begin_inset Index idx
31545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31547 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31562 \begin_inset Index idx
31567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31569 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31573 Multi-line Equations
31586 \begin_layout Standard
31587 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
31591 \begin_inset space ~
31599 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
31603 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
31604 Here is an example:
31605 \begin_inset Formula
31607 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
31616 The parentheses aren't automatic,
31617 but you can add them as described in section
31618 \begin_inset space ~
31622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31624 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
31630 When you construct the matrix,
31631 you can decide whether the column entries will be left-,
31633 or center-justified.
31634 This alignment is set in the box
31639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31690 for every column as default.
31693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31704 means that the first column will be left-justified,
31705 the second will be centered,
31706 and the third column will be right-justified,
31707 because each letter corresponds to the relevant column.
31708 The result will look like this:
31709 \begin_inset Formula
31712 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
31713 column & has & has\,right\\
31714 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
31723 \begin_layout Standard
31724 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
31727 arg "newline-insert newline"
31730 while the cursor is in the matrix.
31731 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
31733 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31736 or the math toolbar.
31739 \begin_layout Standard
31740 There are other arrays used in formulas,
31741 such as distinctions of cases.
31742 It can be created with the menu
31744 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31745 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
31747 \begin_inset space ~
31759 Here is an example:
31761 \begin_inset Formula
31775 \begin_layout Standard
31776 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31779 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
31782 arg "newline-insert newline"
31786 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear,
31787 one for each column.
31791 arg "newline-insert newline"
31794 in a non-empty formula,
31795 the part before the relation sign (equal sign
31796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31803 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column,
31804 the relation sign is in the second column,
31805 and the rest in the third column.
31806 A new row is created by every further entry of
31809 arg "newline-insert newline"
31813 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
31814 Here is an example:
31815 \begin_inset Formula
31817 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
31818 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
31823 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
31824 \begin_inset Formula
31826 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
31834 \begin_layout Standard
31835 The multi-line formula type described here is called
31842 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
31843 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
31844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31846 reference "eq:asquared"
31852 The other types are described in section
31853 \begin_inset space ~
31857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31859 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
31867 \begin_layout Section
31868 Formula Numbering and Referencing
31869 \begin_inset Index idx
31874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31876 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31891 \begin_inset Index idx
31896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31898 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31902 Referencing formulas
31913 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31915 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
31922 \begin_layout Standard
31923 To number a formula,
31924 set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
31926 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31927 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
31929 \begin_inset space ~
31933 \begin_inset space ~
31941 arg "math-number-toggle"
31945 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
31946 within parentheses.
31947 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
31948 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on the document class.
31949 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
31950 separated by a dot:
31951 \begin_inset Formula
31961 arg "math-number-toggle"
31964 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
31965 You can only number displayed formulas.
31968 \begin_layout Standard
31969 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line:
31972 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31973 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
31975 \begin_inset space ~
31979 \begin_inset space ~
31987 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
31990 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
31991 \begin_inset Formula
31994 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
32000 To number all lines use the shortcut
32003 arg "math-number-toggle"
32009 \begin_layout Standard
32010 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32013 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
32014 A label is inserted with the menu
32016 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32025 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
32026 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
32027 It is recommended that you use the suggested
32028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32039 as the first part of the label,
32040 because this helps later to identify the label type when you have many labels in your document.
32041 We inserted in the following example the label
32042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32049 in the second line:
32050 \begin_inset Formula
32052 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
32053 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
32058 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
32059 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
32060 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
32062 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32064 \begin_inset space ~
32072 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
32076 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
32077 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
32078 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output as the formula number:
32081 \begin_layout Standard
32082 This is a cross-reference to equation (
32083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32085 reference "eq:tanhExp"
32093 \begin_layout Standard
32094 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
32095 's cross-reference box are described in section
32096 \begin_inset space ~
32100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32102 reference "sec:Cross-References"
32109 set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and press
32116 \begin_layout Section
32117 User defined math macros
32118 \begin_inset Index idx
32123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32125 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32142 \begin_layout Standard
32144 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you have equations of the same form in a document several times.
32145 Math macros are explained in section
32148 \begin_inset space ~
32160 \begin_layout Section
32164 \begin_layout Subsection
32166 \begin_inset Index idx
32171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32173 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32190 \begin_layout Standard
32191 The standard font for text is italic,
32192 for numbers the standard is roman.
32193 To set a font in a formula,
32197 \begin_inset space ~
32205 arg "math-insert \\font"
32209 or enter its command,
32211 \begin_inset space ~
32215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32217 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
32226 \begin_layout Standard
32227 \begin_inset Float table
32234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32235 \begin_inset Caption Standard
32237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32238 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32240 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
32244 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
32252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32254 \begin_inset Tabular
32255 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
32256 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
32257 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32258 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32290 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
32298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32317 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
32325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32344 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
32352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32377 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
32385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32404 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
32412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32426 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
32427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32432 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
32433 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
32441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32446 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
32458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32462 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
32470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32496 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
32504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32518 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
32519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32524 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
32532 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
32540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32545 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
32557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32561 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
32569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32595 \begin_layout Standard
32596 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32605 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
32608 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
32611 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
32615 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
32635 \begin_layout Standard
32636 When you use a typeface,
32637 a blue box is inserted in the formula.
32638 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
32643 within the box will set the cursor outside,
32644 so that you have to use a
32645 \change_deleted 177693 1654619816
32647 \change_inserted 177693 1654619818
32650 space when you need a space in the box.
32651 Here is an example where
32652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32663 denotes the set of numbers:
32664 \begin_inset Formula
32666 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
32674 \begin_layout Standard
32675 The typefaces are nestable,
32676 which can cause confusion.
32689 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
32693 \begin_inset Newline newline
32696 So it is better not to use this feature.
32699 \begin_layout Standard
32700 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
32702 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
32706 \begin_inset Newline newline
32709 You can only print them emboldened using the command
32716 which works like the other typeface commands:
32718 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
32724 \begin_layout Standard
32731 works for all symbols,
32736 \begin_layout Standard
32737 A number of other font options are available as well,
32740 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32741 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
32743 \begin_inset space ~
32751 \begin_layout Subsection
32753 \begin_inset Index idx
32758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32760 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32777 \begin_layout Standard
32778 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font,
32780 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text,
32781 which is obtained using the entry
32784 \begin_inset space ~
32788 \begin_inset space ~
32796 \begin_inset space ~
32804 arg "math-insert \\font"
32808 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
32809 in black instead of blue.
32810 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
32811 Here is an example:
32812 \begin_inset Formula
32815 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
32816 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
32825 \begin_layout Subsection
32827 \begin_inset Index idx
32832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32834 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32851 \begin_layout Standard
32852 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode,
32853 which are automatically chosen in most situations.
32874 For most characters,
32883 are actually the same size,
32885 superscripts and subscripts,
32886 and certain other structures,
32892 Except for some operators,
32893 which resize themselves to accommodate various situations,
32894 all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
32895 thinks are appropriate.
32896 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
32899 arg "math-insert \\style"
32903 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
32906 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
32910 which is normally in
32921 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
32925 The four styles are used in the following example:
32928 \begin_layout Standard
32929 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
32934 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
32939 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
32944 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
32950 \begin_layout Standard
32951 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset is set in a particular size with the menu
32953 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32955 \begin_inset space ~
32961 all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
32963 if the base font size of the document is changed,
32964 all fonts will be adjusted to correspond.
32965 As an example here is a formula in the font size
32966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32976 \begin_layout Standard
32980 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
32986 \begin_layout Section
32987 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
32989 \begin_inset Index idx
32994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33001 \begin_inset Index idx
33006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33008 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33025 \begin_layout Standard
33027 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS) that are in common use.
33030 \begin_layout Subsection
33031 Enabling AMS-Support
33034 \begin_layout Standard
33035 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in the document by
33036 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338725
33052 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338685
33053 selecting the checkbox
33056 \begin_inset space ~
33060 \begin_inset space ~
33064 \begin_inset space ~
33073 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33077 \begin_inset Index idx
33082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33084 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33101 \begin_inset space ~
33107 AMS is needed for many math-constructs;
33108 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
33109 -errors in formulas,
33110 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
33113 \begin_layout Subsection
33115 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33117 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
33122 \begin_inset Index idx
33127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33129 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33133 Multi-line Equations
33146 \begin_layout Standard
33147 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
33148 provides a selection of different formula types.
33150 allows you to choose between
33175 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
33177 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33185 for an explanation of these formula types.
33188 \begin_layout Chapter
33192 \begin_layout Section
33194 \begin_inset Index idx
33199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33206 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33208 name "sec:Cross-References"
33215 \begin_layout Standard
33216 One of \SpecialChar LyX
33217 's strengths is cross-references.
33218 You can reference every section,
33222 and list in the document.
33223 To reference a document part,
33224 you have to insert a label into it.
33225 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
33226 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
33229 \begin_layout Enumerate
33233 \begin_layout Enumerate
33234 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33236 name "enu:Second-item"
33243 \begin_layout Enumerate
33247 \begin_layout Standard
33248 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
33250 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33253 or by pressing the toolbar button
33260 A gray label box like this:
33262 \begin_inset Graphics
33263 filename clipart/label.png
33267 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
33269 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix,
33270 in our case the text
33271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33304 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted;
33306 if you insert a label into a section heading,
33307 the suggested prefix will be
33308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33322 \begin_layout Standard
33323 To reference the item,
33324 we refer to its label using the menu
33326 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33329 or the toolbar button
33332 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
33336 A gray cross-reference box like this:
33338 \begin_inset Graphics
33339 filename clipart/reference.png
33343 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels in the document.
33344 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
33345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33357 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear in the output.
33360 \begin_layout Standard
33361 As an alternative to
33363 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33367 you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
33372 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted to the actual cursor position via the menu
33374 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33386 \begin_layout Standard
33387 Here is our cross-reference:
33389 \begin_inset space ~
33393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33395 reference "enu:Second-item"
33403 \begin_layout Standard
33404 It is recommended to use a
33405 \change_deleted 177693 1654619823
33407 \change_inserted 177693 1654619826
33414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33415 described in section
33416 \begin_inset space ~
33420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33422 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
33432 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly line breaks between them.
33435 \begin_layout Standard
33436 There are eight formats of cross-references:
33439 \begin_layout Description
33442 this is the default:
33444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33446 reference "fig:Two-images"
33454 \begin_layout Description
33456 prints the number within two parentheses,
33457 this is the style normally used to reference formulas,
33458 especially when the reference name
33459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33470 reference "eq:tanhExp"
33478 \begin_layout Description
33480 prints the page number:
33482 \begin_inset space ~
33486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33487 LatexCommand pageref
33488 reference "fig:Two-images"
33496 \begin_layout Description
33498 \begin_inset space ~
33502 \begin_inset space ~
33506 prints the text “on page” and the page number:
33508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33509 LatexCommand vpageref
33510 reference "fig:Two-images"
33516 \begin_inset Newline newline
33519 If the label is on the same page,
33520 it prints “on this page”;
33521 if the label is on a facing page in a two-sided document,
33522 it prints “on the facing page”;
33523 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page,
33524 it prints “on the previous page”;
33525 if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
33526 it prints “on the next page”.
33527 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
33530 \begin_layout Description
33532 \begin_inset space ~
33536 \begin_inset space ~
33540 \begin_inset space ~
33545 the text “on page” and the page number:
33547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33549 reference "fig:Two-images"
33555 \begin_inset Newline newline
33558 If the label is on the same page,
33559 this format behaves like
33566 otherwise it behaves like
33570 \begin_inset space ~
33574 \begin_inset space ~
33583 \begin_layout Description
33585 \begin_inset space ~
33589 prints a self defined cross-reference format.
33590 \begin_inset Newline newline
33594 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33603 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33613 \begin_inset Index idx
33618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33621 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33636 \begin_inset Index idx
33641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33644 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33664 \begin_inset Newline newline
33667 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
33668 -package should be used for this feature by setting the option
33670 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
33674 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33675 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33683 is the default and preferred because
33687 supports only English documents.
33688 The format is specified by using the command
33692 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
33701 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33702 preamble of the document.
33703 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label shortcut
33704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33712 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33720 \begin_inset Newline newline
33727 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
33732 \begin_inset Newline newline
33743 predefines reference formats for all available types.
33744 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem' environments.
33745 So if you want to make formatted references to,
33748 then you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
33754 you might do so as follows:
33755 \begin_inset Newline newline
33762 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
33763 format{prop}{Proposition
33768 \begin_inset Newline newline
33771 For more information about defining formatted references,
33772 have a look at the package documentation
33773 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33775 key "prettyref,refstyle"
33781 \begin_inset Newline newline
33792 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
33797 \change_inserted -584632292 1692991077
33799 \begin_inset Newline newline
33802 If you activate the option
33803 \change_deleted -712698321 1693042040
33805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33809 \change_inserted -584632292 1692991077
33812 Format cross-references in work area
33813 \change_deleted -712698321 1693042041
33817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33821 \change_inserted -584632292 1692991077
33824 will attempt to display the formatted reference as it would appear in output,
33827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33835 rather than just displaying the label.
33840 \begin_layout Description
33842 \begin_inset space ~
33846 prints the caption or the name of the reference:
33848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33849 LatexCommand nameref
33850 reference "fig:Two-images"
33858 \begin_layout Description
33860 \begin_inset space ~
33864 prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33865 label for the reference:
33867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33868 LatexCommand labelonly
33869 reference "fig:Two-images"
33875 \begin_inset Newline newline
33878 This allows for customization,
33879 using \SpecialChar TeX
33881 if you want to issue a command that \SpecialChar LyX
33888 then you may want to use the
33891 \begin_inset space ~
33897 which will output only the part of the reference following the
33898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33906 This is the form needed for e.
33907 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33911 \begin_inset space \space{}
33918 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
33920 The varieties are adjusted in the field
33924 of the cross-reference window,
33925 that appears when you click on the cross-reference.
33928 \begin_layout Standard
33929 You can only use the style
33933 to reference numbered document parts,
33934 while the reference style
33938 is always possible.
33941 \begin_layout Standard
33942 If you want to reference a section,
33943 put the label in the section heading;
33944 for floats put the label in the caption;
33945 for footnotes put the label in it.
33946 Referencing formulas is explained in section
33947 \begin_inset space ~
33951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33953 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
33961 \begin_layout Standard
33962 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
33966 \begin_inset space ~
33970 \begin_inset space ~
33975 sets the cursor before the referenced label
33976 \change_deleted 5863208 1686632729
33979 \change_inserted 5863208 1686632729
33981 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
33982 (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding label
33983 \change_deleted 5863208 1686632734
33985 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
33987 \change_inserted 5863208 1686632735
33991 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
33994 \begin_inset space ~
33999 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
34000 You can also go back with the toolbar button
34003 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
34007 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757706
34012 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
34013 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
34021 \begin_layout Standard
34022 You can change labels at any time.
34023 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you do not need to
34024 \change_deleted -584632292 1599757720
34026 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757724
34027 change them all manually
34032 \begin_layout Standard
34033 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label,
34034 you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
34035 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead of the reference.
34038 \begin_layout Standard
34039 References are described in detail in the section
34050 \begin_layout Section
34051 Table of Contents and other Listings
34052 \begin_inset Index idx
34057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34064 \begin_inset Index idx
34069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34071 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34086 \begin_inset Index idx
34091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34098 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34107 \begin_layout Subsection
34109 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34111 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
34118 \begin_layout Standard
34119 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
34121 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34122 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34124 \begin_inset space ~
34128 \begin_inset space ~
34134 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
34136 If you click on it,
34142 showing you the TOC entries as outline,
34143 which allows you to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
34144 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
34146 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34148 \begin_inset space ~
34153 that is described in section
34154 \begin_inset space ~
34158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34160 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
34168 \begin_layout Standard
34169 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
34170 If you have declared a short title for a section heading,
34171 as described in section
34172 \begin_inset space ~
34176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34178 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
34184 it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
34186 \begin_inset space ~
34190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34192 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
34197 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are listed in the TOC.
34198 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
34201 \begin_layout Subsection
34204 Listings and Algorithms
34205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34207 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
34214 \begin_layout Standard
34217 listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
34218 You can insert them via the
34220 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34221 List/Contents/References
34224 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
34227 \begin_layout Section
34228 URLs and Hyperlinks
34229 \begin_inset Index idx
34234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34241 \begin_inset Index idx
34246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34255 \begin_layout Subsection
34257 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34266 \begin_layout Standard
34267 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
34269 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34275 \begin_layout Standard
34276 Here is an example URL:
34280 \begin_inset Flex URL
34283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34285 https://www.lyx.org
34293 \begin_layout Standard
34295 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535921
34296 You cannot change the style of the link text
34297 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535924
34301 the URL text will always be in the style
34307 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535967
34308 You can globally change the formatting by putting to
34310 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34311 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34317 \begin_layout LyX-Code
34319 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536088
34325 \begin_layout Standard
34327 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536347
34351 (use whatever the current text font is).
34352 To have italicized URLs,
34356 \begin_layout LyX-Code
34358 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536274
34370 \begin_layout Standard
34372 \change_deleted -712698321 1676536203
34373 To be able to format the URL text,
34374 use hyperlinks as explained in the next subsection.
34376 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535961
34380 \begin_layout Standard
34382 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34384 \change_deleted -712698321 1676534694
34386 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34388 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535379
34389 between lines at certain characters,
34393 \begin_layout LyX-Code
34395 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535384
34406 \begin_layout Standard
34408 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535411
34409 It does not break at a hyphen (
34414 but you can change that by adding
34419 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535339
34421 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535862
34424 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34425 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34426 Document Class\SpecialChar menuseparator
34427 Class Options\SpecialChar menuseparator
34431 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535861
34434 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34436 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535863
34438 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535864
34440 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34442 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535842
34443 this still does not break URLs suitably to you,
34444 a last resort is to put
34447 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34451 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535846
34455 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536760
34458 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34459 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34464 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535894
34465 in the preamble then the
34466 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535897
34468 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34470 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535899
34472 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34474 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535445
34476 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535903
34478 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34479 be broken at every character.
34481 \change_deleted -712698321 1676536383
34487 \begin_layout Standard
34488 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34497 URLs must not end with a backslash,
34498 otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
34507 \begin_layout Subsection
34509 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34511 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
34518 \begin_layout Standard
34519 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
34521 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34524 or with the toolbar button
34531 The appearing dialog has two fields:
34541 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
34542 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
34544 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34546 name "LyX's homepage"
34547 target "https://www.lyx.org"
34553 an Email address like this:
34555 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34557 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
34558 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
34566 \change_deleted -712698321 1672058176
34570 \change_inserted -712698321 1672058271
34571 or any other valid URI (such as
34582 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
34590 \begin_layout Standard
34591 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by adding the prefix
34592 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34604 \change_inserted -712698321 1672058343
34606 but note that most PDF viewers disable such links for security reasons
34611 \begin_layout Standard
34612 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
34613 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
34614 To set the format of the link text,
34615 highlight the hyperlink inset and use the text style dialog.
34616 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
34621 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34623 name "LyX's homepage"
34624 target "https://www.lyx.org"
34632 \begin_layout Standard
34633 The link text color can be changed,
34638 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
34640 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34641 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34645 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the option
34646 \begin_inset Newline newline
34654 \begin_inset Newline newline
34661 in the PDF Properties dialog.
34662 \change_inserted 5863208 1686630948
34666 \begin_layout Standard
34668 \change_inserted 5863208 1686631630
34669 To open the link while editing in \SpecialChar LyX
34670 you can use context menu (or
34671 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813434
34673 \change_inserted 5863208 1686631630
34677 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813424
34681 \change_inserted 5863208 1686631630
34683 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
34687 \begin_layout Section
34689 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
34691 \begin_inset Index idx
34696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34703 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34705 name "sec:Counters"
34712 \begin_layout Standard
34714 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
34715 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34716 is its ability to manage counters.
34718 this is handled automatically,
34719 but there are times one wants to modify counters directly.
34720 This can be done in
34721 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500277
34723 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500277
34726 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
34727 using the counter inset,
34728 which is accessible from the Edit menu.
34729 This allows one to set a counter's value;
34730 to reset it (to zero);
34734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34736 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541231
34737 Note that the section counter,
34739 starts with its value at zero and then is incremented to one when the first section is created.
34741 if you want the next section to be section five,
34743 then you need to set the section counter to four.
34750 to add to the value (or subtract from it,
34751 since the value added can be negative);
34753 to restore the saved value;
34754 and to print the value.
34755 These effects can also be limited to
34756 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500332
34758 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500332
34761 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
34763 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output,
34765 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500350
34767 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500350
34770 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
34774 \begin_layout Standard
34776 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
34777 There are five commands you can use:
34780 \begin_layout Enumerate
34782 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
34788 Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
34791 \begin_layout Enumerate
34793 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
34799 Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or to subtract,
34800 if you choose a negative number)
34803 \begin_layout Enumerate
34805 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
34811 Sets the value of the counter to 0.
34814 \begin_layout Enumerate
34816 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
34819 Save value of counter:
34822 Saves the value of the counter so that it can later be restored.
34825 \begin_layout Enumerate
34827 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
34830 Restore value of counter:
34833 Restores the previously saved value.
34836 \begin_layout Standard
34838 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
34839 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all those that are available in the current document class.
34844 \begin_layout Section
34846 \begin_inset Index idx
34851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34858 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34860 name "sec:Appendices"
34867 \begin_layout Standard
34868 Appendices are created with the menu
34870 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34872 \begin_inset space ~
34876 \begin_inset space ~
34882 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end as the appendix part of the book.
34883 This part is marked with a red borderline.
34886 \begin_layout Standard
34887 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
34888 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
34889 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot and the subsection number.
34890 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
34894 \begin_layout Standard
34896 \begin_inset space ~
34900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34902 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
34912 \begin_inset space ~
34916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34918 reference "subsec:Export"
34926 \begin_layout Section
34928 \begin_inset Index idx
34933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34940 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34942 name "sec:Bibliography"
34949 \begin_layout Standard
34950 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
34952 You can include a bibliography database,
34953 which is explained in sec.
34954 \begin_inset space ~
34958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34960 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
34969 or you can insert the bibliography manually,
34970 using the paragraph environment
34975 which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
34976 \begin_inset space ~
34980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34982 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
34988 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in this document,
34989 such as author-year citations,
34990 and if you have more than a handful of references,
34991 then you should seriously consider
34995 using a bibliography database.
34998 \begin_layout Standard
34999 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches,
35000 we use two bibliographies in this document,
35005 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
35007 the bibliography that is created from a database lists only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
35009 the database approach relieves you,
35010 amongst other things,
35011 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
35014 \begin_layout Subsection
35015 The Bibliography Environment
35016 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35018 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
35025 \begin_layout Standard
35031 every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled with a number.
35032 If you click on it,
35033 you will get a dialog in which you can set a
35042 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography entry.
35043 Each entry needs to be given a unique key,
35044 which is one word consisting of ASCII characters only.
35048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35050 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35053 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
35059 \begin_inset Newline newline
35063 \begin_inset Flex URL
35066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35068 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
35079 our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
35081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35089 a short form of its title,
35091 \begin_inset Newline newline
35099 references to it will appear with this label instead of the number of the entry.
35104 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
35112 \begin_layout Standard
35113 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
35115 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35118 or the toolbar button
35121 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
35125 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear containing the available citations.
35126 Select one or more keys from the list and
35136 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
35137 If you click on the box,
35138 the citation window will appear and you can change the reference.
35141 \begin_layout Standard
35142 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
35143 Here are two examples;
35144 the first without a label,
35145 the second with the label
35146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35156 \begin_layout Standard
35160 Companion Second Edition
35164 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35166 key "latexcompanion"
35174 \begin_layout Standard
35175 The \SpecialChar LyX
35176 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
35178 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35188 \begin_layout Standard
35189 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations,
35190 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35196 \begin_inset Index idx
35201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35204 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35221 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
35222 the label needs to be given the form
35223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35234 Author A and Author B(Year)
35235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35242 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits the year.
35249 \begin_inset space ~
35254 in the document settings
35255 \begin_inset Index idx
35260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35262 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35278 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
35280 \begin_inset space ~
35286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35288 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
35297 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
35299 Once you have done that,
35303 \change_inserted 630872221 1621589258
35305 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
35308 dialog has three input fields instead of the
35327 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation reference,
35328 the second the year (without parentheses).
35329 These two are madatory.
35330 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full list (
35336 ) and in abrreviated form (
35344 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
35345 add the abbreviated form to
35349 and the full list to the optional
35357 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
35358 If specified like this,
35361 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
35362 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
35365 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35382 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between full and abbreviated list
35386 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
35387 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for the citation references.
35388 In the bibliography entry,
35389 author and year must be added manually.
35394 \begin_layout Standard
35395 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest label via the menu
35397 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
35399 \begin_inset space ~
35407 arg "layout-paragraph"
35411 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
35414 \begin_layout Subsection
35415 Bibliography databases
35416 \begin_inset Index idx
35421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35423 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35438 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35440 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
35447 \begin_layout Standard
35448 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different documents.
35452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35453 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning them.
35454 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations and reviews along with bibliographical information.
35459 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography entries.
35460 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of your working field in a database.
35461 This database can be used for different documents,
35462 and by default only the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography list for that document.
35463 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books you have cited.
35466 \begin_layout Standard
35467 The database is a text file with the file extension
35468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35480 containing the bibliography in a special format.
35481 The format is explained in
35482 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35489 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35491 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35493 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
35499 The file can be created using any text editor,
35500 but normally one uses a special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
35501 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
35503 \begin_inset Flex URL
35506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35508 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
35516 \begin_layout Standard
35518 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
35519 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35520 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases for a long time.
35521 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing styles available.
35522 But it has its drawbacks,
35523 especially when it comes to more complex bibliographic needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
35524 Those are addressed by
35529 \begin_inset Index idx
35534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35537 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35552 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35553 (although it has been significantly extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35564 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35566 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35567 might conversely fail to correctly handle databases that use specific
35577 but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references from it.
35580 \begin_layout Standard
35581 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35587 set in the document settings (menu
35589 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35593 \begin_inset Index idx
35598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35600 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35621 \begin_inset space ~
35626 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35634 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35635 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35637 \begin_inset Index idx
35642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35644 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35648 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35662 \begin_layout Standard
35663 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35667 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35668 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
35670 \begin_inset space ~
35676 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35684 Add bibliography to TOC
35686 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
35691 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database in the document or just the cited references.
35693 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
35698 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s),
35699 should this differ from the encoding of the document.
35704 \begin_layout Standard
35705 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35706 style file is a text file with the file extension
35707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35718 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
35719 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35720 distribution should provide several of these,
35721 and many publishers provide their own style files,
35722 so that you don't have to take care of the layout.
35723 It is of course possible to write your own style file,
35724 but this is something for experts.
35728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35729 For information on how this is done,
35731 \begin_inset Newline newline
35735 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35737 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
35747 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35753 which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards Institute (DIN).
35756 \begin_layout Standard
35757 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
35760 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35762 \begin_inset Index idx
35767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35769 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35784 \begin_inset Index idx
35789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35792 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35809 \begin_layout Standard
35810 Accessing a database via
35814 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35817 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599883
35819 \change_inserted 630872221 1621599883
35824 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35825 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
35827 \begin_inset space ~
35833 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35834 you cannot select a
35839 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
35843 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35846 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
35848 note the following.
35853 \begin_layout Standard
35858 has two different style files:
35859 a bibliography style file (text file with the file extension
35860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35871 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style file (text file with the file extension
35872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35883 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
35884 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching styles.
35885 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography style.
35888 \begin_layout Standard
35893 styles are not set in the
35896 \begin_inset space ~
35902 but in the document settings.
35903 \begin_inset Index idx
35908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35910 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35925 in the dialog in the
35930 which is only visible if you use
35935 you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for example how its heading will appear).
35936 These options are described in detail in the
35942 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35952 \begin_layout Standard
35953 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
35954 \begin_inset space ~
35958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35960 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
35971 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35972 Bibliography Processors
35975 \begin_layout Standard
35976 To generate the bibliography from a database,
35978 uses a bibliography processor,
35979 that is an external program that reads the database,
35980 sorts the citations and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
35981 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35983 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread,
35984 but the disadvantage that it has severe limitations,
35988 \begin_layout Standard
35990 some alternatives have been developed that address some of these limitations.
35991 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
35992 You can do this on a general level in
35994 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35995 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35996 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
35999 or for individual documents in
36001 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36002 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36006 The following variants are available by default:
36009 \begin_layout Description
36012 \begin_inset Index idx
36017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36020 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36034 developed exclusively for
36038 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36044 provides full Unicode support,
36045 unlimited memory and many specific features
36055 it is strongly recommended to use
36062 \begin_layout Description
36063 bibtex the standard;
36064 does not allow special characters in bibliography entries that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding,
36066 works with all bibliography packages,
36067 although it will probably fail with
36071 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
36074 \begin_layout Description
36075 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding (but no Unicode support),
36081 works with all bibliography packages,
36082 although more complex
36086 bibliographies will exceed its limits,
36091 features are supported.
36094 \begin_layout Standard
36095 By default (with the
36101 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36102 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36115 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36116 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36117 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36122 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography approach (
36135 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36136 -based bibliography styles).
36137 This should suit most needs.
36140 \begin_layout Standard
36141 In Japanese documents,
36142 a specific processor is used.
36143 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
36144 (in \SpecialChar LyX
36150 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36151 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
36152 You can adjust it in
36154 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36155 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36156 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36162 \begin_layout Standard
36163 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you can add below the selection.
36164 Before adding options,
36165 it is strongly recommended that you read the manual of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36172 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36182 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36186 \begin_layout Standard
36188 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple bibliographies.
36189 These are explained in detail in section
36191 Customizing Bibliographies
36195 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36200 Additional Features
36203 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599958
36207 \begin_layout Subsection
36209 \begin_inset Index idx
36214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36216 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36233 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
36240 \begin_layout Standard
36241 Many different citation formats are common,
36243 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36247 \begin_inset space \space{}
36250 numerical citation (as
36251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36258 like in this document),
36259 alpha-numerical citations (as
36260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36267 ) or author-year citations (as
36268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36277 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style files.
36280 \begin_layout Standard
36281 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
36284 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36285 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36289 \begin_inset Index idx
36294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36296 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36310 you have a range of other options,
36311 depending on your preferred bibliography approach.
36316 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography labels,
36320 \begin_inset space ~
36331 \begin_inset space ~
36336 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
36337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36339 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
36347 \begin_layout Standard
36348 With a bibliography database (see
36349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36351 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36359 ) one has in contrary to the
36363 environment full access to the formatting styles.
36364 These style formats are available:
36367 \begin_layout Description
36369 \begin_inset space ~
36372 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36373 -based approached without any additional packages (simple numeric citations).
36376 \begin_layout Description
36377 Biblatex loads the package
36382 \begin_inset Index idx
36387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36390 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36404 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
36406 Biblatex citation style
36410 Biblatex bibliography style
36413 Options to the package
36417 can be entered in the
36424 \begin_layout Description
36426 \begin_inset space ~
36430 \begin_inset space ~
36433 mode) loads the package
36437 with the natbib compatibility mode.
36438 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that uses
36449 behavior very closely.
36454 this option has some additional styles.
36459 styles are also supported by this variant.
36462 \begin_layout Description
36464 \begin_inset space ~
36467 (BibTeX) loads the package
36472 \begin_inset Index idx
36477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36480 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36494 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
36497 \begin_layout Description
36499 \begin_inset space ~
36502 (BibTeX) loads the package
36507 \begin_inset Index idx
36512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36515 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36529 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
36532 \begin_layout Standard
36541 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical citation styles.
36542 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
36552 this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
36554 Whether the output uses numerical,
36555 author-year or another format such as alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
36557 Biblatex citation style
36561 when switching between Author-year and Author-number,
36562 a suitable style is proposed.
36569 the dialog selection will ultimately determine the style.
36572 \begin_layout Standard
36573 For any author-year and author-numerical selection,
36574 multiple style variants are available in the
36579 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase a name prefix such as
36580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36588 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36592 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36595 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
36596 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36600 \begin_inset space \space{}
36604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36615 \begin_layout Standard
36616 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation reference,
36618 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36622 \begin_inset space \space{}
36626 which will then be formatted according to the style's needs (e.
36627 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36631 \begin_inset space \space{}
36635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36647 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
36651 \begin_inset space ~
36659 \begin_inset space ~
36665 Here is a simple example where the text
36666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36670 \begin_inset space ~
36674 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36677 appears after the reference:
36680 \begin_layout Quote
36682 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36685 key "latexcompanion"
36693 \begin_layout Standard
36694 All styles except for
36698 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such as
36699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36707 This text is then also included in the parentheses,
36708 if the style requires this.
36711 \begin_layout Standard
36712 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
36713 So if you refer to multiple references at once,
36714 the prenote will precede the first citation in the list,
36715 the postnote will follow the last.
36720 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a multi-citation (so-called
36721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36724 qualified citation lists
36725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36731 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple items the
36735 dialog will display three columns in the field
36743 \begin_inset space ~
36752 \begin_inset space ~
36760 \begin_inset space ~
36766 If you double-click on an item's
36769 \begin_inset space ~
36777 \begin_inset space ~
36783 you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
36786 General text before
36792 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
36795 \begin_layout Subsection
36797 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
36798 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36800 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
36804 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
36808 \begin_layout Standard
36810 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
36812 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
36815 \begin_inset space ~
36819 \begin_inset space ~
36823 \begin_inset space ~
36827 \begin_inset space ~
36830 Content\SpecialChar ldots
36833 context menu if specific conditions are met:
36836 \begin_layout Itemize
36838 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526971
36839 If citation entries include any of the fields
36840 \begin_inset Flex Code
36843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36845 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36854 \begin_inset Flex Code
36857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36859 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36867 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
36869 \begin_inset Flex Code
36872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36874 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36882 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv,
36887 \begin_inset Flex Code
36890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36892 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36901 the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
36904 \begin_layout Itemize
36906 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
36907 If citation entries include any of the fields
36908 \begin_inset Flex Code
36911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36913 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36922 \change_inserted 5863208 1692129620
36924 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
36926 \begin_inset Flex Code
36929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36931 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36939 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local drive,
36940 the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
36941 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
36944 \begin_layout Standard
36946 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
36947 In addition to that,
36950 \change_inserted 5863208 1676821714
36955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36957 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822207
36958 By default we provide python script
36959 \begin_inset Flex Code
36962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36964 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822064
36973 but you can use any modified script by setting
36974 \begin_inset Flex Code
36977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36979 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822135
36982 citation_search_view
36990 \change_deleted -712698321 1676971997
36992 \change_inserted -712698321 1676971998
36994 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822207
36996 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972080
37001 in your local configuration directory (please refer to the respective section at
37003 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
37007 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822207
37010 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972139
37011 The default setting is to be found in the file
37015 in the same directory and can be copied and modified for this purpose.
37023 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
37024 your disk for matching files if you enable
37026 Search drive for cited files
37030 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37031 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
37032 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37033 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37037 It uses the tokens supplied at
37041 in the same preferences section (by default:
37043 \change_inserted 5863208 1676968851
37048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37050 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
37052 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972365
37054 \change_deleted -712698321 1676972365
37056 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
37058 \begin_inset Flex Code
37061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37063 \change_inserted 5863208 1676968931
37064 %year% %abbrvciteauthor%
37073 \change_deleted -712698321 1676972344
37075 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972349
37077 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
37079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37096 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972338
37099 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
37100 are automatically stripped from the result.
37101 \change_deleted -712698321 1676972332
37103 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
37112 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
37114 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the
37115 \change_deleted 630872221 1621608311
37117 \change_inserted 630872221 1621608312
37119 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
37120 of the file (at arbitrary position).
37122 opens the first matching file it finds.
37123 This might or might not be the file you are looking for;
37124 the more systematic your file naming is,
37125 and the less ambiguous keywords you use,
37126 the greater the chance this works for you.
37131 \begin_layout Standard
37133 \change_inserted -712698321 1693402434
37134 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
37135 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37137 \begin_inset Flex Code
37140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37142 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
37151 \begin_inset Flex Code
37154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37156 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
37165 but there are also special keys,
37166 which are documented in the
37168 Customization manual
37174 Cite format description
37179 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37181 \change_inserted -712698321 1693402437
37182 Security implications
37185 \begin_layout Standard
37187 \change_inserted -712698321 1693402479
37188 Note that any document (or mainly
37189 \begin_inset Flex Code
37192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37194 \change_inserted -712698321 1693402454
37202 file in this case) coming from a third party might contain malicious links or otherwise malformed URLs and we suggest you do not use this feature for other documents than those you prepared yourself.
37205 \begin_layout Standard
37207 \change_inserted -712698321 1693402467
37208 For that reason the searching on disk is disabled by default and you will be asked for confirmation of viewing all the links (both can be bypassed,
37209 but beware what you are doing).
37214 \begin_layout Section
37216 \begin_inset Index idx
37221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37237 \begin_layout Standard
37238 An index entry is created if you use the menu
37240 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37242 \begin_inset space ~
37247 or the toolbar button
37254 \change_inserted -712698321 1667668430
37256 \begin_inset space ~
37260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37262 reference "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
37267 for some advanced methods)
37271 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37275 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110543
37277 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37281 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37286 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110903
37288 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37290 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110872
37293 the text that appears in the index
37294 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37295 (if you read this in \SpecialChar LyX
37298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37305 index inset in the heading above for example)
37308 The word where the cursor is in
37309 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37313 or the currently highlighted text
37314 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37318 is proposed by \SpecialChar LyX
37320 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110629
37324 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37326 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37330 copied into the inset)
37335 \begin_layout Standard
37337 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110737
37338 (which prints out the index in your document)
37341 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110760
37342 in the document with
37343 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110759
37348 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37349 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
37351 \begin_inset space ~
37357 A light blue box labeled
37358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37369 will show the place where the index
37370 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110783
37372 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110784
37376 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110788
37381 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111027
37384 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111030
37386 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111030
37389 he index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
37391 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111053
37393 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111233
37395 as there are no settings to make.
37396 This changes if you select
37397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37400 Use multiple indexes
37401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37405 \begin_inset space ~
37409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37411 reference "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
37421 the box turns gray and can be clicked (as there are now settings that can be made).
37422 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111066
37428 \begin_layout Standard
37430 \change_inserted -712698321 1667193296
37432 an index entry is simply a word or phrase in the (alphabetically ordered) index list with a reference to the page or pages where the index entry has been inserted in the document.
37434 you can customize index entries to look different.
37435 You can group index entries hierarchically,
37436 let the index list refer to a range of pages rather than a single page,
37437 let it refer to another entry in the index list rather than,
37438 or additionally to,
37440 you can format the page reference (e.
37441 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37445 make it bold for specific pages),
37446 and you can determine the order of an entry in the list.
37447 These features are available in \SpecialChar LyX
37449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37458 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37461 that appears if the cursor is in an index entry or via the index settings dialog which can be opened via right mouse click on the index inset.
37466 \begin_layout Standard
37468 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112045
37469 give a short overview of
37470 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112047
37474 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112014
37475 these features in turn
37476 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112017
37479 in the next subsections.
37480 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
37481 's index mechanism,
37482 have a look at one of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37484 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37486 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
37494 \begin_layout Subsection
37496 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115499
37497 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37499 name "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
37505 Grouping Index Entries
37506 \begin_inset Index idx
37511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37513 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37530 \begin_layout Standard
37531 Index entries are often
37532 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112078
37535 grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the index
37536 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112212
37537 and to hold categories together (e.g.,
37543 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37550 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37560 \change_inserted -712698321 1667194528
37561 This can be done in \SpecialChar LyX
37564 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37565 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
37575 Both methods insert a subinset in which you can enter the subentry.
37576 Maximally two such subentry insets,
37578 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37582 three levels of grouping in total,
37583 are allowed per index entry.
37584 Note that it does not matter where you insert these subentry insets in the index inset,
37585 but the order of them matters and determines the grouping hierarchy.
37586 In the \SpecialChar LyX
37588 the index entry in the header above shows an example for a two-level grouped entry (and you can see the result in the index of this document at the entry
37593 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37602 \begin_layout Standard
37604 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195700
37606 each subentry is on a new line and indented a bit more.
37607 Note that the higher levels only get their own page references if they have also a separate entry (without subentry)
37608 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
37609 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated lists under the entry
37610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37618 First we create the entry
37619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37627 \begin_inset space ~
37631 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37633 reference "subsec:Lists"
37639 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
37640 \begin_inset space ~
37644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37646 reference "sec:Itemize"
37652 we insert the command
37655 \begin_layout Standard
37657 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
37663 \begin_layout Standard
37665 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
37669 \begin_layout Standard
37671 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
37677 \begin_layout Standard
37679 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
37680 for the enumerated list in section
37681 \begin_inset space ~
37685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37687 reference "sec:Enumerate"
37697 \begin_layout Standard
37699 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195765
37700 Note also that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37702 subentries are indicated by a preceding
37703 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112752
37707 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112757
37711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37719 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112802
37721 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
37723 although you have to take care that the character is not
37726 \change_inserted -712698321 1667122587
37729 a real exclamation mark has to be inserted to an index entry in a specific way.
37731 \begin_inset space ~
37735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37737 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
37743 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112764
37744 marks the grouping levels.
37748 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112659
37749 You can have three levels;
37750 every index level is indented a bit more.
37751 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
37752 If we don't have an index entry for
37753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37761 it will be printed anyway,
37762 but without a page number.
37767 \begin_layout Subsection
37769 \begin_inset Index idx
37774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37776 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37793 \begin_layout Standard
37795 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112869
37797 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112870
37801 \change_inserted -712698321 1667113289
37802 refers to single pages where the index entries have been inserted
37803 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113293
37804 will appear with the page number of the indexed section
37808 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113300
37810 \change_inserted -712698321 1667113300
37814 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113313
37815 index more pages under the same entry
37816 \change_inserted -712698321 1667114974
37817 refer to a page range instead,
37818 you can do this by inserting two index entries:
37819 one that marks the beginning of the range,
37820 the other that marks its end
37824 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195873
37825 Both need to contain the same index entry (and possibly subentries) text.
37826 To mark start and end,
37827 select the respective
37831 option in the index inset settings dialog.
37832 Range starts and ends are indicated in the index inset label via
37833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37851 \begin_layout Standard
37853 \change_inserted -712698321 1667126475
37854 Note that you have to take care that range markers are complete.
37855 If a range start without a respective end (or vice versa) is found,
37856 the index processor might terminate and not produce an index without informing you about the reason.
37859 \begin_layout Standard
37861 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
37863 if we want to index the paragraph environments,
37864 we create an index entry in section
37865 \begin_inset space ~
37869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37871 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
37879 \begin_layout Standard
37881 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
37884 Paragraph environments|(
37887 \begin_layout Standard
37889 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
37890 and another entry at the end of section
37891 \begin_inset space ~
37895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37897 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
37905 \begin_layout Standard
37907 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
37910 Paragraph environments|)
37913 \begin_layout Standard
37915 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
37917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37940 respectively start and end the index range.
37941 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
37942 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of the pages of the indexed document parts.
37943 An example is the index entry
37944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37957 \begin_layout Subsection
37959 \begin_inset Index idx
37964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37966 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37983 \begin_layout Standard
37984 It is also possible to refer to another index entry
37985 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115277
37992 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116351
37993 This might be useful if you anticipate that your readers might look for an entry at different places,
37995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38007 (which could be resolved by a cross reference
38008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38020 ) or also if you use hierarchical grouping (section
38021 \begin_inset space ~
38025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38027 reference "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
38034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38049 \begin_layout Standard
38051 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115626
38052 This is possible in \SpecialChar LyX
38055 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38056 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
38062 \begin_layout Standard
38064 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116218
38065 If you want a cross-reference and page references,
38068 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38069 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
38074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38081 instead and makes more sense if you also add entries that are referred to by page number as in
38082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38094 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38102 \begin_layout Standard
38104 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
38105 We referred for example in the index entry
38106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38114 \begin_inset space ~
38118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38120 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
38125 ) to the index entry
38126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38133 in the same section using the entry
38136 \begin_layout Standard
38138 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
38141 GIF|see{Image formats}
38144 \begin_layout Standard
38146 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
38147 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
38149 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
38150 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
38155 \begin_layout Subsection
38157 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121174
38158 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38160 name "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
38167 \begin_inset Index idx
38172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38174 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38191 \begin_layout Standard
38193 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116657
38194 Sometimes the automatic ordering of index entries is not the one you want.
38195 This might be the case with some index processors (such as
38200 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116658
38203 f you use accented characters in the index entry
38204 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116670
38205 the entries might not follow the rules for the index order
38206 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116709
38207 or if you use macros
38210 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127198
38214 \begin_layout Standard
38216 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116836
38217 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
38222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38223 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program,
38225 \begin_inset space ~
38229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38231 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
38241 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
38242 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
38243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38269 \begin_inset Index idx
38274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38276 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38291 \begin_inset Index idx
38296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38298 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38313 \begin_inset Index idx
38318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38325 They will be sorted in the order maïs,
38327 maison but we want the order maïs,
38334 \begin_layout Standard
38336 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38339 previous entry@current entry
38342 \begin_layout Standard
38344 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38345 In our case we want to have
38346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38361 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
38364 \begin_layout Standard
38366 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38372 \begin_layout Standard
38374 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38375 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
38376 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
38378 See the next subsection for an example.
38379 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116836
38383 \begin_layout Standard
38385 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127344
38386 To accommodate for that,
38389 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38390 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
38394 The sortkey you enter here is not output in the index,
38395 it is just used for sorting (instead of the actual entry).
38397 you can pass the sort key
38398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38409 should your index processor be incapable to sort Slovenian postmodern philosophers correctly.
38412 \begin_layout Standard
38414 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127399
38415 Note that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
38417 sortkeys are separated from the actual entry by the character
38418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38426 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
38428 although you have to take care that the character is not formatted.
38430 a real @ character has to be inserted to an index entry in a specific way.
38432 \begin_inset space ~
38436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38438 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
38448 \begin_layout Subsection
38450 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127427
38452 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127428
38456 \begin_inset Index idx
38461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38463 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38480 \begin_layout Standard
38482 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127459
38484 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127459
38487 he appearance of index entries
38488 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127470
38489 can be formatted as usual
38491 via the text style dialog
38492 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127566
38494 the toolbar or shortcuts.
38495 Entries will appear in the index list in the way they are formatted in the index entry
38498 \begin_inset Index idx
38503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38505 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38511 This is an italic dummy entry
38522 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127631
38523 Note that this also means that two differently formatted otherwise identical entries,
38525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38538 will be listed separately.
38540 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
38542 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127638
38546 \begin_layout Standard
38548 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
38552 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
38554 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
38558 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
38564 option in the index entry settings dialog.
38566 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
38567 number using the character
38568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38575 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
38576 -command without a backslash.
38577 We can write for example
38578 \change_inserted -712698321 1667196148
38579 You can either select one of the proposed formatting options (
38599 you are supposed to enter a valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
38606 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38610 a self-defined command
38611 \begin_inset Flex Code
38614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38616 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118710
38624 or an existing macro such as
38625 \begin_inset Flex Code
38628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38630 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127771
38643 \begin_layout Standard
38645 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118734
38648 italic page number:|textit
38651 \begin_layout Standard
38653 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118734
38654 to get the page number in italic.
38655 \begin_inset Index idx
38660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38662 italic page number:|textit
38667 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
38668 -commands begin with a backslash,
38669 but in this special case
38670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38686 \begin_inset space ~
38692 Have a look at section
38693 \begin_inset space ~
38697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38699 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
38704 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38710 \begin_layout Standard
38712 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118832
38713 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38722 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
38726 to generate the index,
38728 \begin_inset space ~
38732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38734 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
38745 this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
38750 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used,
38752 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38755 key "latexcompanion"
38770 \begin_layout Standard
38772 we encourage you to
38773 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118871
38774 not format page numbers directly as shown above
38775 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118875
38776 use self-defined commands
38780 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127835
38781 This makes it easier to change the formatting,
38782 should you or your publisher decide to do that later.
38784 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118961
38786 you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
38787 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to
38788 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118968
38791 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118970
38795 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119029
38796 formatting macro for index entries that refer to the page(s) where the indexed term is defined
38797 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119044
38798 definition of the indexed term,
38799 so that users can easily find definitions.
38801 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119044
38805 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119047
38808 the following in the preamble
38811 \begin_layout Standard
38817 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119052
38819 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127880
38825 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127881
38833 \begin_layout Standard
38835 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119063
38837 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127914
38838 add the custom formatting
38839 \begin_inset Flex Code
38842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38844 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127914
38852 to the respective entry settings dialog.
38857 \begin_layout Standard
38859 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119123
38865 \begin_layout Standard
38867 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119123
38868 in the index entry.
38869 \begin_inset Index idx
38874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38881 The advantage is that,
38883 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127963
38884 This will cause all page references that use this custom format to be printed in italics.
38887 f you change your mind later or if your publisher insists that definitions must not be italic but bold,
38888 you just need to change the macro in the preamble,
38889 not every single index entry.
38890 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118842
38894 \begin_layout Standard
38896 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118842
38897 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38902 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119415
38908 If you use the index processor
38914 makeindex or xindex
38917 \begin_inset space ~
38921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38923 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
38929 such custom macros do not work out of the box.
38934 requires you to define semantic elements in the xindy
38935 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38942 (style file) you use before they can be used.
38944 this would require to add the following line in the module file:
38947 \begin_layout Verbatim
38949 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119381
38951 (markup-locref :open "
38953 IndexDef{" :close "}" :attr "IndexDef")
38956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38958 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119392
38960 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38963 key "latexcompanion"
38978 \begin_layout Standard
38979 You can also change the layout
38980 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128294
38982 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128294
38988 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128049
38990 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128050
38994 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128052
38998 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128093
39002 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128098
39005 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128100
39008 get a bold font for all index entries.
39010 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128129
39013 it is better (and required for
39014 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128131
39017 more advanced tasks
39018 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128135
39022 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128139
39025 to set up a so-called
39028 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128153
39052 ) to determine the formatting;
39053 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119655
39058 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119672
39060 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119674
39066 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119661
39073 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119662
39081 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119665
39089 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119667
39094 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119778
39096 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39098 key "makeindex,xindex,xindy"
39104 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119778
39106 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39108 key "makeindex,xindy"
39117 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128459
39118 There are also some \SpecialChar LaTeX
39119 packages available that ease such formatting,
39121 \begin_inset Flex URL
39124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39126 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128460
39128 https://ctan.org/topic/index
39138 \begin_layout Subsection
39140 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119819
39141 Special Characters in Index Entries
39142 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39144 name "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
39151 \begin_layout Standard
39153 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128522
39154 As already mentioned above,
39155 some characters have a special meaning in index entries,
39158 \begin_inset Flex Code
39161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39163 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120139
39173 \begin_inset Flex Code
39176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39178 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120150
39188 \begin_inset Flex Code
39191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39193 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120158
39194 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39206 \begin_inset Flex Code
39209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39211 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120173
39220 If you use them literally,
39221 you might get surprising results or even a non-working index.
39223 you will not get the character itself.
39226 \begin_layout Standard
39228 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120574
39229 In order to use these characters in inset entries,
39231 \begin_inset Quotes els
39235 \begin_inset Quotes ers
39239 that is prepended by a character that tells the index processor to treat this character without its special meaning.
39241 the escape character is
39242 \begin_inset Flex Code
39245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39247 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120286
39248 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39258 (but this can be changed).
39260 \begin_inset Flex Code
39263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39265 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120326
39266 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39278 \begin_inset Flex Code
39281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39283 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120329
39284 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39296 \begin_inset Flex Code
39299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39301 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120332
39302 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39306 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
39318 \begin_inset Flex Code
39321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39323 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120335
39324 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39334 to get the special character you want.
39335 Note that the escape character,
39337 \begin_inset Flex Code
39340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39342 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120426
39343 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39358 be inserted in a TeX code box (see section
39359 \begin_inset space ~
39363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39365 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39375 \begin_layout Subsection
39377 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669398
39378 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39380 name "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
39384 Convenience Functions for Index Handling
39387 \begin_layout Standard
39389 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669552
39390 Indexing a document can be a tedious task,
39391 since you often have to insert the same index entry multiple times in order to refer to passages at different pages.
39392 This is not only time-consuming,
39393 but also error-prone;
39395 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39399 you have to remember how exactly an inset entry has been inserted to avoid redundant entries.
39401 provides some functions to ease the task.
39404 \begin_layout Standard
39406 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669398
39408 if you want to add an entry which you already used before,
39409 you can open the outliner via
39411 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39415 \begin_inset space ~
39419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39421 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
39431 section (it is convenient to have this open while indexing anyway),
39432 scroll to the entry in question (if you check
39437 it will be more easier),
39442 -click on the entry and select
39444 Insert Copy at Cursor Position
39446 from the context menu.
39447 This will do just what it says:
39448 it will insert a copy of that index inset at the position where the cursor is.
39451 \begin_layout Standard
39453 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669772
39456 also provides a semi-automated solution to index a word.
39457 If you right-click on an index entry inset,
39458 you can select from the context menu
39460 Index All Occurrences of this Word
39463 This will search the whole document (only single documents,
39464 not master and child documents) and insert a copy of this index inset after each occurrence of the word that precedes the inset.
39465 Note that casing of the word does not matter,
39466 but only full words in the same grammatical form are considered (so if
39470 is the word before the index entry,
39475 will be considered as well,
39481 Please take care to not overuse this function and to carefully check the result afterwards.
39483 a good index does not simply list all occurrences of a given word in a specific document (that is a concordance rather),
39484 but only relevant occurrences!
39485 So as convenient as this function might seem,
39486 it is suitable especially for particular cases.
39488 you will have more work with removing again falsely inserted entries than you would have with manually inserting them at the right place.
39491 \begin_layout Subsection
39493 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120869
39495 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120870
39499 \begin_inset Index idx
39504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39506 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39521 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39523 name "subsec:Index-Program"
39530 \begin_layout Standard
39532 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120909
39534 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120910
39541 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120657
39550 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120769
39558 for index generation;
39559 otherwise the program
39564 the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
39567 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120846
39572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39574 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120841
39580 no longer under development and has many pitfalls,
39581 notably that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
39582 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
39583 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
39585 if you are writing in another than the English language,
39600 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120851
39601 As a further option,
39602 you can select the rather new
39609 \begin_layout Itemize
39611 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121183
39617 no longer under development and has many pitfalls,
39618 notably that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
39619 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly (we have shown above,
39621 \begin_inset space ~
39625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39627 reference "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
39633 how to manually fix this sorting,
39634 but this is very tedious work).
39637 \begin_layout Itemize
39639 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121483
39640 The alternative program,
39646 is a newer and much more mighty alternative.
39647 It can sort most languages correctly,
39648 and it is also much more customizable in the output.
39654 is no longer actively maintained,
39655 and it has bugs that are most likely not being addressed anytime soon.
39661 is not always available out of the box and quite a challenge to install on some systems (particularly Windows).
39662 But if you have it available,
39663 it is almost always a better option than
39670 \begin_layout Itemize
39672 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128720
39679 is a quite new and actively developed index processor.
39680 It is included in modern \SpecialChar TeX
39681 distributions such as \SpecialChar TeX
39682 Live and Mik\SpecialChar TeX
39684 is pretty much customizable and supports many languages.
39685 The program is still in development,
39686 so not everything might work equally well than in the older processors.
39687 But the program is definitely worth a try,
39692 does not work or not satisfy your needs.
39697 \begin_layout Standard
39699 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120703
39701 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120703
39705 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128738
39707 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128739
39710 can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
39711 's preferences dialog,
39713 \begin_inset space ~
39717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39719 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
39725 The available options are listed and explained in
39726 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128757
39728 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39730 key "makeindex-man,xindex,xindy"
39736 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128757
39738 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39740 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
39750 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120810
39752 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120810
39756 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120813
39758 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120828
39761 alternative program
39762 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120828
39765 to generate the index.
39768 \begin_layout Standard
39769 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a given document,
39770 you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
39773 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39774 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39778 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
39781 \begin_layout Subsection
39783 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111129
39784 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39786 name "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
39795 \begin_layout Standard
39796 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
39798 you might need to set up a separate
39799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39806 next to the standard index.
39808 does not provide this possibility out of the box,
39809 but there are packages that add this feature.
39816 \begin_inset Index idx
39821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39824 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39838 package to generate multiple indexes.
39839 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
39844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39845 If yours does not ship it,
39846 consult the \SpecialChar TeX
39849 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39857 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
39859 but it also includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
39860 Please consult the package's manual for details.
39868 \begin_layout Standard
39869 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
39870 for the use of multiple indexes,
39873 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39874 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39877 and select the option
39879 Use multiple Indexes
39886 already contains the standard index
39887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39895 To add further indexes,
39896 add the name of the index (in the form that should also appear as a heading) to the
39900 input field and press the
39905 The new index now also appears in the list.
39907 you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
39908 label color to the new index.
39911 \begin_layout Standard
39912 Once the document changes have been applied,
39913 you can find the new index list in
39915 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39916 List/Contents/References
39922 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
39923 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index,
39924 but there are additional features:
39927 \begin_layout Itemize
39928 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry,
39929 right-clicking on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
39932 \begin_layout Itemize
39933 By right-clicking on an index,
39934 you can change its type.
39936 you can specify an index to be a
39942 the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
39944 if you use a book class,
39945 where the standard index heading is defined as a chapter,
39946 subindexes will be defined as sections and can thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
39949 \begin_layout Itemize
39954 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
39955 code in the name of the index.
39958 \begin_layout Section
39959 Nomenclature/Glossary
39960 \begin_inset Index idx
39965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39972 \begin_inset Index idx
39977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39979 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
39982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39996 name "sec:Nomenclature"
40003 \begin_layout Standard
40004 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so called nomenclature or glossary.
40007 \begin_layout Standard
40008 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries,
40009 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40015 \begin_inset Index idx
40020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40023 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40038 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
40041 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40048 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40052 \begin_layout Standard
40053 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry and then use the menu
40055 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40061 \begin_inset space ~
40066 or the toolbar button
40069 arg "nomencl-insert"
40074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40082 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40085 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
40088 \begin_layout Standard
40089 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
40090 The first is the term or
40094 that you wish to define.
40099 of the term or symbol.
40102 \begin_layout Standard
40103 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40112 To use \SpecialChar TeX
40113 code for nomenclature entries the option
40117 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
40125 \begin_layout Subsection
40126 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
40127 \begin_inset Index idx
40132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40134 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40151 \begin_layout Standard
40152 If you have symbols in formulas,
40153 you have to define them in the
40157 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40164 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40173 \begin_inset Newline newline
40181 \begin_inset Newline newline
40187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40194 character starts/ends the formula.
40195 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
40196 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with a backslash
40197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40207 For capital Greek letters,
40208 start the command also with a capital letter,
40218 \begin_layout Standard
40219 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40220 syntax is given in section
40221 \begin_inset space ~
40225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40227 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
40235 \begin_layout Standard
40239 \begin_inset space ~
40244 dialog to format the description text;
40245 you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
40247 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
40248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40252 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40259 in this document is:
40260 \begin_inset Newline newline
40265 dummy entry for the character
40270 \begin_inset Newline newline
40282 \begin_inset space ~
40292 font use the command
40323 \begin_layout Standard
40324 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
40325 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40329 \begin_inset space \space{}
40333 \begin_inset Newline newline
40349 \begin_inset Newline newline
40352 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
40353 This command will make the font of all symbols
40360 \begin_inset space ~
40368 \begin_layout Standard
40369 If the characters |
40370 \begin_inset space \space{}
40374 \begin_inset space \space{}
40378 \begin_inset space \space{}
40383 \begin_inset space \space{}
40387 \begin_inset space \space{}
40390 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
40391 code they need to be escaped by adding a
40392 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611122
40394 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611123
40397 character in front of them.
40398 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611807
40400 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40401 LatexCommand nomenclature
40402 symbol "%@, %|, %!, %\""
40403 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' %\"{}%\"{} '."
40409 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611114
40411 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40412 LatexCommand nomenclature
40413 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
40414 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
40424 \begin_layout Subsection
40425 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
40426 \begin_inset Index idx
40431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40433 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40450 \begin_layout Standard
40451 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40452 -code of the symbol definition.
40453 This leads to undesired results when you,
40455 have symbols in formulas.
40456 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
40459 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40460 LatexCommand nomenclature
40462 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
40470 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40474 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40475 LatexCommand nomenclature
40478 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
40484 They will be sorted by
40485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40511 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40514 will be sorted before the
40518 since the character
40519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40526 is considered in sorting.
40529 \begin_layout Standard
40530 To control the sort order,
40534 \begin_inset space ~
40539 field of the nomenclature dialog.
40540 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol definition.
40541 For the example given,
40546 in this field for the
40547 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40555 will be located before
40556 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40562 \begin_layout Standard
40563 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
40569 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40579 \begin_layout Subsection
40580 Nomenclature Options
40581 \begin_inset Index idx
40586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40588 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40603 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40605 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
40612 \begin_layout Standard
40617 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
40618 Here are some of its options;
40619 for more have a look at its documentation:
40622 \begin_layout Description
40623 refeq Appends the phrase
40624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40640 to every nomenclature entry,
40647 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
40650 \begin_layout Description
40651 refpage Appends the phrase
40652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40668 to every nomenclature entry,
40675 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
40678 \begin_layout Description
40679 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
40682 \begin_layout Standard
40683 To use one or more of the options,
40684 add them to the comma-separated document class options list in the
40686 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40690 In this document the options
40698 \begin_layout Standard
40699 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
40705 \begin_layout Standard
40706 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
40710 field in the nomenclature dialog:
40713 \begin_layout Description
40723 \begin_layout Description
40726 nomrefpage Like the
40733 \begin_layout Description
40736 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
40745 \begin_layout Description
40749 \begin_inset space ~
40755 \begin_inset space ~
40760 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
40763 \begin_layout Standard
40765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40772 are automatically translated for most document languages.
40774 add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
40778 \begin_layout Standard
40787 \begin_inset Newline newline
40793 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
40796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40797 \begin_inset space ~
40813 \begin_inset Newline newline
40820 pagedeclaration}[1]{
40821 \begin_inset Newline newline
40827 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
40830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40831 \begin_inset space ~
40849 \begin_layout Standard
40850 If the numbers should be hyperlinks,
40851 assure that you use
40854 \begin_inset space ~
40859 in the document settings under
40862 \begin_inset space ~
40870 \begin_layout Standard
40878 \begin_inset Newline newline
40882 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
40885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40886 \begin_inset space ~
40899 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
40901 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
40902 \begin_inset Newline newline
40909 pagedeclaration}[1]{
40910 \begin_inset Newline newline
40914 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
40917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40918 \begin_inset space ~
40931 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
40936 \begin_layout Subsection
40937 Printing the Nomenclature
40938 \begin_inset Index idx
40943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40945 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40962 \begin_layout Standard
40963 To print the nomenclature,
40966 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40967 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
40972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40983 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
40984 By right-clicking on it,
40985 the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
40986 You can choose between these settings:
40989 \begin_layout Description
40990 Default a space of 1
40991 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40997 \begin_layout Description
40999 \begin_inset space ~
41003 \begin_inset space ~
41006 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
41009 \begin_layout Description
41010 Custom custom space
41013 \begin_layout Standard
41014 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
41015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41023 If you are not happy with the name,
41024 you can change it by redefining the command
41032 in order to change the name to
41037 add the following line to the preamble:
41040 \begin_layout Standard
41053 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
41056 \begin_layout Standard
41057 When you are using another document language than English,
41059 \begin_inset Newline newline
41075 where *** is the name of the language used.
41078 \begin_layout Subsection
41079 Nomenclature Program
41080 \begin_inset Index idx
41085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41087 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41104 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
41111 \begin_layout Standard
41118 that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
41120 to generate the nomenclature.
41122 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
41128 \begin_inset space ~
41132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41134 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
41140 The available options are listed and explained in
41141 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
41143 key "nomencl,makeindex"
41151 \begin_layout Section
41153 \begin_inset Index idx
41158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41165 \begin_inset Index idx
41170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41172 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41187 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41189 name "sec:Branches"
41196 \begin_layout Standard
41197 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
41198 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the pupils to see the answers,
41199 but having questions and answers in the same document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
41202 \begin_layout Standard
41203 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
41204 allows you to put text into branches.
41205 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
41206 To create a branch,
41207 either select the menu
41209 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41210 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
41213 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
41215 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41223 where you can specify and change the name of the branch,
41224 its activation state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
41225 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
41226 and whether the name of the branch should be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active (see below for an example).
41228 the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch to the name of the other) and to add
41229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41237 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41241 \begin_inset space ~
41244 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents,
41245 without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
41248 \begin_layout Standard
41249 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
41250 These boxes are inserted via the menu
41252 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41255 where you can choose a branch.
41256 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking on them.
41259 \begin_layout Standard
41260 Here is an example,
41261 where only the question text appears,
41262 the answer branch is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
41265 \begin_layout Standard
41266 \begin_inset Branch Question
41270 \begin_layout Standard
41276 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
41284 \begin_layout Standard
41285 \begin_inset Branch Answer
41289 \begin_layout Standard
41295 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
41303 \begin_layout Standard
41310 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41311 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41315 the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
41316 Consider for example a file
41317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41324 which has the above branches.
41326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41334 the PDF export file would be called
41335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41358 branch were inactive,
41360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41397 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
41398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41401 if both branches were active.
41402 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
41403 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41409 \begin_layout Standard
41411 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147989
41412 It is also possible to
41413 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147965
41417 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147967
41419 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147977
41423 whose content is output just in case the branch is
41428 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284375
41429 (they are marked with ~ before the name)
41433 \change_deleted 244031559 1635284383
41435 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284385
41438 make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
41439 To control whether a particular inset is inverted,
41440 right-click on the inset button and choose
41443 \begin_inset space ~
41451 \begin_layout Standard
41452 \begin_inset Branch Answer
41456 \begin_layout Standard
41463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41470 branch is deactivated.
41476 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41482 \begin_layout Standard
41483 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
41484 like inside equations,
41485 you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
41486 definitions for each branch.
41487 For example you can define for the question branch
41491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41492 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41495 \begin_inset space ~
41499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41501 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
41514 \begin_layout Standard
41524 \begin_layout Standard
41534 \begin_layout Standard
41535 and for the answer branch
41538 \begin_layout Standard
41548 \begin_layout Standard
41558 \begin_layout Standard
41559 \begin_inset Branch Question
41563 \begin_layout Standard
41567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41595 \begin_layout Standard
41596 \begin_inset Branch Answer
41600 \begin_layout Standard
41604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41632 \begin_layout Standard
41633 Now it is possible to use the
41637 question{\SpecialChar ldots
41644 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
41647 commands to obtain conditional output.
41648 Here is an example formula where only the
41655 \begin_inset Formula
41657 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
41665 \begin_layout Standard
41667 the same effect can be achieved using math macros,
41675 \begin_layout Standard
41676 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout files (e.
41677 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41681 \begin_inset space \space{}
41684 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
41686 For this advanced usage,
41694 Flex insets and InsetLayout
41697 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148012
41701 \begin_layout Standard
41703 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41705 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813809
41707 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813809
41709 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41711 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813823
41713 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813823
41715 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41717 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813812
41719 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41721 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813845
41722 to keep all branches of a given name in
41723 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41725 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813847
41727 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41729 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813855
41731 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813873
41732 activation branch status with
41733 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41735 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813886
41738 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813893
41739 of all branch insets in the document we provide
41740 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813893
41743 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41747 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813903
41752 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813949
41753 that sets the open/close state to all branches of the same name from the branch currently at cursor.
41754 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813904
41757 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41759 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813911
41761 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813959
41763 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41765 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813962
41767 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41768 keyboard shortcut or add
41769 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813966
41771 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813966
41773 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41775 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813971
41777 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41778 user-defined context menu
41779 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813975
41781 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813976
41783 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41785 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813978
41787 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41793 \begin_layout Section
41795 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41797 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
41802 \begin_inset Index idx
41807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41816 \begin_layout Standard
41818 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655914
41823 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41824 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41828 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655917
41831 allows you to set up
41832 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651900
41834 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651929
41838 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651937
41840 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651944
41844 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655939
41848 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651948
41853 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651614
41855 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651616
41859 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651959
41861 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651961
41864 are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41866 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651813
41868 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651814
41876 \begin_inset Index idx
41881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41884 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41899 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653717
41900 which you need to enable by clicking
41902 Use Hyperref Support
41904 in order to set the PDF properties (if the package is already loaded by your document class or another package,
41905 the checkbox you need to click is labeled
41907 Customize Hyperref Options
41910 Among other things,
41912 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651887
41916 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653821
41918 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653851
41922 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653826
41926 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653859
41929 cross-references in the
41930 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653786
41934 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653751
41936 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653751
41940 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
41941 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653878
41945 table of contents entry or on a reference to
41946 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653918
41947 open a website or to
41949 move to the cross-referenced part of the document.
41951 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653971
41953 you can set PDF metadata (such as document author and title),
41954 or determine how the PDF is being opened by the reader program.
41959 \begin_layout Standard
41960 The header information in the dialog tab
41964 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
41965 Many programs are able to extract this information,
41968 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656745
41971 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
41972 This is very useful to sort,
41973 classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
41977 \begin_inset space ~
41981 \begin_inset space ~
41988 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654039
41991 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654041
41994 tries to extract the header information from your document title and author entries.
41998 \begin_inset space ~
42002 \begin_inset space ~
42006 \begin_inset space ~
42011 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode,
42012 which is useful for presentations.
42015 \begin_layout Standard
42017 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654066
42019 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654066
42027 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654103
42028 you can customize the
42029 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654105
42031 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654109
42035 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654087
42037 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654087
42041 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654147
42043 and you can specify
42046 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654275
42048 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654283
42049 will look and if links for
42051 bibliographical backreferences are created
42052 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654335
42058 are links inserted at the end of bibliographic entries pointing to either sections,
42059 pages or slides on which these entries are being cited
42065 \begin_inset space ~
42069 \begin_inset space ~
42073 \begin_inset space ~
42078 option allows long links to be split;
42082 \begin_inset space ~
42086 \begin_inset space ~
42090 \begin_inset space ~
42098 \begin_inset space ~
42103 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
42107 \begin_inset space ~
42112 colors the different links.
42113 The default colors are:
42116 \begin_layout Labeling
42117 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
42122 for hyperlinks and URLs
42125 \begin_layout Labeling
42126 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
42134 \begin_layout Labeling
42135 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
42143 \begin_layout Standard
42144 but you can change these in the
42145 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651692
42147 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651692
42153 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656056
42155 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656056
42162 in this document they were changed with the
42163 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651709
42167 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651730
42177 \begin_layout Quote
42186 \begin_layout Standard
42188 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654422
42194 the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different entries,
42196 depending on the option selected,
42197 the number of the section,
42198 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
42203 \begin_layout Standard
42208 you can specify if PDF
42209 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654456
42211 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654456
42215 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654511
42216 (shown as a collapsible outline in the PDF reader)
42218 should be created for every section of your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
42219 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections or not.
42221 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654607
42223 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654609
42227 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654594
42233 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654550
42235 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654551
42237 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654802
42240 you can instruct the PDF reader to uncollapse the outliner when opening the PDF.
42248 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654838
42249 determines up to which level this uncollapsing is done.
42250 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654687
42251 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks when opening the PDF.
42255 \begin_inset space ~
42258 2 will display all sections and subsections,
42260 \begin_inset space ~
42263 1 will only display the sections
42264 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654724
42265 (collapsing the rest)
42268 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656154
42272 \begin_layout Standard
42274 \change_inserted -712698321 1644657105
42279 dialog tab you can insert hyperref options which are not among the ones described above as a comma-separated list (please refer to the hyperref manual
42280 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42287 for a full list and documentation of possible options).
42288 Note that these options will be passed to hyperref via
42289 \begin_inset Flex Code
42292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42294 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656321
42305 not via the package options.
42306 This will exclude some options that can only be specified via the latter.
42307 If you need to use one of those options,
42308 you can set them by adding
42311 \begin_layout Quote
42313 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656496
42316 PackageOptions hyperref option1,option
42317 \change_deleted 274215730 1652836969
42319 \change_inserted 274215730 1652836970
42325 \begin_layout Standard
42327 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656431
42330 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42331 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42334 (but only if hyperref is not loaded by your document class).
42339 \begin_layout Standard
42341 \change_inserted -712698321 1644744249
42346 input widget allows you to insert PDF properties that are independent of the hyperref package and rely on some (rather new) \SpecialChar LaTeX
42348 This requires \SpecialChar LaTeX
42349 version 06/2022 at least (with earlier versions,
42350 input is simply ignored).
42351 The widget expects a comma-separated list of key-value options (such as
42357 At the point of writing this,
42358 the list of options is still rather small and not very well documented (look for a file called
42360 documentmetadata-support.pdf
42363 but it is expected that in the future,
42364 rather fundamental PDF properties (such as structure tagging for accessibility reasons and different PDF standards such as PDF/A) can be set this way.
42367 \begin_layout Standard
42369 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656978
42370 PDF properties are also used in this document.
42371 When you look in its document settings,
42372 you can see that some additional
42377 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
42378 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42390 \begin_layout Section
42392 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42394 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42396 name "sec:TeX-Code"
42403 \begin_layout Subsection
42406 \begin_inset Index idx
42411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42419 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42421 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
42428 \begin_layout Standard
42429 As \SpecialChar LyX
42430 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
42432 it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
42433 commands and constructs,
42436 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
42437 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
42438 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
42439 -package for every problem,
42440 though \SpecialChar LyX
42441 cannot support all packages and their commands.
42444 \begin_layout Standard
42446 you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
42447 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
42448 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
42451 Code box is created by the menu
42453 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42455 \begin_inset space ~
42460 or by the toolbar button
42473 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on it and selecting
42480 \begin_layout Standard
42481 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
42483 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
42486 if you want to draw a frame around a word
42490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42491 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
42496 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42504 you can write the command part
42510 in a \SpecialChar TeX
42511 Code box before the word and the closing brace
42515 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
42516 Code box behind the word.
42517 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
42518 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the following example:
42521 \begin_layout Standard
42522 \begin_inset Graphics
42523 filename clipart/ERT.png
42531 \begin_layout Standard
42535 \begin_layout Standard
42536 This is a line with a
42540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42563 \begin_layout Standard
42564 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42573 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
42574 -commands without parameters,
42575 you have to insert a space to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
42576 know that the command is finished.
42584 \begin_layout Subsection
42585 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42587 \begin_inset Argument 1
42590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42591 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
42598 \begin_inset Index idx
42603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42613 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
42620 \begin_layout Standard
42621 When you write larger documents or books,
42622 you will need to know something about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42623 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
42624 uses in the background.
42625 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
42626 is based on commands,
42628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42636 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at any time if you know the right commands.
42638 imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline is the end of the day.
42639 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have all caption labels bold.
42640 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels in your manual.
42641 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one day.
42644 \begin_layout Standard
42645 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
42647 As mentioned above,
42648 for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
42650 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42653 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42663 \begin_layout Standard
42664 As result you find that the package
42669 \begin_inset Index idx
42674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42677 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42693 you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
42695 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42698 \SpecialChar menuseparator
42702 \begin_inset space ~
42710 \begin_layout Standard
42715 usepackage[options]{package name}
42718 \begin_layout Standard
42719 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
42720 commands begin with a backslash,
42721 the command argument is set within two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
42722 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
42725 \begin_layout Standard
42726 In your case the package name is
42731 After a look in the documentation of the package,
42732 you know that the option
42736 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
42737 So you add the command
42740 \begin_layout Standard
42745 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
42748 \begin_layout Standard
42749 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
42753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42754 For more commands provided by the
42759 have a look at its documentation,
42761 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42776 \begin_layout Standard
42777 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems like your case.
42778 For example if you use a
42783 you don't need the package
42788 you can instead write
42791 \begin_layout Standard
42796 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
42801 \begin_layout Standard
42802 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
42803 So if you plan to write a large document,
42804 you should have a look at the documentation of the document class you want to use.
42811 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
42814 \begin_layout Standard
42815 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document,
42816 while commands in the text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command argument.
42817 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
42819 use the \SpecialChar TeX
42820 Code box as described in the previous section.
42823 \begin_layout Standard
42824 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
42826 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42828 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42830 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
42838 \begin_layout Standard
42839 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
42845 \begin_layout Standard
42849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42859 \begin_inset Note Note
42862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42863 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
42871 \begin_layout Left Header
42872 \begin_inset Argument 1
42875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42895 \begin_inset Note Note
42898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42899 defines the header line as described below
42907 \begin_layout Center Header
42908 \begin_inset Argument 1
42911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42920 \begin_layout Right Header
42921 \begin_inset Argument 1
42924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42945 \begin_layout Left Footer
42946 \begin_inset Argument 1
42949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42970 \begin_layout Center Footer
42971 \begin_inset Argument 1
42974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42986 \begin_inset Newline newline
42990 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
42996 \begin_layout Right Footer
42997 \begin_inset Argument 1
43000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43022 \begin_layout Section
43023 Customized Page Headers and Footers
43024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43026 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
43031 \begin_inset Index idx
43036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43038 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43053 \begin_inset Index idx
43058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43067 \begin_layout Standard
43068 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document,
43069 you need to set the
43072 \begin_inset space ~
43083 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43089 \begin_inset space ~
43095 As a second step add in the menu
43097 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43098 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43107 Custom Header/Footerlines
43110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43114 This module offers the following 6
43115 \begin_inset space ~
43121 \begin_layout Description
43123 \begin_inset space ~
43127 \begin_inset space ~
43131 \begin_inset space ~
43135 \begin_inset space ~
43139 \begin_inset space ~
43145 \begin_layout Description
43147 \begin_inset space ~
43151 \begin_inset space ~
43155 \begin_inset space ~
43159 \begin_inset space ~
43163 \begin_inset space ~
43169 \begin_layout Standard
43170 for the different positions in the header/footer.
43171 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
43174 \begin_layout Standard
43176 headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
43177 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
43179 \begin_inset space ~
43183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43185 reference "fig:Page-layout"
43190 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
43193 \begin_layout Standard
43194 \begin_inset Float figure
43201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43204 \begin_inset Tabular
43205 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
43206 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
43207 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
43208 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
43209 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
43211 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
43223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43229 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43240 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43258 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43269 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
43272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43273 The normal text on the page goes here.
43274 The running header is above the text,
43275 and the footer is below (including footnotes).
43276 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number,
43277 title of the chapter,
43278 company logo but you can use almost anything,
43284 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43293 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43304 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43322 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43333 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
43345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43351 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43369 \begin_inset Caption Standard
43371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43372 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43374 name "fig:Page-layout"
43378 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
43391 \begin_layout Standard
43392 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43401 some document classes implement their own customized page headers and footers if
43404 \begin_inset space ~
43409 is set to “Default”.
43410 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers and footers.
43418 \begin_layout Subsection
43422 \begin_layout Standard
43423 To define your header line,
43424 add all three header environments.
43425 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages,
43426 the things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
43427 For single-sided documents,
43428 the optional arguments will not be used and can be omitted.
43429 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty,
43430 nothing appears in the output.
43431 Defining the footer line works similarly.
43434 \begin_layout Standard
43435 For the definition,
43436 you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
43437 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
43440 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43442 \begin_inset space ~
43450 \begin_layout Description
43453 thepage prints the current page number
43456 \begin_layout Description
43459 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
43462 \begin_layout Description
43465 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
43468 \begin_layout Description
43471 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
43472 If the document has chapters,
43473 it prints the current chapter number and title instead.
43475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43479 \begin_inset Quotes prd
43482 because it usually goes in a left header.
43485 \begin_layout Description
43488 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
43489 If the document has chapters,
43490 it prints the current section number and title instead.
43491 It is normally used in the right header.
43494 \begin_layout Subsection
43495 Default header/footer
43498 \begin_layout Standard
43499 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
43500 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center footer has the page number.
43501 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer,
43502 include the relevant header/footer style in your document,
43503 but leave it blank.
43505 if you do not want a page number in the footer,
43509 \begin_inset space ~
43517 \begin_layout Subsection
43521 \begin_layout Standard
43522 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
43523 Some pages are different.
43524 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own,
43525 and so does any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
43526 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers,
43527 but that is normal.
43528 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
43531 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43532 Header and footer decoration line
43535 \begin_layout Standard
43538 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43541 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
43542 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
43554 in the following way:
43557 \begin_layout Standard
43564 headrulewidth}{thickness}
43567 \begin_layout Standard
43568 where thickness is a size in standard units like
43581 If you don't want a line,
43582 set the thickness to 0
43583 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43589 \begin_layout Standard
43590 The lines can also be colored,
43591 but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43593 If you really need this,
43594 have a look at the Internet or in section
43595 \begin_inset space ~
43599 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43609 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43610 Several header/footer lines
43613 \begin_layout Standard
43614 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer,
43615 you can do this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
43617 the default height of the header/footer is only the height of one text line.
43618 To expand the height,
43619 redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43634 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43635 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43637 \begin_inset space ~
43645 \begin_layout Standard
43652 headheight}{height}
43655 \begin_layout Standard
43660 is a size in standard units (e.
43661 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43665 \begin_inset space \space{}
43673 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height,
43674 define your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
43675 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43676 logfile with the menu
43678 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43680 \begin_inset space ~
43688 \begin_inset space ~
43693 to see if you can find a warning about the package
43698 \begin_inset Index idx
43703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43706 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43721 If there is such a warning,
43722 it contains the space that you need at least for your header/footer.
43725 \begin_layout Subsection
43729 \begin_layout Standard
43730 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
43731 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
43732 This example consists of the following definition:
43735 \begin_layout Description
43737 \begin_inset space ~
43747 empty optional argument
43750 \begin_layout Description
43752 \begin_inset space ~
43756 empty optional argument
43759 \begin_layout Description
43761 \begin_inset space ~
43771 in the optional argument
43774 \begin_layout Description
43776 \begin_inset space ~
43786 in the optional argument
43789 \begin_layout Description
43791 \begin_inset space ~
43805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43809 \begin_inset Newline newline
43813 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
43817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43820 in the optional argument
43823 \begin_layout Description
43825 \begin_inset space ~
43835 empty optional argument
43838 \begin_layout Description
43841 headrulewidth set to 2
43842 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43848 \begin_layout Standard
43849 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers,
43851 For more specialized features,
43854 see the manual of the
43860 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43870 \begin_layout Standard
43871 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
43877 \begin_layout Standard
43881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43885 pagestyle{headings}
43891 \begin_inset Note Note
43894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43895 switches back to page style with the default headings
43903 \begin_layout Section
43904 Previewing Snippets of your Document
43905 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43907 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43912 \begin_inset Index idx
43917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43924 \begin_inset Index idx
43929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43931 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43948 \begin_layout Standard
43950 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
43953 \begin_layout Subsection
43957 \begin_layout Standard
43958 To get previews working,
43959 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43965 \begin_inset Index idx
43970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43973 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43987 (on some systems named simply
43992 If it is not already installed,
43993 you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
43996 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44003 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44005 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
44014 for \SpecialChar LyX
44015 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44016 -package are automatically installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
44020 \begin_layout Subsection
44024 \begin_layout Standard
44025 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
44026 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
44028 activate the option
44031 \begin_inset space ~
44038 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44044 \begin_inset space ~
44048 \begin_inset space ~
44051 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
44058 \begin_inset space ~
44071 \begin_inset space ~
44076 is the multiplication factor for the size.
44079 \begin_layout Standard
44080 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
44085 \begin_inset space ~
44093 \begin_inset space ~
44101 \begin_layout Standard
44102 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
44103 and when you finish editing an inset.
44106 \begin_layout Standard
44107 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44116 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately generated by activating the option
44119 \begin_inset space ~
44125 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
44133 \begin_layout Subsection
44134 Selected document parts
44137 \begin_layout Standard
44138 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
44139 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
44140 cannot render like rotated parts or things that are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
44143 insert a preview inset via the menu
44145 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44149 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
44150 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
44151 If you click on the preview,
44152 you can edit the previewed stuff.
44155 \begin_layout Standard
44157 To create rotated boxes,
44158 you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44165 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
44170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44177 is explained in section
44179 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
44184 \begin_inset space ~
44194 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
44195 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
44196 the final rotated boxes,
44197 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
44198 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated boxes into it.
44199 Here is the result:
44202 \begin_layout Standard
44203 \begin_inset Preview
44205 \begin_layout Standard
44210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44214 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
44220 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
44230 height_special "totalheight"
44235 backgroundcolor "none"
44238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44263 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
44269 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
44276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44291 \begin_layout Standard
44292 Previewing works also for colors.
44293 In this example a special framed,
44294 colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44312 is explained in section
44319 \begin_inset space ~
44332 \begin_layout Standard
44333 \begin_inset Preview
44335 \begin_layout Standard
44339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44358 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
44363 This is text within a colored,
44368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44383 \begin_layout Standard
44384 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
44390 \begin_layout Standard
44391 If \SpecialChar LyX
44392 does not show a preview,
44393 make sure that you enabled previews as described above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
44394 Code in the preview inset is valid and that you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44395 packages in your document preamble that are required by the \SpecialChar TeX
44397 If \SpecialChar LyX
44398 cannot create a preview,
44399 you will in most cases also not be able to view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
44401 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
44402 Code and don't know if it is correct,
44403 the preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
44406 \begin_layout Subsection
44411 \begin_layout Standard
44412 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44413 source of the whole document or parts of it.
44416 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44418 \begin_inset space ~
44423 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44425 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor currently sits.
44426 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
44428 then only this selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
44429 To view the whole document as source,
44430 enable the corresponding option in the source view window.
44436 you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
44438 but note that if you have several documents open,
44439 this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
44441 not just the one which is open at the time.
44444 \begin_layout Section
44445 Advanced Find and Replace
44446 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44448 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
44453 \begin_inset Index idx
44458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44465 \begin_inset Index idx
44470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44479 \begin_layout Subsection
44483 \begin_layout Standard
44484 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
44485 allows for searching of complex,
44486 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
44488 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
44489 The key-features are:
44492 \begin_layout Itemize
44493 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed,
44494 where the latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way;
44495 not only entire mathematical formulas are found,
44496 but also parts occurring within more complex formulas
44499 \begin_layout Itemize
44500 Search may be format-insensitive,
44501 so that the searched text is found in any context/style (standard text,
44504 and even mathematics),
44505 or it may be format-sensitive,
44508 a word entered with a section heading will only be found within section headings
44511 \begin_layout Itemize
44512 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only;
44513 this is useful for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text outside of mathematics environments
44516 \begin_layout Itemize
44517 Search may be widened to a specific
44523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44527 \begin_inset space ~
44530 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
44531 all the open files,
44532 or all the manuals available from the
44539 \begin_layout Itemize
44540 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization,
44541 so that the replaced text capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
44542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44546 \begin_inset space ~
44551 first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
44554 \begin_layout Subsection
44558 \begin_layout Standard
44559 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
44561 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44574 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
44577 ) or the toolbar button
44580 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
44586 Advanced Find and Replace
44591 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44595 \begin_layout Standard
44601 mini-editor a simple word,
44602 and search for occurrences of it by clicking on the
44605 \begin_inset space ~
44610 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
44613 arg "paragraph-break"
44617 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode,
44619 bold or normal face,
44620 and in both in section titles and in standard text.
44624 arg "paragraph-break"
44627 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
44631 searches backwards.
44634 \begin_layout Standard
44638 \begin_inset space ~
44643 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
44651 \begin_inset space ~
44656 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
44659 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44660 Searching for mathematics
44663 \begin_layout Standard
44664 Mathematical formulas,
44666 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
44669 or something more complex like
44670 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
44674 may be searched for by typing them in the
44679 When searching for a formula,
44680 it is found both when it is alone and when it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
44681 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
44682 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
44688 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44692 \begin_layout Standard
44693 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
44694 This is done by switching to the
44698 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
44711 \begin_layout Itemize
44712 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word occurring in emphasized or boldface.
44715 \begin_layout Itemize
44716 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective instances with the same face only,
44717 and within the same text style only.
44720 \begin_layout Itemize
44721 a normal word in a section heading,
44722 and searching for it,
44723 would find occurrences of it only within section headings.
44725 if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face,
44726 in addition to a section style,
44727 then it is found only when occurring with the same style.
44730 \begin_layout Itemize
44731 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
44734 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44738 \begin_layout Standard
44739 The entries made in the
44743 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
44746 \begin_inset space ~
44752 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it,
44757 button or alternatively press
44760 arg "paragraph-break"
44767 while the cursor is in the
44770 \begin_inset space ~
44778 \begin_layout Standard
44779 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
44781 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention two):
44784 \begin_layout Itemize
44785 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the same word,
44786 for example replacing occurrences of a name like
44787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44794 with its typewriter version
44795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44809 \begin_layout Itemize
44810 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols,
44811 for example replacing occurrences of
44812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44816 \begin_inset Formula $R$
44820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44828 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
44832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44835 (you may want to enable the
44838 \begin_inset space ~
44846 \begin_inset space ~
44851 options and disable the
44860 in order to avoid replacing all
44861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44868 letters occurring in normal text),
44870 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
44874 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
44879 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
44883 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
44889 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44893 \begin_layout Standard
44894 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
44898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44899 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
44901 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44903 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
44913 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into the
44918 This is done with the context menu
44920 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44921 Insert Regular Expression
44923 while the cursor is in the
44928 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular expression matching rules
44932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44933 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
44936 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44940 \begin_inset space ~
44943 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
44945 no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to match expressions.
44951 while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the same text in the document.
44952 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
44953 Examples of using such a feature may be:
44956 \begin_layout Enumerate
44957 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator:
44963 editor the fraction
44964 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
44968 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
44971 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all fractions with the given denominator.
44974 \begin_layout Enumerate
44975 Searching for all text with a given style:
44978 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390777
44982 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814407
44986 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390710
44987 Adhere to search string formatting of
44988 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814409
44990 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390724
44996 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390961
44998 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814412
45000 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390961
45004 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814414
45008 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390961
45010 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814534
45012 \change_inserted -712698321 1686814534
45016 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814548
45022 \change_inserted -712698321 1686814554
45023 in this section pressed
45029 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
45034 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face,
45035 finds all emphasized or bold face text respectively.
45038 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
45041 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
45042 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
45044 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391772
45045 The meaning of the specific style options (if checked) is as follows:
45049 \begin_layout Description
45051 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391862
45052 Language Allows searching for text in specific language
45053 \change_inserted -712698321 1686814961
45055 as with the other options,
45056 the setting of the search string)
45057 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391862
45061 \begin_layout Description
45063 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392163
45065 \begin_inset space ~
45068 color colored text like cyan,
45073 \begin_layout Description
45075 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392038
45077 \begin_inset space ~
45085 \begin_layout Description
45087 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392204
45089 \begin_inset space ~
45096 \begin_layout Description
45098 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392249
45100 \begin_inset space ~
45109 \begin_layout Description
45111 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392299
45113 \begin_inset space ~
45122 \begin_layout Description
45124 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392343
45125 Emph/noun Semantic Markup:
45130 \begin_layout Description
45132 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392414
45139 \begin_layout Description
45141 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392503
45142 Strike-through Single,
45146 \begin_layout Description
45148 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392776
45149 Deletion searches also in deleted parts (in case of 'Track Changes' enabled)
45152 \begin_layout Description
45154 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392891
45156 \begin_inset space ~
45169 \begin_layout Standard
45171 references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
45172 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
45173 \begin_inset Formula $()$
45177 and referring back to them through
45178 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
45183 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
45189 try searching with the regexp
45190 \begin_inset Newline newline
45194 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393222
45206 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651393089
45207 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
45212 \begin_inset Newline newline
45215 in order to find word repetitions,
45219 \begin_layout Standard
45220 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet)
45221 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393403
45227 \begin_layout Standard
45228 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45237 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp,
45238 and when occurring in multiple different regexps,
45239 where the numbering of back-referenced sub-expressions is absolute.
45241 \begin_inset space ~
45245 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
45248 always refers to the first occurrence of
45249 \begin_inset Formula $()$
45252 in all entered regexps.
45260 \begin_layout Section
45262 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45264 name "sec:Spellchecking"
45269 \begin_inset Index idx
45274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45283 \begin_layout Standard
45285 has a built-in spell checker.
45288 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45296 key or the toolbar button
45299 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
45302 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the beginning of the currently selected text.
45303 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found,
45304 allowing you to edit and replace it in a second line.
45305 Whenever an unknown word is found,
45306 the word is highlighted and the text scrolled so that it is visible.
45307 In the spellchecker sidebar,
45308 there is a box showing suggestions for a correction,
45309 if any could be found.
45310 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
45315 double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
45316 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
45319 \begin_layout Standard
45321 the dictionary file used is determined by the document language that is set in the
45323 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45327 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing a different one at the top of the dialog.
45329 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
45330 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
45333 \begin_inset space ~
45341 arg "dialog-show character"
45344 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
45346 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
45349 \begin_layout Standard
45350 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
45351 can be downloaded from here:
45352 \begin_inset Newline newline
45356 \begin_inset Flex URL
45359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45361 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069762
45363 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
45364 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069762
45365 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/dicts/
45373 \begin_inset Newline newline
45377 \change_deleted 244031559 1606070170
45379 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070176
45380 You should download
45383 \begin_inset space ~
45386 files for each language
45387 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070127
45392 link at the end of the opened webpage)
45395 To install a dictionary on Windows,
45397 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069925
45401 \begin_inset space ~
45404 files into \SpecialChar LyX
45405 's installation subfolder
45413 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
45415 \begin_inset Newline newline
45418 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
45419 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
45420 but in most cases these are
45440 is the language code.
45443 \begin_layout Subsection
45447 \begin_layout Standard
45450 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45451 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45453 \begin_inset space ~
45456 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45459 you can set the following things:
45462 \begin_layout Description
45464 \begin_inset space ~
45467 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
45468 should use for spell checking.
45469 Depending on your platform,
45480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45481 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
45482 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
45497 \begin_inset space ~
45500 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
45503 \begin_layout Description
45505 \begin_inset space ~
45508 language If this field is not empty,
45510 will always use the given language for the spell checking,
45511 no matter what the document language is.
45514 \begin_layout Description
45516 \begin_inset space ~
45519 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker should escape,
45521 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45525 \begin_inset space \space{}
45529 This should normally not be needed.
45532 \begin_layout Description
45534 \begin_inset space ~
45538 \begin_inset space ~
45541 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words like
45542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45552 \begin_layout Description
45554 \begin_inset space ~
45557 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
45558 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
45559 By right-clicking on an underlined word,
45560 suggestions from the spellchecker appear in a context menu.
45561 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested word.
45564 \begin_layout Description
45566 \begin_inset space ~
45570 \begin_inset space ~
45574 \begin_inset space ~
45577 comments If enabled,
45578 the spelling of non-printed document content is checked as well.
45581 \begin_layout Section
45583 \begin_inset Index idx
45588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45595 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45597 name "sec:Thesaurus"
45604 \begin_layout Standard
45606 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
45607 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice,
45608 OpenOffice and Firefox (namely the
45616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45617 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45619 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
45630 which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
45634 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
45635 which are available for many languages.
45638 \begin_layout Standard
45639 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for the use with \SpecialChar LyX
45643 \begin_layout Subsection
45644 Setting up the thesaurus
45647 \begin_layout Standard
45656 thesauri consist of two files per language:
45657 A file with the suffix
45661 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
45666 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language (e.
45667 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45671 \begin_inset space ~
45680 the US English files are named:
45683 \begin_layout Itemize
45687 \begin_layout Itemize
45691 \begin_layout Standard
45700 and its thesaurus installed,
45701 these files should be already on your system and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
45704 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45705 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45706 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
45708 \begin_inset space ~
45713 ) to the path where they are installed.
45717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45719 depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionaries,
45720 typical locations are
45727 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
45732 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
45737 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
45741 dictionaries are to be found at
45747 LibreOffice-<Version>
45755 the default location is
45757 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
45758 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
45759 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
45760 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
45761 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
45762 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
45771 you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation during the \SpecialChar LyX
45772 installation process,
45773 which will then be installed in the correct place right away.
45776 \begin_layout Standard
45777 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
45779 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069849
45781 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069853
45784 thesaurus dictionaries,
45785 you can download them from here:
45786 \begin_inset Newline newline
45790 \begin_inset Flex URL
45793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45795 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069803
45797 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
45798 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069803
45799 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
45809 \begin_layout Standard
45810 To install a new dictionary,
45811 download the two files for this dictionary into the thesaurus path (which is set in
45813 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45814 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45815 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
45817 \begin_inset space ~
45822 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
45824 If this path is not defined yet,
45825 you can use a dictionary of your choice and point \SpecialChar LyX
45829 \begin_layout Standard
45831 you can also install new dictionaries via
45833 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
45838 via your package manager (look for
45844 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
45848 make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
45849 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
45851 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45857 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45858 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45859 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
45861 \begin_inset space ~
45866 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
45869 \begin_layout Subsection
45870 Using the thesaurus
45873 \begin_layout Standard
45874 To start the thesaurus,
45877 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45880 or the toolbar button
45883 arg "thesaurus-entry"
45886 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is selected.
45887 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as a replacement.
45888 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
45890 for some languages (such as English),
45891 the thesaurus does not only show equivalent words (synonyms),
45892 but also generic terms (such as
45901 related terms (such as
45904 \begin_inset space ~
45917 \begin_inset space ~
45927 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
45937 related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
45940 \begin_layout Standard
45941 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor,
45942 but you can also switch it in the dialog,
45943 as you can enter new words to look up directly there.
45946 \begin_layout Standard
45947 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in the dictionary,
45953 and you have to use the so called lemma form,
45955 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45959 \begin_inset space \space{}
45962 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages:
45963 first person singular indicative active for nouns,
45964 infinitive for verbs).
45966 looking up the word form
45971 while results are shown for the word form
45976 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
45977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45981 \begin_inset space \space{}
45993 then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in the dialog,
45994 and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only the highlighted part will be replaced;
45995 thus the ending remains).
45998 \begin_layout Section
46000 \begin_inset Index idx
46005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46012 \begin_inset Index idx
46017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46019 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46034 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46036 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
46043 \begin_layout Standard
46044 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
46045 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
46046 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
46048 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46050 \begin_inset space ~
46053 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46055 \begin_inset space ~
46063 \begin_layout Standard
46064 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
46079 The color depends on the author that made the change.
46080 You can change the color in
46082 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46083 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46085 \begin_inset space ~
46089 \begin_inset space ~
46094 \SpecialChar menuseparator
46100 \begin_inset Index idx
46105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46107 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46121 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
46122 's status bar when the cursor is in changed text.
46123 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
46126 arg "changes-merge"
46132 \begin_layout Standard
46133 When change tracking is activated,
46134 you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
46136 \begin_inset Index idx
46141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46143 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46160 \begin_layout Standard
46161 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46167 \begin_layout Standard
46168 \begin_inset Graphics
46169 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
46177 \begin_layout Standard
46178 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46184 \begin_layout Standard
46185 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
46188 \begin_layout Standard
46189 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46195 \begin_layout Standard
46196 \begin_inset Tabular
46197 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
46198 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
46199 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46200 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46201 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46210 arg "changes-track"
46218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46224 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46226 \begin_inset space ~
46229 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46231 \begin_inset space ~
46240 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46249 arg "changes-output"
46257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46263 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46265 \begin_inset space ~
46268 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46270 \begin_inset space ~
46274 \begin_inset space ~
46278 \begin_inset space ~
46287 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46308 Jumps to the next change
46314 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46323 arg "change-accept"
46331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46337 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46339 \begin_inset space ~
46342 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46344 \begin_inset space ~
46353 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46362 arg "change-reject"
46370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46376 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46378 \begin_inset space ~
46381 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46383 \begin_inset space ~
46392 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46401 arg "changes-merge"
46409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46415 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46417 \begin_inset space ~
46420 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46422 \begin_inset space ~
46431 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46440 arg "all-changes-accept"
46448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46454 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46456 \begin_inset space ~
46459 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46461 \begin_inset space ~
46465 \begin_inset space ~
46474 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46483 arg "all-changes-reject"
46491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46497 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46499 \begin_inset space ~
46502 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46504 \begin_inset space ~
46508 \begin_inset space ~
46517 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46540 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46541 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
46543 \begin_inset space ~
46552 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46575 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
46577 \begin_inset space ~
46593 \begin_layout Standard
46594 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46600 \begin_layout Standard
46601 Not all changes are (yet) visualized,
46602 especially no format changes like from
46621 \begin_layout Standard
46622 The review toolbar helps you to accept,
46624 or merge changes – highlight the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
46625 When you merge changes,
46626 a window pops up showing you information about the next change after the current cursor position.
46627 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
46628 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and step to the next change.
46629 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
46632 \begin_layout Standard
46633 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important to describe a change.
46636 \begin_layout Standard
46638 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
46639 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46645 \begin_inset Index idx
46650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46653 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46668 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
46671 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46678 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46684 \begin_layout Section
46685 Comparison of Documents
46686 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46688 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
46693 \begin_inset Index idx
46698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46699 Comparison of documents
46707 \begin_layout Standard
46708 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
46711 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46715 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
46716 file with change tracking enabled showing the differences.
46717 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
46718 should take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
46721 \begin_inset space ~
46725 \begin_inset space ~
46729 \begin_inset space ~
46738 \begin_inset space ~
46742 \begin_inset space ~
46746 \begin_inset space ~
46750 \begin_inset space ~
46754 \begin_inset space ~
46758 \begin_inset space ~
46763 enables the change tracking option
46766 \begin_inset space ~
46770 \begin_inset space ~
46774 \begin_inset space ~
46779 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
46782 \begin_layout Section
46783 International Support
46784 \begin_inset Index idx
46789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46790 International support
46798 \begin_layout Standard
46799 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
46800 with any language you want.
46801 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46804 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46806 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
46814 \begin_layout Standard
46817 also supports phonetic symbols,
46819 \begin_inset space ~
46823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46825 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
46833 \begin_layout Subsection
46835 \begin_inset Index idx
46840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46842 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46857 \begin_inset Index idx
46862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46864 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46879 \begin_inset Index idx
46884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46886 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46903 \begin_layout Standard
46906 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46907 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46910 dialog lets you set
46913 the quote style and character encoding
46918 \begin_layout Standard
46923 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46928 \begin_inset space ~
46933 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
46934 For details about the different encoding options see section
46935 \begin_inset space ~
46939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46941 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
46949 \begin_layout Subsection
46950 Keyboard mapping configuration
46951 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46953 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
46960 \begin_layout Standard
46961 If you have for example a U.
46962 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46965 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English,
46966 you can use an alternate keymap.
46968 if you want to write in Italian,
46969 you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
46970 to use an Italian keymap.
46973 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46974 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46975 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
46978 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings,
46980 \begin_inset space ~
46984 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46986 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46992 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select which one you want to use.
46995 \begin_layout Standard
46997 you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely different keymap (for Vulcan,
47001 normally write in Italian on a U.
47002 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47005 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
47007 you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing one to support the characters you want.
47008 This and many other customizations are explained in the
47015 \begin_layout Chapter
47018 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47020 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
47027 \begin_layout Standard
47028 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
47029 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special topic inside the user's guide.
47032 \begin_layout Section
47034 \begin_inset Index idx
47039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47041 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47058 \begin_layout Standard
47063 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
47066 \begin_layout Subsection
47070 \begin_layout Standard
47071 Creates a new document.
47074 \begin_layout Subsection
47078 \begin_layout Standard
47079 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
47080 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for the document,
47081 features you would otherwise need to change manually.
47083 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
47085 templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring writing tasks.
47090 \begin_layout Subsection
47094 \begin_layout Standard
47098 \begin_layout Subsection
47102 \begin_layout Standard
47103 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
47104 Click there on a file to open it.
47107 \begin_layout Subsection
47109 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
47113 \begin_layout Standard
47115 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
47116 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
47120 \begin_layout Subsection
47124 \begin_layout Standard
47125 Closes the current document.
47128 \begin_layout Subsection
47132 \begin_layout Standard
47133 Closes all opened documents.
47136 \begin_layout Subsection
47140 \begin_layout Standard
47141 Saves the actual document.
47144 \begin_layout Subsection
47148 \begin_layout Standard
47149 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
47150 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
47154 \begin_layout Subsection
47156 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
47160 \begin_layout Standard
47162 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
47163 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use as a template.
47168 \begin_layout Subsection
47172 \begin_layout Standard
47173 Saves all opened documents.
47176 \begin_layout Subsection
47180 \begin_layout Standard
47181 Reloads the actual document from disk.
47184 \begin_layout Subsection
47188 \begin_layout Standard
47189 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
47190 It is described in the section
47192 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
47197 Additional Features
47202 \begin_layout Subsection
47206 \begin_layout Standard
47207 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
47213 plain text files and comma separated,
47214 table-like text files (CSV).
47215 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
47219 \begin_layout Standard
47220 When using the menu entry
47223 \begin_inset space ~
47229 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph;
47230 when using the menu entry
47233 \begin_inset space ~
47237 \begin_inset space ~
47241 \begin_inset space ~
47247 consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
47248 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
47251 \begin_layout Subsection
47253 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47255 name "subsec:Export"
47262 \begin_layout Standard
47263 You can export your document to various file formats.
47264 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47266 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
47267 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
47268 during its configuration.
47271 \begin_layout Standard
47272 Here is a list of all available entries;
47273 some of them are explained in detail in section
47274 \begin_inset space ~
47278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47280 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
47288 \begin_layout Description
47294 \begin_inset space ~
47297 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
47299 \begin_inset space ~
47302 1.4.x versions for Chinese,
47303 Japanese and Korean (CJK)
47304 \begin_inset Newline newline
47307 Since \SpecialChar LyX
47308 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
47312 \begin_layout Description
47313 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup language
47318 \begin_layout Description
47320 \begin_inset space ~
47323 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup language
47328 \begin_layout Description
47329 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
47330 's native DVI-format.
47331 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in files paths or file names in your document.
47333 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
47340 \begin_layout Description
47341 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces in files paths or file names
47344 \begin_layout Description
47346 \begin_inset space ~
47353 ) DVI-format using the program
47355 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47359 supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
47364 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47373 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
47381 \begin_layout Description
47383 \begin_inset space ~
47386 (cropped) the same as
47390 but with cropped page margins.
47393 \begin_layout Description
47395 \begin_inset space ~
47398 Dot text file with code in the programming language
47402 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
47407 \begin_layout Description
47412 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47421 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
47429 \begin_layout Description
47431 \begin_inset space ~
47435 \begin_inset space ~
47438 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
47443 as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and not in the format
47450 \begin_layout Description
47454 \begin_inset space ~
47463 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47464 source that is compilable with the program
47466 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47470 \begin_layout Description
47474 \begin_inset space ~
47479 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47481 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to a format that is readable by the
47491 \begin_layout Description
47495 \begin_inset space ~
47500 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47502 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to the EPS-format,
47503 only this format is readable by the
47510 \begin_layout Description
47514 \begin_inset space ~
47523 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47524 source that is compilable with the program
47530 \begin_layout Description
47532 \begin_inset space ~
47536 \begin_inset space ~
47543 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47544 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation software
47549 \begin_layout Description
47551 \begin_inset space ~
47554 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
47555 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
47557 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47561 \begin_inset space \space{}
47566 \begin_inset space ~
47571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47586 represent the version number)
47589 \begin_layout Description
47591 \begin_inset space ~
47595 \begin_inset space ~
47598 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary to compile it (images,
47600 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47605 \begin_layout Description
47606 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
47607 's internal XHTML engine
47610 \begin_layout Description
47612 \begin_inset space ~
47616 \begin_inset space ~
47620 \begin_inset space ~
47624 \begin_inset space ~
47627 XML Office Open XML file,
47633 For the conversion the program
47642 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
47645 \begin_layout Description
47646 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
47651 \begin_layout Description
47653 \begin_inset space ~
47656 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file,
47666 For the conversion the program
47675 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
47678 \begin_layout Description
47680 \begin_inset space ~
47683 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
47684 For the conversion the program
47693 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
47696 \begin_layout Description
47698 \begin_inset space ~
47701 (cropped) the same as
47704 \begin_inset space ~
47709 but with cropped page margins
47712 \begin_layout Description
47716 \begin_inset space ~
47721 PDF-format using the program
47726 produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
47729 \begin_layout Description
47733 \begin_inset space ~
47737 \begin_inset space ~
47745 \begin_inset space ~
47750 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
47751 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47755 \begin_inset space \space{}
47758 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermediate preview)
47761 \begin_layout Description
47765 \begin_inset space ~
47770 PDF-format using the program
47772 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47776 produces PDF-files directly
47779 \begin_layout Description
47783 \begin_inset space ~
47788 PDF-format using the program
47793 produces PDF-files directly
47796 \begin_layout Description
47800 \begin_inset space ~
47805 PDF-format using the program
47810 produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
47813 \begin_layout Description
47817 \begin_inset space ~
47822 PDF-format using the program
47828 produces PDF-files directly
47831 \begin_layout Description
47835 \begin_inset space ~
47843 \begin_layout Description
47847 \begin_inset space ~
47851 \begin_inset space ~
47857 the document will first be converted to Postscript format and then exported as text using the program
47862 \begin_layout Description
47867 PostScript format using the program
47876 options see section
47877 \begin_inset space ~
47881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47883 reference "subsec:General-output"
47891 \begin_layout Description
47892 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47893 source and also code in the statistical programming language
47906 it is possible to use
47910 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
47914 \begin_layout Standard
47915 If one of the menu entries
47923 \begin_inset space ~
47933 you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
47935 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
47938 \begin_inset space ~
47942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47944 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
47950 \begin_inset Index idx
47955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47956 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
47965 \begin_layout Subsection
47969 \begin_layout Standard
47970 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
47973 \begin_inset space ~
47977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47979 reference "sec:Paths"
47985 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
47994 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
47995 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
47996 's preferences as described in section
47997 \begin_inset space ~
48001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48003 reference "subsec:Converters"
48011 \begin_layout Subsection
48012 New and Close Window
48015 \begin_layout Standard
48016 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
48020 \begin_layout Subsection
48024 \begin_layout Standard
48025 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
48028 \begin_layout Section
48030 \begin_inset Index idx
48035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48037 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48054 \begin_layout Subsection
48058 \begin_layout Standard
48059 Described in section
48060 \begin_inset space ~
48064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48066 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
48074 \begin_layout Subsection
48082 \begin_layout Standard
48083 Described in section
48084 \begin_inset space ~
48088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48090 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
48098 \begin_layout Subsection
48102 \begin_layout Standard
48103 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
48104 If the cursor is outside an inset,
48105 the whole document will be selected.
48108 \begin_layout Subsection
48112 \begin_layout Standard
48113 Selects the whole document.
48116 \begin_layout Subsection
48117 Find & Replace (Quick)
48120 \begin_layout Standard
48121 Described in section
48122 \begin_inset space ~
48126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48128 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
48136 \begin_layout Subsection
48137 Find & Replace (Advanced)
48140 \begin_layout Standard
48141 Described in section
48142 \begin_inset space ~
48146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48148 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
48156 \begin_layout Subsection
48157 Move Paragraph Up/Down
48160 \begin_layout Standard
48161 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph up or down.
48164 \begin_layout Subsection
48166 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
48170 \begin_layout Standard
48172 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
48173 Described in section
48174 \begin_inset space ~
48178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48180 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
48190 \begin_layout Subsection
48192 \begin_inset Index idx
48197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48199 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48216 \begin_layout Standard
48217 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment,
48218 line spacing and label width.
48219 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently in.
48222 \begin_layout Standard
48223 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you have chosen to separate paragraphs with
48229 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48230 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48232 \begin_inset space ~
48238 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
48242 \begin_layout Subsection
48244 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
48248 \begin_layout Standard
48250 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
48251 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text passages.
48255 \begin_layout Enumerate
48257 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
48258 Customize text properties by means of the
48264 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
48268 this is described in section
48269 \begin_inset space ~
48273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48275 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
48283 \begin_layout Enumerate
48285 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
48286 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
48288 Apply last settings
48291 \begin_layout Enumerate
48293 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
48294 Change the casing of selected text (
48311 \begin_layout Subsection
48313 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
48317 \begin_layout Standard
48319 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
48320 This sub-menu only appears
48321 \change_inserted 630872221 1621860799
48323 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
48324 the document class or a module provides custom text styles (in the case of this document:
48350 \begin_inset space ~
48354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48356 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
48366 \begin_layout Subsection
48367 Table and Rows & Columns
48370 \begin_layout Standard
48371 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
48372 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells,
48373 add or remove borders of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
48376 \begin_layout Subsection
48380 \begin_layout Standard
48381 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
48382 It will dissolve this inset.
48383 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
48386 \begin_layout Subsection
48390 \begin_layout Standard
48391 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
48392 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
48395 \begin_layout Subsection
48396 Increase/Decrease List Depth
48399 \begin_layout Standard
48400 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can be nested.
48401 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
48402 \begin_inset space ~
48406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48408 reference "sec:Nesting"
48414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48416 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
48424 \begin_layout Section
48426 \begin_inset Index idx
48431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48433 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48450 \begin_layout Standard
48451 At the bottom of the
48455 menu the opened documents are listed.
48458 \begin_layout Subsection
48459 Open/Close all Insets
48462 \begin_layout Standard
48463 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
48466 \begin_layout Subsection
48467 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
48470 \begin_layout Standard
48471 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
48474 \begin_layout Standard
48475 Math macros are described in the
48482 \begin_layout Subsection
48486 \begin_layout Standard
48487 Shows the outline window as described in sections
48488 \begin_inset space ~
48492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48494 reference "sec:Navigating"
48500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48502 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
48510 \begin_layout Subsection
48514 \begin_layout Standard
48515 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document,
48516 as described in section
48517 \begin_inset space ~
48521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48523 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
48531 \begin_layout Subsection
48535 \begin_layout Standard
48536 Opens a window showing console messages.
48537 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
48539 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48543 hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background while \SpecialChar LaTeX
48544 is processing the document.
48547 \begin_layout Subsection
48549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48551 name "subsec:Toolbars"
48556 \begin_inset Index idx
48561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48570 \begin_layout Standard
48571 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different toolbars.
48572 All toolbars and the
48575 \begin_inset space ~
48593 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
48595 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195495
48597 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195492
48601 \begin_layout Standard
48603 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195407
48607 \begin_inset space ~
48628 \begin_inset space ~
48641 \begin_inset space ~
48646 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
48649 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195728
48654 \change_inserted -712698321 1608196033
48656 The state of these toolbars is set and indicated in a submenu which lets you select
48671 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195563
48672 denoted in the menu with the suffix
48681 \begin_layout Standard
48686 state the toolbar is permanently shown
48687 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195803
48693 state it is never shown
48700 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment or when a certain feature is enabled.
48701 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking is activated,
48702 the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor is inside a formula or table respectively
48703 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195857
48705 the phonetic symbols toolbar only in the phonetic symbols environment
48710 \begin_layout Standard
48712 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
48713 \begin_inset space ~
48717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48719 reference "sec:Toolbars"
48727 \begin_layout Subsection
48731 \begin_layout Standard
48735 \begin_inset space ~
48739 \begin_inset space ~
48743 \begin_inset space ~
48747 \begin_inset space ~
48751 \begin_inset space ~
48755 \begin_inset space ~
48760 will split \SpecialChar LyX
48761 's main window vertically while
48764 \begin_inset space ~
48768 \begin_inset space ~
48772 \begin_inset space ~
48776 \begin_inset space ~
48780 \begin_inset space ~
48784 \begin_inset space ~
48789 will split it horizontally.
48790 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them,
48791 or to view the same document,
48792 but at different positions.
48793 You can even split the main window several times to view,
48795 three or more documents at the same time.
48796 To close a split view,
48800 \begin_inset space ~
48804 \begin_inset space ~
48812 \begin_layout Subsection
48816 \begin_layout Standard
48817 Closes a split view.
48820 \begin_layout Subsection
48824 \begin_layout Standard
48825 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars so that you will see nothing but your text.
48826 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
48827 's main window fullscreen.
48828 To return from fullscreen to the normal view,
48830 or right-click and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
48833 \begin_layout Section
48835 \begin_inset Index idx
48840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48842 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48859 \begin_layout Subsection
48863 \begin_layout Standard
48864 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
48865 \begin_inset space ~
48869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48871 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
48883 \begin_layout Subsection
48885 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48887 name "subsec:Special-Character"
48894 \begin_layout Standard
48895 Here you can insert the following characters:
48898 \begin_layout Description
48903 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
48905 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
48906 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48907 -packages you have installed.
48908 You can get a complete display by checking
48911 \begin_inset space ~
48917 \begin_inset Newline newline
48921 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48930 Not all characters will be visible in the
48934 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences dialog (see section
48935 \begin_inset space ~
48939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48941 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
48946 ) can display every character.
48954 \begin_layout Description
48955 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis:
48960 \begin_layout Description
48962 \begin_inset space ~
48966 \begin_inset space ~
48969 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
48970 \begin_inset space ~
48974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48976 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
48984 \begin_layout Description
48986 \begin_inset space ~
48989 Quote Inserts this quote:
48991 no matter what quote style you selected in the
48993 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48994 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49000 \begin_layout Description
49002 \begin_inset space ~
49005 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
49007 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49008 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49014 \begin_layout Description
49016 \change_deleted 177693 1654619391
49018 \change_inserted 177693 1654619396
49022 \begin_inset space ~
49025 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that
49026 \change_deleted 177693 1654619439
49028 \change_inserted 177693 1654619443
49032 \SpecialChar nobreakdash
49036 \begin_layout Description
49038 \begin_inset space ~
49041 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur:
49042 \SpecialChar breakableslash
49046 \begin_layout Description
49048 \begin_inset space ~
49052 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
49053 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing the
49059 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
49064 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
49066 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49070 \begin_inset space \space{}
49073 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
49074 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
49081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49084 To insert a fraction use the command
49089 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
49093 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
49099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49102 The visible space is hereby the character before the
49109 \begin_layout Description
49111 \begin_inset space ~
49114 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign:
49115 \SpecialChar menuseparator
49119 \begin_layout Description
49121 \begin_inset space ~
49125 \begin_inset Index idx
49130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49137 \begin_inset Index idx
49142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49144 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49158 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these symbols.
49159 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49165 \begin_inset Index idx
49170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49173 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49188 \begin_inset Newline newline
49191 More information about this feature can be found in the
49197 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
49203 \begin_layout Description
49204 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
49209 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
49213 \begin_layout Subsection
49217 \begin_layout Standard
49218 Opens a submenu with the following options:
49221 \begin_layout Description
49222 Superscript Inserts a superscript:
49224 \begin_inset script superscript
49226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49236 \begin_layout Description
49237 Subscript Inserts a subscript:
49239 \begin_inset script subscript
49241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49250 \begin_layout Description
49252 \change_deleted 177693 1654619456
49254 \change_inserted 177693 1654619456
49258 \begin_inset space ~
49262 \change_deleted 177693 1654619466
49264 \change_inserted 177693 1654619468
49267 space as described in section
49268 \begin_inset space ~
49272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49274 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
49282 \begin_layout Description
49284 \begin_inset space ~
49287 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
49288 \begin_inset space ~
49292 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
49294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49296 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
49302 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
49304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49306 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
49316 \begin_layout Description
49318 \begin_inset space ~
49321 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
49322 \begin_inset space ~
49326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49328 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
49336 \begin_layout Description
49338 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
49340 \begin_inset space ~
49343 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
49345 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49349 \begin_inset space \space{}
49352 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
49353 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
49360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49363 To insert a fraction use the command
49368 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
49372 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
49378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49381 The visible space is hereby the character before the
49390 \begin_layout Description
49392 \begin_inset space ~
49395 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
49396 \begin_inset space ~
49400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49402 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
49410 \begin_layout Description
49412 \begin_inset space ~
49415 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
49416 \begin_inset space ~
49420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49422 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
49430 \begin_layout Description
49432 \begin_inset space ~
49435 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
49436 \begin_inset space ~
49440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49442 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
49450 \begin_layout Description
49451 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
49452 \begin_inset space ~
49456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49458 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
49466 \begin_layout Description
49468 \begin_inset space ~
49471 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
49472 \begin_inset space ~
49476 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49478 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
49486 \begin_layout Description
49488 \begin_inset space ~
49491 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
49492 \begin_inset space ~
49496 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49498 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
49506 \begin_layout Description
49508 \begin_inset space ~
49512 \begin_inset space ~
49515 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible in the output.
49517 \begin_inset space ~
49521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49523 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
49531 for a usage example.
49534 \begin_layout Description
49536 \begin_inset space ~
49540 \begin_inset space ~
49543 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
49544 \begin_inset space ~
49548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49550 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
49558 \begin_layout Description
49560 \begin_inset space ~
49563 Break Inserts a forced line break that
49564 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
49567 justifies the remaining text as described in section
49568 \begin_inset space ~
49572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49574 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
49582 \begin_layout Description
49584 \begin_inset space ~
49587 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
49588 \begin_inset space ~
49592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49594 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
49602 \begin_layout Description
49604 \begin_inset space ~
49607 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page,
49608 as described in section
49609 \begin_inset space ~
49613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49615 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
49621 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005731
49625 \begin_layout Description
49627 \change_deleted 5863208 1686701518
49629 \change_inserted 5863208 1686701520
49631 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
49633 \begin_inset space ~
49637 \begin_inset space ~
49640 Break Instructs \SpecialChar LaTeX
49641 to prevent a page break at the given position.
49643 \begin_inset space ~
49647 \change_inserted 630872221 1621862329
49649 \begin_inset space ~
49653 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
49655 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49657 reference "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
49667 \begin_layout Description
49669 \begin_inset space ~
49672 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
49673 \begin_inset space ~
49677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49679 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
49687 \begin_layout Description
49689 \begin_inset space ~
49693 \begin_inset space ~
49696 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
49697 \begin_inset space ~
49701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49703 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
49711 \begin_layout Subsection
49713 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49717 \begin_layout Standard
49719 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49720 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
49721 The submenu allows you to insert
49724 \begin_layout Description
49726 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49728 \begin_inset space ~
49731 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
49734 \begin_layout Description
49736 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49738 \begin_inset space ~
49742 \begin_inset space ~
49745 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last save)
49748 \begin_layout Description
49750 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49752 \begin_inset space ~
49755 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
49758 \begin_layout Description
49760 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49762 \begin_inset space ~
49765 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
49768 \begin_layout Description
49770 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49772 \begin_inset space ~
49776 \begin_inset space ~
49779 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last save)
49782 \begin_layout Description
49784 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49786 \begin_inset space ~
49789 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
49792 \begin_layout Description
49794 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867346
49796 \begin_inset space ~
49800 \begin_inset space ~
49804 \begin_inset space ~
49807 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
49810 \begin_layout Description
49812 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867469
49814 \begin_inset space ~
49818 \begin_inset space ~
49821 Revision inserts the version control reference number (e.g.
49823 This submenu does not appear if the file is not under version control
49826 \begin_layout Description
49828 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49830 \begin_inset space ~
49833 Name inserts the user name as specified in
49835 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49836 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
49842 \begin_layout Description
49844 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49846 \begin_inset space ~
49849 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
49851 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49852 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
49858 \begin_layout Description
49860 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49861 Other\SpecialChar ldots
49862 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
49865 \begin_layout Subsection
49868 List/Contents/References
49871 \begin_layout Standard
49872 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
49876 \begin_inset space ~
49900 are described in section
49901 \begin_inset space ~
49905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49907 reference "sec:toc"
49917 is described in section
49918 \begin_inset space ~
49922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49924 reference "sec:Index"
49934 is described in section
49935 \begin_inset space ~
49939 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49941 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
49948 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49951 is described in section
49952 \begin_inset space ~
49956 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49958 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
49966 \begin_layout Subsection
49970 \begin_layout Standard
49972 as described in section
49973 \begin_inset space ~
49977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49979 reference "sec:Floats"
49984 and in detail the chapter
49991 \begin_inset space ~
49999 \begin_layout Subsection
50003 \begin_layout Standard
50005 described in section
50006 \begin_inset space ~
50010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50012 reference "sec:Notes"
50020 \begin_layout Subsection
50024 \begin_layout Standard
50025 Inserts a branch inset,
50027 and allowing you to create and insert a new branch.
50028 Branches are described in section
50029 \begin_inset space ~
50033 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50035 reference "sec:Branches"
50043 \begin_layout Subsection
50047 \begin_layout Standard
50048 Inserts document class-specific insets.
50049 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain document class.
50050 An example is the document class
50051 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
50053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50061 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
50065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50070 with three custom insets.
50073 Flex insets and InsetLayout
50077 Installing New Document Classes,
50078 The Layout file format
50084 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
50087 \begin_layout Subsection
50089 \begin_inset Index idx
50094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50103 \begin_layout Standard
50104 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files in your document.
50105 For more information see chapter
50107 External Document Parts
50110 \begin_inset space ~
50116 \begin_layout Subsection
50118 \begin_inset Index idx
50123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50132 \begin_layout Standard
50133 Inserts a box in a certain style.
50134 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
50141 \begin_inset space ~
50149 \begin_layout Subsection
50153 \begin_layout Standard
50158 dialog as described in section
50159 \begin_inset space ~
50163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50165 reference "sec:Bibliography"
50173 \begin_layout Subsection
50177 \begin_layout Standard
50182 as described in section
50183 \begin_inset space ~
50187 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50189 reference "sec:Cross-References"
50197 \begin_layout Subsection
50201 \begin_layout Standard
50206 as described in section
50207 \begin_inset space ~
50211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50213 reference "sec:Cross-References"
50221 \begin_layout Subsection
50223 \begin_inset Index idx
50228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50235 \begin_inset Index idx
50240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50242 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50252 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50269 \begin_layout Standard
50270 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
50271 Floats are described in section
50272 \begin_inset space ~
50276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50278 reference "sec:Floats"
50284 captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
50287 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
50295 \begin_inset space ~
50303 \begin_layout Subsection
50307 \begin_layout Standard
50308 Inserts an index entry as described in section
50309 \begin_inset space ~
50313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50315 reference "sec:Index"
50323 \begin_layout Subsection
50327 \begin_layout Standard
50328 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
50329 \begin_inset space ~
50333 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50335 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
50343 \begin_layout Subsection
50347 \begin_layout Standard
50348 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
50349 Tables are described in section
50350 \begin_inset space ~
50354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50356 reference "sec:Tables"
50361 and in detail in the chapter
50368 \begin_inset space ~
50376 \begin_layout Subsection
50380 \begin_layout Standard
50386 Graphics are described in section
50387 \begin_inset space ~
50391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50393 reference "sec:Graphics"
50401 \begin_layout Subsection
50405 \begin_layout Standard
50406 Inserts a URL as described in section
50407 \begin_inset space ~
50411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50413 reference "subsec:URLs"
50421 \begin_layout Subsection
50425 \begin_layout Standard
50426 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
50427 \begin_inset space ~
50431 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50433 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
50441 \begin_layout Subsection
50445 \begin_layout Standard
50446 Inserts a footnote as described in section
50447 \begin_inset space ~
50451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50453 reference "sec:Footnotes"
50461 \begin_layout Subsection
50465 \begin_layout Standard
50466 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
50467 \begin_inset space ~
50471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50473 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
50481 \begin_layout Subsection
50484 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
50487 \begin_layout Standard
50488 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
50490 \begin_inset space ~
50494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50496 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
50501 for an explanation.
50504 \begin_layout Subsection
50508 \begin_layout Standard
50509 Is only visible if the cursor is in front,
50510 in or behind a section heading,
50511 title or caption of a float.
50512 Inserts a short title as described in section
50513 \begin_inset space ~
50517 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50519 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
50527 \begin_layout Subsection
50532 \begin_layout Standard
50533 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
50534 Code box as described in section
50535 \begin_inset space ~
50539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50541 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
50549 \begin_layout Subsection
50551 \begin_inset Index idx
50556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50565 \begin_layout Standard
50566 Inserts a program listings box.
50567 Program listings are explained in the chapter
50569 Program Code Listings
50574 \begin_inset space ~
50582 \begin_layout Subsection
50584 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
50588 \begin_layout Standard
50590 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
50591 Inserts the actual date.
50592 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for \SpecialChar LyX
50598 \begin_layout Subsection
50602 \begin_layout Standard
50603 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
50604 \begin_inset space ~
50608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50610 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
50618 \begin_layout Section
50620 \begin_inset Index idx
50625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50627 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50644 \begin_layout Standard
50645 This menu lists the existing chapters,
50650 \begin_inset space ~
50653 of the current document.
50654 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
50657 \begin_layout Subsection
50661 \begin_layout Standard
50662 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
50663 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have to jump,
50666 \begin_inset space ~
50670 To create bookmarks for this example,
50672 \begin_inset space ~
50675 2.5 and use the submenu
50678 \begin_inset space ~
50682 \begin_inset space ~
50689 \begin_inset space ~
50695 \begin_inset space ~
50699 \begin_inset space ~
50705 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by the key bindings
50708 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
50714 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
50717 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
50720 \begin_layout Standard
50722 \change_deleted 244031559 1613377262
50723 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
50729 \begin_inset space ~
50734 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
50737 \begin_inset space ~
50742 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
50745 \begin_layout Subsection
50751 \begin_layout Standard
50752 Jump to the next note,
50754 or cross-reference after the current cursor position.
50757 \begin_layout Subsection
50761 \begin_layout Standard
50762 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
50763 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
50764 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
50767 \begin_inset space ~
50771 \begin_inset space ~
50779 \begin_layout Subsection
50783 \begin_layout Standard
50784 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
50787 The \SpecialChar LyX
50788 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
50790 \begin_inset space ~
50798 \begin_inset space ~
50803 manual for a detailed description.
50806 \begin_layout Section
50808 \begin_inset Index idx
50813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50815 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50832 \begin_layout Subsection
50836 \begin_layout Standard
50837 Change Tracking is described in section
50838 \begin_inset space ~
50842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50844 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
50852 \begin_layout Subsection
50860 \begin_layout Standard
50861 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
50862 by viewing or exporting a document,
50863 this menu will be enabled.
50864 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50866 You can go to the next error or the next warning,
50868 copy something to the clipboard or update the view.
50869 \begin_inset Newline newline
50872 With the help of the logfile,
50873 experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
50877 \begin_layout Standard
50880 Open Containing Directory
50882 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
50883 's temporary folder for the document.
50884 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
50885 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
50886 For example some journals require to send the
50890 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50894 \begin_layout Subsection
50895 Start Appendix Here
50898 \begin_layout Standard
50899 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position as described in section
50900 \begin_inset space ~
50904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50906 reference "sec:Appendices"
50914 \begin_layout Subsection
50916 \begin_inset space ~
50922 \begin_layout Standard
50923 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as default output format for the document (menu
50925 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50926 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
50927 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
50929 \begin_inset space ~
50933 \begin_inset space ~
50940 \begin_inset space ~
50944 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50946 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
50951 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
50954 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50955 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50957 \begin_inset space ~
50960 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
50962 \begin_inset space ~
50965 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
50967 \begin_inset space ~
50971 \begin_inset space ~
50978 \begin_inset space ~
50982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50984 reference "sec:File-Formats"
50989 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
50990 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
50992 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50993 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50995 \begin_inset space ~
50998 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
51000 \begin_inset space ~
51003 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
51008 \begin_inset space ~
51012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51014 reference "sec:File-Formats"
51020 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
51021 when it is first configured.
51022 The default output format is
51025 \begin_inset space ~
51033 \begin_layout Subsection
51034 View (Other Formats)
51037 \begin_layout Standard
51038 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
51039 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the actual document with an external program.
51040 The menu entries are not the same on all installations —
51041 it depends on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51042 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
51044 All possible formats are listed in section
51045 \begin_inset space ~
51049 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51051 reference "subsec:Export"
51057 You should at least see the menu entry
51063 you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
51065 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
51067 \begin_inset space ~
51071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51073 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
51079 \begin_inset Index idx
51084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51085 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
51094 \begin_layout Standard
51095 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
51096 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
51098 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51099 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
51101 \begin_inset space ~
51104 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
51106 \begin_inset space ~
51109 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
51114 \begin_inset space ~
51118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51120 reference "sec:File-Formats"
51126 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
51127 when it is first configured.
51130 \begin_layout Subsection
51132 \begin_inset space ~
51138 \begin_layout Standard
51139 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
51142 \begin_layout Subsection
51143 Update (Other Formats)
51146 \begin_layout Standard
51147 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of your document without opening a new viewer window.
51150 \begin_layout Subsection
51151 View Master Document
51154 \begin_layout Standard
51155 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
51157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51171 \begin_inset space ~
51176 manual for more information on this topic).
51177 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
51179 if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a book,
51183 \begin_inset space ~
51187 \begin_inset space ~
51192 generates the output of the whole book,
51197 will just output the chapter alone.
51200 \begin_layout Standard
51201 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
51203 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51204 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51205 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
51207 \begin_inset space ~
51211 \begin_inset space ~
51218 \begin_inset space ~
51222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51224 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
51229 ) or in the preferences (menu
51231 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51232 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
51234 \begin_inset space ~
51237 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
51239 \begin_inset space ~
51242 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
51244 \begin_inset space ~
51248 \begin_inset space ~
51255 \begin_inset space ~
51259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51261 reference "sec:File-Formats"
51269 \begin_layout Subsection
51270 Update Master Document
51273 \begin_layout Standard
51274 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
51276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51290 \begin_inset space ~
51295 manual for more information on this topic).
51296 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
51299 \begin_layout Standard
51300 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
51302 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51303 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51304 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
51306 \begin_inset space ~
51310 \begin_inset space ~
51317 \begin_inset space ~
51321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51323 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
51328 ) or in the preferences (menu
51330 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51331 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
51333 \begin_inset space ~
51336 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
51338 \begin_inset space ~
51341 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
51343 \begin_inset space ~
51347 \begin_inset space ~
51354 \begin_inset space ~
51358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51360 reference "sec:File-Formats"
51368 \begin_layout Subsection
51370 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51372 name "subsec:Compressed"
51379 \begin_layout Standard
51380 Un/compresses the current document.
51381 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable compression (see the
51383 Additional Features
51385 manual for details).
51388 \begin_layout Subsection
51392 \begin_layout Standard
51393 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
51396 \begin_layout Subsection
51400 \begin_layout Standard
51401 The document settings are described in appendix
51402 \begin_inset space ~
51406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51408 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
51416 \begin_layout Section
51418 \begin_inset Index idx
51423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51425 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51442 \begin_layout Subsection
51446 \begin_layout Standard
51447 Spell checking is explained in section
51448 \begin_inset space ~
51452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51454 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
51462 \begin_layout Subsection
51466 \begin_layout Standard
51467 The thesaurus is described in section
51468 \begin_inset space ~
51472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51474 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
51482 \begin_layout Subsection
51484 \begin_inset Index idx
51489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51496 \begin_inset Index idx
51501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51510 \begin_layout Standard
51511 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or the highlighted document part.
51514 \begin_layout Subsection
51520 \begin_inset Index idx
51525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51526 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
51535 \begin_layout Standard
51536 Generates with the help of the program
51538 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
51541 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
51542 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
51543 This feature is not available on Windows.
51546 \begin_layout Subsection
51552 \begin_inset Index idx
51557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51567 \begin_layout Standard
51568 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
51573 \begin_inset space ~
51578 to see the full filename paths.
51581 \begin_layout Subsection
51583 \begin_inset Index idx
51588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51597 \begin_layout Standard
51598 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
51599 files as described in section
51600 \begin_inset space ~
51604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51606 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
51614 \begin_layout Subsection
51616 \begin_inset Index idx
51621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51624 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51634 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
51637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51638 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
51650 \begin_inset Index idx
51655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51656 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
51665 \begin_layout Standard
51666 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
51670 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
51671 -packages and programs it needs;
51673 \begin_inset space ~
51677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51679 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
51687 \begin_layout Subsection
51691 \begin_layout Standard
51696 dialog as described in detail in appendix
51697 \begin_inset space ~
51701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51703 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
51711 \begin_layout Section
51713 \begin_inset Index idx
51718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51720 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51737 \begin_layout Standard
51738 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
51739 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
51741 If a file is not available in this language,
51742 the English version will be listed.
51745 \begin_layout Standard
51749 \begin_inset space ~
51754 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
51755 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51756 packages and classes found by \SpecialChar LyX
51758 \begin_inset space ~
51762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51764 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
51772 \begin_layout Standard
51776 \begin_inset space ~
51781 gives information about the copyright,
51782 the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
51783 version you are using.
51786 \begin_layout Section
51788 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51790 name "sec:Toolbars"
51797 \begin_layout Standard
51798 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
51799 \begin_inset space ~
51803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51805 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
51813 \begin_layout Standard
51814 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
51815 This is described in the
51817 Additional Features
51822 \begin_layout Subsection
51824 \begin_inset Index idx
51829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51831 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51848 \begin_layout Standard
51849 \begin_inset Graphics
51850 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
51858 \begin_layout Standard
51859 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
51865 \begin_layout Standard
51866 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
51870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51882 \begin_inset Note Note
51885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51886 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
51891 manual for more information.
51899 \begin_layout Standard
51900 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
51906 \begin_layout Standard
51907 \begin_inset Tabular
51908 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
51909 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
51910 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51911 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51917 \begin_inset Graphics
51918 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
51928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51932 pull-down box for the environments
51945 \begin_layout Standard
51946 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
51952 \begin_layout Standard
51954 \begin_inset Tabular
51955 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
51956 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
51957 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
51958 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
51959 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51982 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51989 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
51990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
51993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52012 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52019 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52042 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52049 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52058 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
52066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52072 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
52079 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52088 arg "spelling-continuously"
52096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52100 Spellcheck continuously
52106 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52129 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52136 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52159 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52166 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52189 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52196 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52219 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52226 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52249 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52251 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
52256 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52265 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52274 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
52282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52288 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52294 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52307 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52314 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
52322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52328 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52334 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52338 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52347 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52356 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
52364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52370 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
52371 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
52378 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52401 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
52404 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52406 \begin_inset space ~
52409 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
52411 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
52417 arg "dialog-show character"
52428 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52449 Set text to noun style,
52451 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
52454 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52456 \begin_inset space ~
52459 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
52461 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
52467 arg "dialog-show character"
52478 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52484 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
52487 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
52495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52500 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
52503 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52510 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52516 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
52521 arg "textstyle-apply"
52531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52536 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
52537 Format text using the current settings in the
52539 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52541 \begin_inset space ~
52544 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
52555 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52578 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52579 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
52581 \begin_inset space ~
52590 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52599 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
52607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52613 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52620 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52627 arg "tabular-insert"
52635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52641 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52648 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52654 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
52657 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
52665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52670 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
52673 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52680 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52689 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
52697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52701 Toggle outline window on/off,
52704 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
52711 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52720 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
52728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52732 Toggle math toolbar on/off
52738 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52747 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
52755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52759 Toggle table toolbar on/off
52772 \begin_layout Subsection
52774 \begin_inset Index idx
52779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52781 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52798 \begin_layout Standard
52799 \begin_inset Graphics
52800 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
52808 \begin_layout Standard
52809 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
52815 \begin_layout Standard
52816 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
52819 \begin_layout Standard
52820 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
52826 \begin_layout Standard
52827 \begin_inset Tabular
52828 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
52829 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
52830 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
52831 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
52832 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52859 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52868 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
52876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52886 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52895 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
52903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52913 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52922 arg "layout-toggle List"
52930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52940 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52949 arg "layout-toggle Description"
52957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52967 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52976 arg "depth-increment"
52984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52990 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52992 \begin_inset space ~
52996 \begin_inset space ~
53005 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53014 arg "depth-decrement"
53022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53028 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
53030 \begin_inset space ~
53034 \begin_inset space ~
53043 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53052 arg "float-insert figure"
53060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53066 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53067 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
53074 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53083 arg "float-insert table"
53091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53097 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53098 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
53105 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53128 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53135 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53144 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
53152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53158 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53165 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53174 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
53182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53188 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53195 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53218 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53220 \begin_inset space ~
53229 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53238 arg "nomencl-insert"
53246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53252 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53254 \begin_inset space ~
53263 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53272 arg "footnote-insert"
53280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53286 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53293 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53302 arg "marginalnote-insert"
53310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53316 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53318 \begin_inset space ~
53327 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53350 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53351 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
53353 \begin_inset space ~
53362 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53371 arg "box-insert Frameless"
53379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53385 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53392 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53415 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53422 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53445 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53447 \begin_inset space ~
53456 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53465 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
53473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53479 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53480 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
53487 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53496 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
53504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53510 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53511 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
53513 \begin_inset space ~
53522 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53531 arg "dialog-show character"
53539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53545 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
53547 \begin_inset space ~
53550 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
53557 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53563 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
53568 arg "textstyle-apply"
53576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53581 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
53582 Format text using the recent settings in the
53585 arg "dialog-show character"
53594 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53603 arg "layout-paragraph"
53611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53617 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
53619 \begin_inset space ~
53628 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53637 arg "thesaurus-entry"
53645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53651 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
53665 \begin_layout Subsection
53666 View/Update Toolbar
53667 \begin_inset Index idx
53672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53674 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53691 \begin_layout Standard
53692 \begin_inset Graphics
53693 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
53700 \begin_layout Standard
53701 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
53707 \begin_layout Standard
53708 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
53711 \begin_layout Standard
53712 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
53718 \begin_layout Standard
53719 \begin_inset Tabular
53720 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
53721 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
53722 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
53723 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
53724 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53747 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53754 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53763 arg "buffer-update"
53771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53777 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53784 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53793 arg "master-buffer-view"
53801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53807 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53809 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333746
53811 \begin_inset space ~
53817 \begin_inset space ~
53826 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53835 arg "master-buffer-update"
53843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53849 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53851 \begin_inset space ~
53855 \begin_inset space ~
53864 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53873 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
53881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53887 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53888 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
53890 \change_deleted -131811572 1600333766
53892 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333762
53895 \SpecialChar menuseparator
53896 Synchronize with Output
53902 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53913 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
53923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53929 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53930 View (Other Formats)
53936 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53943 arg "update-others"
53947 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
53955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53961 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53962 Update (Other Formats)
53975 \begin_layout Standard
53977 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
53978 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default icon set.
53983 \begin_layout Subsection
53987 \begin_layout Standard
53988 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
53989 \begin_inset space ~
53993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53995 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
54002 \begin_inset Index idx
54007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54009 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54026 \begin_inset space ~
54031 manual and the math macro toolbar
54032 \begin_inset Index idx
54037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54039 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54060 \begin_layout Chapter
54061 The Document Settings
54062 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54064 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
54069 \begin_inset Index idx
54074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54076 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54093 \begin_layout Standard
54097 \begin_inset space ~
54102 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and is called with the menu
54104 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54108 You can save your document settings as default with the
54110 Save as Document Defaults
54112 button in any dialog.
54113 This will create a template named
54117 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
54118 when you create a new document without using a template.
54121 \begin_layout Standard
54126 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
54127 This affects mostly class options,
54128 the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
54131 \begin_layout Standard
54132 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
54133 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while to find the one you are looking for.
54134 To find a setting quicker,
54135 you can use the search field which is above the submenus of the dialog.
54137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54141 \begin_inset space \space{}
54145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54153 you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
54154 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
54155 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
54158 \begin_layout Section
54162 \begin_layout Standard
54163 Here you set the document class,
54166 and a master document.
54167 Document classes are described in section
54168 \begin_inset space ~
54172 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54174 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
54182 \begin_layout Standard
54186 \begin_inset space ~
54191 you can load you own layout-file,
54192 that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
54197 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
54198 as a layout for a document class.
54199 For more about layout-files,
54202 Installing New Document Classes,
54203 Types of Layout Files
54212 \begin_layout Standard
54213 Some classes use special class options by default.
54214 If this is the case,
54215 they are listed in the field
54219 and you can decide to use them or not.
54220 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for,
54221 it is recommended you leave them untouched.
54226 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
54228 color and page layout packages.
54234 the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54236 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are doing.
54240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54241 When you want to use one of the following drivers
54242 \begin_inset Newline newline
54256 \begin_inset Newline newline
54259 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
54266 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54268 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
54281 \begin_layout Standard
54286 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
54287 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
54288 in the background if the child document is opened without its master.
54289 This way child documents are always compilable.
54290 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
54297 \begin_inset space ~
54305 \begin_layout Standard
54306 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54316 \begin_inset Index idx
54321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54324 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54339 \begin_inset Index idx
54344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54347 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54361 for cross-references,
54363 \begin_inset space ~
54367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54369 reference "sec:Cross-References"
54377 \begin_layout Section
54381 \begin_layout Standard
54382 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
54383 Please refer to the section
54386 \begin_inset space ~
54394 \begin_inset space ~
54399 manual for details.
54402 \begin_layout Section
54406 \begin_layout Standard
54407 Modules are explained in section
54408 \begin_inset space ~
54412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54414 reference "subsec:Modules"
54422 \begin_layout Section
54426 \begin_layout Standard
54428 \begin_inset space ~
54432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54434 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
54442 \begin_layout Section
54446 \begin_layout Standard
54447 The document font settings are described in section
54448 \begin_inset space ~
54452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54454 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
54462 \begin_layout Section
54466 \begin_layout Standard
54467 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
54479 \begin_inset space ~
54484 and whether it should be a
54487 \begin_inset space ~
54492 can also be specified here.
54495 \begin_layout Standard
54496 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
54497 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
54498 That would be impractical,
54500 and is not part of the WYSIWYM concept.
54502 it will be as you specified in the output.
54505 \begin_layout Standard
54508 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
54511 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
54512 justifies the text on screen.
54513 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
54515 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
54519 \begin_layout Standard
54521 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
54530 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
54535 \begin_layout Section
54539 \begin_layout Standard
54540 This dialog is described in sections
54541 \begin_inset space ~
54545 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54547 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
54553 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54555 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
54563 \begin_layout Section
54567 \begin_layout Standard
54568 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
54569 \begin_inset space ~
54573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54575 reference "subsec:Margins"
54583 \begin_layout Section
54585 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54587 name "sec:Language-encodings"
54592 \begin_inset Index idx
54597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54599 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54616 \begin_layout Standard
54617 The document language and quote styles are set here.
54618 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
54619 (the \SpecialChar LyX
54620 file is always encoded in utf8).
54621 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
54622 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
54623 -command is not known for a particular character).
54624 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
54628 \begin_layout Standard
54630 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
54633 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
54634 files in Unicode – or utf8,
54635 for that matter (which is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
54636 's default encoding).
54637 This should normally fit your needs,
54638 since \SpecialChar LaTeX
54639 's Unicode support covers the characters of most scripts.
54640 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive,
54641 so there might be cases where using one of the traditional,
54643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54651 encodings is necessary.
54654 \begin_layout Standard
54656 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
54658 provides support for these traditional encodings.
54661 Traditional (auto-selected)
54669 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for the given language(s).
54671 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
54675 \begin_layout Standard
54677 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
54678 If you use the option
54684 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
54687 If the document contains text in more than one language you
54688 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
54691 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54694 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
54695 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use exactly one encoding.
54696 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
54701 \begin_layout Standard
54703 \change_deleted 630872221 1621942852
54712 any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
54714 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
54718 \begin_layout Standard
54720 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
54722 you can also select
54727 which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
54728 Note that this encoding is then used for
54733 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation below).
54736 \begin_layout Standard
54738 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
54740 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943769
54744 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943773
54745 Do not load inputenc
54746 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
54750 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943234
54752 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943236
54754 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
54756 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943278
54757 in the next dropdown menu
54758 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
54759 does what it states:
54761 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943783
54763 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943782
54765 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
54766 t prevents \SpecialChar LyX
54767 from automatically loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54773 \begin_inset Index idx
54778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54780 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
54785 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54790 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
54804 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
54806 you probably need to load some additional packages manually in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign languages in \SpecialChar TeX
54808 Note that this option is only available for the standard
54814 Traditional (auto-selected)
54821 \begin_layout Standard
54823 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
54825 also supports Unicode output,
54826 which is particularly useful if you need lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts,
54828 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
54829 installation supports Unicode),
54830 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
54831 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
54832 is quite incomplete,
54833 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine with
54837 (when \SpecialChar LyX
54838 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
54840 but does not work with a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
54841 -commands is not used,
54842 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
54843 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
54844 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
54846 two new alternative engines to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
54848 Both engines support Unicode natively.
54850 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
54853 \begin_inset space ~
54862 \begin_inset space ~
54870 \begin_inset space ~
54877 \begin_inset space ~
54881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54883 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
54889 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
54894 you might try out one of these new engines.
54899 \begin_layout Standard
54903 \begin_inset space ~
54908 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54909 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation of strings like
54910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54918 The possible settings are:
54921 \begin_layout Description
54922 Default uses the language package that is selected in
54924 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
54925 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
54929 \begin_inset space ~
54933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54935 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
54943 \begin_layout Description
54944 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export format you will use.
54945 In many cases this will be
54950 \begin_inset Index idx
54955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54958 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54973 If the newer package
54978 \begin_inset Index idx
54983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54986 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55000 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
55001 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
55002 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
55004 this package will be used instead of
55011 \begin_layout Description
55013 \begin_inset space ~
55024 would be more appropriate.
55027 \begin_layout Description
55028 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
55029 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
55033 (for German texts),
55037 \begin_inset Newline newline
55042 usepackage{ngerman}
55045 \begin_layout Description
55046 None will not use a language package.
55047 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
55050 \begin_layout Standard
55051 Here is a list with the important encodings:
55054 \begin_layout Description
55056 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
55058 \begin_inset space ~
55062 \begin_inset space ~
55066 \begin_inset space ~
55074 but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55080 \begin_inset Index idx
55085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55088 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55104 you probably need to load some additional packages manually in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign languages in \SpecialChar TeX
55110 \begin_layout Description
55111 ASCII the ASCII encoding,
55112 covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
55114 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
55116 which may result in a big file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
55117 -commands are needed.
55119 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943931
55120 This is the same as the
55133 \begin_layout Description
55135 \begin_inset space ~
55139 \begin_inset space ~
55142 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
55145 \begin_layout Description
55147 \begin_inset space ~
55151 \begin_inset space ~
55154 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
55157 \begin_layout Description
55159 \begin_inset space ~
55162 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
55165 \begin_layout Description
55167 \begin_inset space ~
55171 \begin_inset space ~
55174 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian,
55175 Latvian and Lithuanian,
55176 the same as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
55179 \begin_layout Description
55181 \begin_inset space ~
55185 \begin_inset space ~
55188 8859-13) for Estonian,
55189 Latvian and Lithuanian,
55190 a superset of the ISO-8859-4 encoding
55193 \begin_layout Description
55195 \begin_inset space ~
55199 \begin_inset space ~
55202 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian,
55203 Latvian and Lithuanian,
55204 a subset of the ISO-8859-13 encoding
55207 \begin_layout Description
55209 \begin_inset space ~
55213 \begin_inset space ~
55217 \begin_inset space ~
55220 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
55221 \begin_inset space ~
55227 \begin_layout Description
55229 \begin_inset space ~
55233 \begin_inset space ~
55237 \begin_inset space ~
55240 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian,
55247 Slovak and Slovenian
55250 \begin_layout Description
55252 \begin_inset space ~
55256 \begin_inset space ~
55259 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese,
55260 used especially on UNIX OSes,
55261 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
55262 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
55263 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
55264 \begin_inset space ~
55268 \begin_inset space ~
55274 \begin_layout Description
55276 \begin_inset space ~
55280 \begin_inset space ~
55283 (GBK) for simplified Chinese,
55284 is the same as the Windows code page CP 936 except for the Euro currency sign,
55285 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
55286 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
55287 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
55288 \begin_inset space ~
55292 \begin_inset space ~
55298 \begin_layout Description
55300 \begin_inset space ~
55304 \begin_inset space ~
55307 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
55310 \begin_layout Description
55312 \begin_inset space ~
55316 \begin_inset space ~
55319 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
55322 \begin_layout Description
55324 \begin_inset space ~
55328 \begin_inset space ~
55331 8859-5) covers Belorussian,
55334 Serbian and Ukrainian
55337 \begin_layout Description
55339 \begin_inset space ~
55342 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
55345 \begin_layout Description
55347 \begin_inset space ~
55350 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
55353 \begin_layout Description
55355 \begin_inset space ~
55359 \begin_inset space ~
55362 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
55365 \begin_layout Description
55367 \begin_inset space ~
55371 \begin_inset space ~
55377 \begin_layout Description
55379 \begin_inset space ~
55383 \begin_inset space ~
55386 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew,
55387 a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
55390 \begin_layout Description
55392 \begin_inset space ~
55396 \begin_inset space ~
55402 \begin_layout Description
55404 \begin_inset space ~
55408 \begin_inset space ~
55411 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
55412 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55418 \begin_inset Index idx
55423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55426 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55442 set the document language to
55447 \begin_layout Description
55449 \begin_inset space ~
55453 \begin_inset space ~
55456 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
55457 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55464 set the document language to
55467 \begin_inset space ~
55473 \begin_layout Description
55475 \begin_inset space ~
55479 \begin_inset space ~
55482 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
55483 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55489 \begin_inset Index idx
55494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55497 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55513 set the document language to
55518 \begin_layout Description
55520 \begin_inset space ~
55524 \begin_inset space ~
55527 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
55528 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55535 set the document language to
55540 \begin_layout Description
55542 \begin_inset space ~
55546 \begin_inset space ~
55549 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese,
55550 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55557 set the document language to
55562 \begin_layout Description
55564 \begin_inset space ~
55567 (EUC-KR) for Korean
55570 \begin_layout Description
55572 \begin_inset space ~
55576 \begin_inset space ~
55580 \begin_inset space ~
55583 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto,
55585 Maltese and Turkish
55588 \begin_layout Description
55590 \begin_inset space ~
55594 \begin_inset space ~
55598 \begin_inset space ~
55601 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian,
55610 Romanian and Slovenian,
55611 is designed to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
55614 \begin_layout Description
55616 \begin_inset space ~
55620 \begin_inset space ~
55626 \begin_layout Description
55628 \begin_inset space ~
55632 \begin_inset space ~
55635 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish,
55636 is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
55639 \begin_layout Description
55641 \begin_inset space ~
55645 \begin_inset space ~
55648 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55654 \begin_inset Index idx
55659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55662 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55676 (for the languages Chinese,
55677 Japanese and Korean)
55678 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
55680 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
55681 with the default encoding (
55683 Unicode (utf8) [default]
55689 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
55690 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
55695 \begin_layout Description
55697 \begin_inset space ~
55705 \begin_inset space ~
55708 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
55715 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
55719 which use Unicode directly,
55720 without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55727 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
55728 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
55730 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
55733 \begin_layout Description
55735 \begin_inset space ~
55739 \begin_inset space ~
55742 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55748 \begin_inset Index idx
55753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55756 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55771 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
55777 Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
55779 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
55780 This used to be more comprehensive than
55783 \begin_inset space ~
55789 but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
55794 \begin_layout Description
55796 \begin_inset space ~
55799 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55805 \begin_inset Index idx
55810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55813 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55829 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
55830 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts) is supported.
55831 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
55832 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
55833 with the default encoding (
55835 Unicode (utf8) [default]
55841 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
55842 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
55847 \begin_layout Description
55849 \begin_inset space ~
55853 \begin_inset space ~
55857 \begin_inset space ~
55860 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
55861 \begin_inset space ~
55867 \begin_layout Description
55869 \begin_inset space ~
55873 \begin_inset space ~
55877 \begin_inset space ~
55880 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian,
55895 Spanish and Swedish;
55896 better use the ISO-8859-15 encoding instead
55899 \begin_layout Description
55901 \begin_inset space ~
55905 \begin_inset space ~
55909 \begin_inset space ~
55912 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding,
55913 but with the Euro currency sign,
55914 the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
55917 \begin_layout Section
55919 \begin_inset Index idx
55924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55926 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55941 \begin_inset Index idx
55946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55948 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55963 \begin_inset Index idx
55968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55970 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55985 \begin_inset Index idx
55990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55992 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56009 \begin_layout Standard
56010 Here you can alter the font color for the
56019 \begin_inset space ~
56025 light grey)for the background color for the
56033 \begin_inset space ~
56044 sets the color back to the default.
56047 \begin_layout Standard
56048 Clicking any button showing
56056 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
56057 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them later more quickly.
56060 \begin_layout Standard
56065 \begin_inset space ~
56070 font color and use the option
56073 \begin_inset space ~
56078 in the document settings under
56081 \begin_inset space ~
56087 you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
56088 \begin_inset space ~
56092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56094 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
56102 \begin_layout Standard
56103 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
56109 \begin_layout Standard
56113 \begin_inset space ~
56122 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as \SpecialChar TeX
56124 \begin_inset space ~
56127 Code after a forced page break:
56130 \begin_layout Itemize
56131 For the page color:
56132 \begin_inset Newline newline
56139 pagecolor{color name}
56142 \begin_layout Itemize
56143 For the text color:
56144 \begin_inset Newline newline
56154 \begin_layout Standard
56155 You are restricted to one of
56197 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
56204 \begin_inset space ~
56210 \begin_inset Newline newline
56213 If you have changed a text or background color,
56214 you can use the following names to refer to them:
56217 \begin_layout Itemize
56223 \begin_inset Newline newline
56228 page_backgroundcolor
56231 \begin_layout Itemize
56235 \begin_inset space ~
56241 \begin_inset Newline newline
56249 \begin_layout Itemize
56253 \begin_inset space ~
56259 \begin_inset Newline newline
56267 \begin_layout Itemize
56271 \begin_inset space ~
56277 \begin_inset Newline newline
56285 \begin_layout Standard
56286 To see how to define and use custom colors,
56290 \begin_inset space ~
56298 \begin_inset space ~
56306 \begin_layout Section
56308 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
56312 \begin_layout Standard
56314 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
56315 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
56316 \begin_inset space ~
56320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56322 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
56331 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar,
56332 you can set here whether changes are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
56335 \begin_layout Standard
56337 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
56340 \change_inserted 630872221 1622044204
56343 \change_deleted 630872221 1622044196
56345 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
56346 to place a change bar in the margin of the output.
56347 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
56350 \begin_layout Section
56354 \begin_layout Standard
56355 Here you can adjust the
56359 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
56363 as described in section
56364 \begin_inset space ~
56368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56370 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
56376 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
56380 \begin_layout Standard
56382 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
56383 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox at the bottom.
56384 The functionality is handled by package lineno and additional options of this package can be used as well.
56385 The most common one are:
56388 \begin_layout Description
56390 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
56391 right Line numbers to the right margin
56394 \begin_layout Description
56396 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
56397 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages,
56401 \begin_layout Description
56403 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
56404 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
56407 \begin_layout Description
56409 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989692
56410 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
56413 \begin_layout Description
56415 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989752
56416 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
56419 \begin_layout Description
56421 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
56423 \begin_inset space ~
56426 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
56431 \begin_layout Section
56435 \begin_layout Standard
56436 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56442 \begin_inset Index idx
56447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56450 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56470 \begin_inset Index idx
56475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56478 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56497 \begin_inset Index idx
56502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56505 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56520 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
56524 Sectioned bibliography
56526 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56532 \begin_inset Index idx
56537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56540 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56560 you can select the style files and specify further options.
56562 you can select a document-specific
56566 for the generation of the bibliography.
56567 For a further description of these possibilities see section
56568 \begin_inset space ~
56572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56574 reference "sec:Bibliography"
56582 \begin_layout Section
56586 \begin_layout Standard
56587 Here you can define the
56591 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see section
56592 \begin_inset space ~
56596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56598 reference "sec:Index"
56606 \begin_layout Section
56610 \begin_layout Standard
56611 The PDF properties are explained in section
56612 \begin_inset space ~
56616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56618 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
56626 \begin_layout Section
56630 \begin_layout Standard
56631 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
56632 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56638 \begin_inset Index idx
56643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56646 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56666 \begin_inset Index idx
56671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56674 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56694 \begin_inset Index idx
56699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56702 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56722 \begin_inset Index idx
56727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56730 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56750 \begin_inset Index idx
56755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56758 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56778 \begin_inset Index idx
56783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56786 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56806 \begin_inset Index idx
56811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56814 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56834 \begin_inset Index idx
56839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56842 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56862 \begin_inset Index idx
56867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56870 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56889 \begin_inset Index idx
56894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56897 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56912 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
56915 \begin_layout Description
56916 amsmath is needed for many constructs,
56917 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
56918 -errors in formulas,
56919 ensure that you have this enabled.
56922 \begin_layout Description
56923 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek letters,
56924 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
56925 -errors in formulas,
56926 ensure that you have this enabled.
56929 \begin_layout Description
56930 cancel is used for canceled formulas,
56934 \begin_inset space ~
56946 \begin_layout Description
56947 esint is used for special integral characters,
56951 \begin_inset space ~
56963 \begin_layout Description
56964 mathdots is used for special ellipses,
56976 \begin_layout Description
56977 mathtools is used for the math commands
57018 and labeled arrows,
57019 see the corresponding sections in the
57026 \begin_layout Description
57027 mhchem is used for chemical equations,
57030 Chemical Symbols and Equations
57039 \begin_layout Description
57040 stackrel is used for the math command
57058 \begin_layout Description
57059 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
57062 \begin_layout Description
57063 undertilde is used for the math command
57072 Accents for one Character
57081 \begin_layout Section
57083 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
57085 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
57091 \begin_layout Standard
57093 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
57094 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
57097 \begin_layout Standard
57099 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
57100 The float placement options
57101 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
57104 are described in the section
57107 \begin_inset space ~
57111 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
57113 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
57121 \begin_inset space ~
57129 \begin_layout Section
57133 \begin_layout Standard
57134 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
57136 Program Code Listings
57141 \begin_inset space ~
57149 \begin_layout Section
57153 \begin_layout Standard
57154 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
57163 set to be used and set the
57168 The itemize environment is described in section
57169 \begin_inset space ~
57173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57175 reference "sec:Itemize"
57183 \begin_layout Standard
57184 You can furthermore specify a
57187 \begin_inset space ~
57192 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57193 command of the desired character.
57194 For example to use the € sign,
57195 you have to insert the command
57202 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
57204 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57208 \begin_inset space \space{}
57212 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
57222 To find the command for a math symbol,
57223 create a formula and hover the mouse over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
57226 \begin_layout Standard
57227 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
57230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57236 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
57237 -packages in the preamble (menu
57239 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
57240 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
57243 \begin_inset space ~
57249 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
57253 usepackage{textcomp}
57256 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
57260 usepackage{amssymb}
57270 \begin_layout Section
57274 \begin_layout Standard
57275 Branches are described in section
57276 \begin_inset space ~
57280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57282 reference "sec:Branches"
57290 \begin_layout Section
57292 \change_deleted 5863208 1685691759
57294 \change_inserted 5863208 1685691762
57298 \begin_inset CommandInset label
57300 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
57307 \begin_layout Standard
57308 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
57311 \begin_layout Description
57313 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57315 \begin_inset space ~
57320 Save transient properties
57322 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that are specific to the user are saved with the document.
57323 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
57327 \begin_layout Itemize
57329 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57330 the activation of change tracking
57333 \begin_layout Itemize
57335 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57336 the output of tracked changes
57339 \begin_layout Itemize
57341 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57342 the recording of the document directory path.
57345 \begin_layout Standard
57347 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57348 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts)
57352 \begin_layout Description
57354 \begin_inset space ~
57358 \begin_inset space ~
57362 The format that is used when you enter
57363 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57384 View Master Document
57385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57392 Update Master Document
57393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57400 menu or the toolbar.
57401 The default is set in
57403 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
57404 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
57406 \begin_inset space ~
57409 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
57414 \begin_inset space ~
57418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57420 reference "sec:File-Formats"
57428 \begin_layout Description
57430 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692088
57432 \begin_inset space ~
57436 \begin_inset space ~
57440 \begin_inset space ~
57443 programs If this is switched on,
57449 option which is needed with some packages.
57450 Note that this comes with security risks,
57451 so please use this only when really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
57452 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
57456 \begin_layout Description
57458 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
57460 \begin_inset space ~
57464 \begin_inset space ~
57467 Options offers settings for the
57475 \begin_layout Itemize
57479 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
57481 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
57483 \begin_inset space ~
57489 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
57491 \begin_inset space ~
57495 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
57501 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
57503 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
57504 settings for the menu
57506 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
57510 \begin_inset space ~
57514 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
57517 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
57518 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
57523 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
57525 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
57527 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
57530 or a detailed description see section
57532 Reverse DVI/PDF search
57537 \begin_inset space ~
57543 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
57547 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
57551 \begin_layout Itemize
57553 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
57556 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
57558 determines whether so-called
57559 \begin_inset Quotes els
57563 \begin_inset Quotes ers
57567 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
57568 \begin_inset Quotes els
57572 \begin_inset Quotes ers
57575 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
57576 (such as sections or captions),
57577 even if the corresponding insets are placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
57579 This setting is on by default,
57580 since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
57582 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic macros,
57583 you can uncheck this.
57584 If you don't know what we are talking about here,
57586 just leave it checked.
57592 \begin_layout Description
57594 \begin_inset space ~
57598 \begin_inset space ~
57601 Options offers settings for the export format
57609 \begin_inset space ~
57614 will assure that the output follows exactly version
57615 \begin_inset space ~
57618 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
57622 \begin_inset space ~
57627 settings are described in detail in section
57629 Math Output in XHTML
57634 \begin_inset space ~
57643 \begin_inset space ~
57647 \begin_inset space ~
57652 is used for the size of equations in the output.
57653 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692496
57657 \begin_layout Description
57659 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692661
57661 \begin_inset space ~
57665 \begin_inset space ~
57668 Options offers settings for the export format
57671 The details for the options are described in the chapter
57677 Additional Features
57684 \begin_layout Description
57686 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
57688 \begin_inset space ~
57693 Save transient properties
57695 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that are specific to the user are saved with the document.
57696 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
57700 \begin_layout Itemize
57702 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
57703 the activation of change tracking
57706 \begin_layout Itemize
57708 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
57709 the output of tracked changes
57712 \begin_layout Itemize
57714 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
57715 the recording of the document directory path.
57718 \begin_layout Standard
57720 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
57721 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts)
57724 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692091
57729 \begin_layout Description
57731 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692091
57733 \begin_inset space ~
57737 \begin_inset space ~
57741 \begin_inset space ~
57744 programs If this is switched on,
57750 option which is needed with some packages.
57751 Note that this comes with security risks,
57752 so please use this only when really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
57757 \begin_layout Section
57765 \begin_layout Standard
57766 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
57767 -packages or to define \SpecialChar LaTeX
57769 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
57771 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are doing.
57774 \begin_layout Standard
57775 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57776 -syntax is given in section
57777 \begin_inset space ~
57781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57783 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
57791 \begin_layout Chapter
57797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
57799 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
57804 \begin_inset Index idx
57809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57818 \begin_layout Standard
57819 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
57821 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
57825 It has the following submenus.
57828 \begin_layout Section
57832 \begin_layout Subsection
57836 \begin_layout Subsubsection
57837 User Interface File
57838 \begin_inset Index idx
57843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57845 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57860 \begin_inset Index idx
57865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57867 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57884 \begin_layout Standard
57885 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user interface (ui) file.
57886 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
57894 \begin_layout Description
57899 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
57902 \begin_layout Description
57909 the menu entries in popup context menus
57912 \begin_layout Description
57917 specifies the toolbar buttons
57920 \begin_layout Standard
57921 To create your own menu and toolbar layout,
57922 start with a copy of these files and edit the entries.
57925 \begin_layout Standard
57926 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward:
57940 entries must be finished with an explicit
57970 and in the case of the
57971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57983 The syntax for the entries is:
57986 \begin_layout Standard
57987 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
57993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58016 \begin_layout Standard
58018 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
58021 All the \SpecialChar LyX
58022 -functions are listed in the menu
58024 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
58026 \begin_inset space ~
58034 \begin_layout Standard
58035 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
58041 \begin_layout Standard
58043 assuming you use the menu
58045 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
58048 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks,
58049 you can add the line
58052 \begin_layout Standard
58053 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
58059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58077 \begin_layout Standard
58079 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
58083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58094 to have the sixth bookmark.
58097 \begin_layout Standard
58101 \begin_inset space ~
58106 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
58107 's toolbar buttons.
58108 The currently available icon sets are compared in
58109 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58112 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
58120 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58124 \begin_layout Standard
58127 Enable tool tips in main work area
58129 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries or footnotes.
58132 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58136 \begin_layout Standard
58141 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
58142 should display in the menu
58144 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
58146 \begin_inset space ~
58152 \change_inserted 5863208 1686648655
58156 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58158 \change_inserted 5863208 1686648655
58162 \begin_layout Standard
58164 \change_inserted 5863208 1686648655
58165 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
58170 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
58171 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen;
58172 the text then appears centered.
58177 \begin_layout Subsection
58181 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58185 \begin_layout Standard
58188 Restore window layouts and geometries
58191 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in the last \SpecialChar LyX
58195 \begin_layout Standard
58198 Restore cursor positions
58200 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of the last session.
58203 \begin_layout Standard
58206 Load opened files from last session
58208 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
58212 \begin_layout Standard
58215 Clear all session information
58217 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
58218 sessions (cursor positions,
58219 names of last opened documents,
58223 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58227 name "subsec:Backup documents"
58232 \begin_inset Index idx
58237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58239 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58256 \begin_layout Standard
58259 Backup original documents when saving
58261 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was
58262 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618729
58263 opened or when it was
58265 saved the last time.
58266 It is stored in the
58269 \begin_inset space ~
58275 \begin_inset space ~
58279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58281 reference "sec:Paths"
58286 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
58289 \begin_inset space ~
58295 The backup file has the file extension
58296 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618692
58300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58306 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618694
58310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58314 \change_inserted -712698321 1676618670
58315 and the same name than the original file.
58319 \begin_inset space ~
58325 the file has the full path in its file name,
58327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58336 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58342 !MyDir!MySubDir!Filename.lyx~
58345 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618585
58351 \begin_layout Standard
58353 \change_inserted -712698321 1676622933
58356 Make auto-save snapshots every X minutes
58359 LyX furthermore automatically saves snapshots of the current document (including unsaved changes) in the specified interval if there are unsaved changes.
58360 These files which are stored as
58364 in the document's directory are overwritten on each auto-save cycle and deleted when the document is closed normally.
58365 Should \SpecialChar LyX
58366 crash with unsaved changes and the restoration from the emergency file fail,
58367 this file can be used as a resort.
58370 \begin_layout Standard
58372 \change_inserted -712698321 1676623063
58373 Please read section
58374 \begin_inset space ~
58378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58380 reference "sec:Safety-Nets"
58384 for more details on \SpecialChar LyX
58385 's diverse backup and safety mechanisms.
58390 \begin_layout Standard
58392 \change_deleted -712698321 1676619117
58399 you can specify the time between backup saves.
58404 \begin_layout Standard
58407 Save documents compressed by default
58409 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
58410 \begin_inset space ~
58414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58416 reference "subsec:Compressed"
58422 This applies to newly created documents only.
58423 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
58424 \change_inserted -712698321 1676619181
58428 \begin_layout Standard
58430 \change_inserted -712698321 1676619393
58433 Save the document directory path
58435 stores the path of the document in the \SpecialChar LyX
58437 This is particularly handy if you have included files (such as graphics or child documents) which are referred to with relative paths.
58438 The option then allows moving the document elsewhere and still finding these included files if they are still in their original directories.
58443 \begin_layout Standard
58445 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618508
58446 Apart from that LyX autosaves document in regular intervals.
58447 It is used to restore unsaved changes in the document if the program crashes.
58448 The temporary file name is
58457 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58458 Windows & work area
58461 \begin_layout Standard
58464 Open documents in tabs
58467 every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
58471 \begin_layout Standard
58476 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
58481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58483 \begin_inset space ~
58487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58489 reference "sec:Paths"
58494 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
58503 documents will be opened in the same running instance of \SpecialChar LyX
58505 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
58506 instance is created for each file.
58509 \begin_layout Standard
58512 Single close-tab button
58515 there will only be one close button (
58525 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
58526 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
58527 Regardless of this option,
58528 one can always close a tab by middle-clicking it in the tab bar.
58531 \begin_layout Standard
58532 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
58535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58541 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
58542 before the change takes effect.
58550 \begin_layout Standard
58555 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view is closed.
58556 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
58558 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
58562 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several instances of \SpecialChar LyX
58563 and only want to close the view in once instance.
58566 \begin_layout Subsection
58568 \begin_inset Index idx
58573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58575 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58590 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58592 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
58599 \begin_layout Standard
58600 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
58604 \begin_layout Standard
58605 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
58608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58614 This section only deals with the fonts
58618 the \SpecialChar LyX
58620 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts,
58621 and set in the menu
58623 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
58624 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
58635 \begin_layout Standard
58655 (depends on the system) as its
58658 \begin_inset space ~
58674 \begin_layout Standard
58675 You can change the font size with the
58682 \begin_layout Standard
58687 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
58689 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58692 points have the size of 1
58693 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58698 \begin_inset space ~
58702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58704 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
58710 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
58711 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58715 The sizes are explained in detail in section
58716 \begin_inset space ~
58720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58722 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
58730 \begin_layout Subsection
58732 \begin_inset Index idx
58737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58739 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58755 \begin_inset Index idx
58760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58762 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58779 \begin_layout Standard
58780 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
58781 by choosing an item in the list and selecting the
58788 \begin_layout Standard
58789 By checking the option
58793 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
58801 \begin_inset space ~
58805 \begin_inset space ~
58810 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
58813 \begin_layout Subsection
58815 \begin_inset Index idx
58820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58822 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58839 \begin_layout Standard
58840 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
58844 \begin_layout Standard
58849 enables previewing snippets of your document.
58850 This feature is described in section
58851 \begin_inset space ~
58855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58857 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
58865 \begin_layout Standard
58866 Checking the option
58869 \begin_inset space ~
58873 \begin_inset space ~
58877 \begin_inset space ~
58882 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
58885 \begin_layout Section
58887 \begin_inset Index idx
58892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58894 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58911 \begin_layout Subsection
58915 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58919 \begin_layout Standard
58922 Cursor follows scrollbar
58924 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when scrolling.
58927 \begin_layout Standard
58928 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
58929 If you set the value to zero,
58930 the thickness of the cursor scales relative to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
58933 \begin_layout Standard
58936 Scroll below end of document
58938 is self-explanatory.
58941 \begin_layout Standard
58942 In \SpecialChar LyX
58943 one can jump from word to word by pressing
58950 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
58952 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
58953 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
58954 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
58958 \begin_layout Standard
58960 \change_inserted -712698321 1607270592
58963 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
58965 is only relevant in documents that
58971 change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as is (keeping
58979 markup) with this option selected.
58980 It the option is not selected,
58981 pasted text will be inserted without any markup (i.
58982 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58987 \begin_inset Quotes els
58991 \begin_inset Quotes ers
58995 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
58996 dissolving from insets.
59007 \begin_inset Quotes els
59011 \begin_inset Quotes ers
59014 notwithstanding the state of this option.
59019 \begin_layout Standard
59022 Sort environments alphabetically
59024 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
59027 \begin_layout Standard
59030 Group environments by their category
59032 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
59035 \begin_layout Standard
59040 options determine the editing style for math macros,
59050 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
59054 \begin_layout Standard
59056 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
59059 Search drive for cited files
59061 allows \SpecialChar LyX
59062 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
59065 \begin_inset space ~
59069 \begin_inset space ~
59073 \begin_inset space ~
59077 \begin_inset space ~
59080 Content\SpecialChar ldots
59083 context menu on a citation.
59087 \change_deleted 630872221 1622118829
59089 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
59092 field determines the search pattern.
59094 \begin_inset space ~
59098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59100 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
59110 \begin_layout Subsubsection
59112 \change_deleted 5863208 1686648616
59116 \begin_layout Standard
59118 \change_deleted 5863208 1686648616
59119 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
59124 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
59125 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen;
59126 the text then appears centered.
59131 \begin_layout Subsection
59133 \begin_inset Index idx
59138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59145 \begin_inset Index idx
59150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59152 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59169 \begin_layout Standard
59174 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
59176 Several binding files are available,
59180 \begin_layout Description
59181 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
59184 \begin_layout Description
59185 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
59196 \begin_layout Description
59197 mac.bind a set of bindings for
59200 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59208 \begin_layout Standard
59209 There are also binding files designed for special document classes,
59215 and binding files for special languages.
59216 The names of language binding files begin with a language code,
59218 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59222 \begin_inset space \space{}
59226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59234 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
59235 in a certain language,
59237 will try to use the appropriate binding file.
59240 \begin_layout Standard
59241 Some binding files,
59247 only have a limited scope.
59248 When looking at the end of the file
59253 you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
59256 \begin_layout Standard
59260 \begin_inset space ~
59264 \begin_inset space ~
59269 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function in the selected key binding file.
59272 \begin_layout Subsubsection
59274 \begin_inset CommandInset label
59276 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
59281 \begin_inset Index idx
59286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59288 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59305 \begin_layout Standard
59306 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
59307 functions and the bound shortcuts.
59308 To find functions easily,
59309 they are grouped by categories and the dialog provides the field
59311 Show key-bindings containing
59314 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
59315 Insert there for example as keyword
59316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59323 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different functions that contain
59324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59333 one function can have more than one shortcut.
59334 All \SpecialChar LyX
59335 functions are also listed in the file
59340 that you will find in the
59347 \begin_layout Standard
59349 to add the shortcut
59358 select the function and press the
59363 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
59364 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
59367 \begin_layout Standard
59368 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
59369 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
59370 Function definition with “
59373 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337868
59375 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337869
59380 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated list.
59382 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document part.
59385 \begin_layout Standard
59386 If you don't like a particular shortcut,
59390 \begin_layout Standard
59391 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with a text editor.
59392 The syntax of the entries is:
59395 \begin_layout Standard
59401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59420 \begin_layout Standard
59423 that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
59424 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
59425 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59458 respectively) as well as to the other keys.
59459 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly in the definition of the key combination,
59460 but must use commands following the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for a model).
59461 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
59466 you needed to specify it as
59471 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings,
59472 you don't have to care for these specifics.
59474 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
59477 \begin_layout Subsection
59479 \begin_inset CommandInset label
59481 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
59486 \begin_inset Index idx
59491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59498 \begin_inset Index idx
59503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59505 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59522 \begin_layout Standard
59523 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
59524 For the case where this is not possible,
59526 provides keyboard maps.
59529 you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it is a Romanian one,
59533 \begin_inset space ~
59537 \begin_inset space ~
59542 and select the keyboard map file named
59549 \begin_layout Standard
59564 you can select the first and second with
59567 arg "keymap-primary"
59573 arg "keymap-secondary"
59576 respectively or toggle between them with
59579 arg "keymap-toggle"
59585 \begin_layout Standard
59586 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
59589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59595 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all systems.
59603 \begin_layout Standard
59604 You can also specify the mouse
59606 Wheel scrolling speed
59609 The standard value is 1.0;
59610 higher values speed up the scrolling,
59611 lower ones slow it down.
59614 Middle mouse button pasting
59616 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel) inserts the content of the clipboard.
59619 \begin_layout Standard
59627 \begin_inset space ~
59631 \begin_inset space ~
59637 you can select a key for zooming.
59638 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated,
59639 the text is zoomed.
59642 \begin_layout Subsection
59646 \begin_layout Standard
59647 Input completion is described in section
59648 \begin_inset space ~
59652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59654 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
59662 \begin_layout Section
59664 \begin_inset CommandInset label
59671 \begin_inset Index idx
59676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59683 \begin_inset Index idx
59688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59690 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59707 \begin_layout Standard
59708 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
59709 are normally determined during the installation.
59710 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
59713 \begin_layout Description
59715 \begin_inset space ~
59718 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
59719 's working directory.
59720 It is the default when you
59732 \begin_inset space ~
59740 \begin_layout Description
59742 \begin_inset space ~
59745 templates This directory
59746 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
59747 contains the templates that are shown
59748 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
59749 will be opened when you use the menu
59750 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
59755 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
59757 \begin_inset space ~
59761 \begin_inset space ~
59769 \begin_layout Description
59771 \begin_inset space ~
59774 files This directory
59775 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
59776 will be opened when you use the
59777 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
59778 contains the example files that are listed in
59781 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
59790 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
59792 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
59794 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
59800 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
59802 \begin_inset Newline newline
59806 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
59809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59819 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
59820 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
59830 \begin_layout Description
59832 \begin_inset space ~
59836 \begin_inset Index idx
59841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59843 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59857 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
59858 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
59859 \begin_inset space ~
59863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59865 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
59875 will be used to save the backups.
59876 \begin_inset Newline newline
59879 Backup files have the ending
59880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59890 \begin_layout Description
59892 \begin_inset space ~
59895 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
59896 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
59898 \begin_inset Newline newline
59906 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
59912 You can edit this file with the program
59921 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
59922 in its preferences under
59925 \begin_inset space ~
59931 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation,
59936 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
59938 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position in your \SpecialChar LyX
59945 and \SpecialChar LyX
59946 need to be running the same time.
59947 \begin_inset Newline newline
59950 The pipe is also used for the
59956 \begin_inset space ~
59960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59962 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
59968 \begin_inset Newline newline
59971 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
59972 Server-Pipe on Windows,
59973 you must use this pipe name:
59974 \begin_inset Newline newline
59990 \begin_layout Description
59992 \begin_inset space ~
59995 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
59998 \begin_layout Description
60000 \begin_inset space ~
60003 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
60004 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
60007 \begin_layout Description
60009 \begin_inset space ~
60012 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
60017 You only need to specify it if you are using
60021 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
60022 For \SpecialChar LyX
60027 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying a directory.
60030 \begin_layout Description
60032 \begin_inset space ~
60035 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
60036 When \SpecialChar LyX
60037 needs to use an external program,
60038 it looks in this list to see where to find it on the system.
60039 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
60041 so you normally don't have to modify it.
60043 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60047 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60051 the path list will need to be set only if there are external programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
60054 \begin_layout Description
60056 \begin_inset space ~
60059 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
60060 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
60061 code or in the document preamble.
60062 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by a single dot '.').
60063 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
60064 If files are included,
60065 the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be scanned for the input files.
60066 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
60068 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths;
60069 otherwise compilation may fail for some documents.
60072 \begin_layout Section
60076 \begin_layout Standard
60077 Here you can insert your
60086 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking,
60087 as described in section
60088 \begin_inset space ~
60092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60094 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
60100 to mark changes you make as yours.
60103 \begin_layout Section
60105 \begin_inset Index idx
60110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60112 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60127 \begin_inset Index idx
60132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60134 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60151 \begin_layout Subsection
60153 \begin_inset CommandInset label
60155 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
60162 \begin_layout Description
60164 \begin_inset space ~
60168 \begin_inset space ~
60171 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
60173 You can find its actual translation status here:
60175 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60177 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
60183 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
60187 \begin_layout Subsubsection
60189 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
60190 LaTeX Language Support
60195 \begin_layout Description
60197 \begin_inset space ~
60200 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
60201 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
60202 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
60203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
60207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
60211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
60215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
60219 The most widespread language package is
60224 \begin_inset Index idx
60229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60232 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60247 it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
60249 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
60250 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
60251 come with the alternative language package
60256 \begin_inset Index idx
60261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60264 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60278 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
60280 there are also specific language packages for languages not covered by
60285 The available selections are described in section
60286 \begin_inset space ~
60290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60292 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
60300 \begin_layout Description
60302 \begin_inset space ~
60306 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
60307 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
60308 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
60310 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
60314 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
60318 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
60320 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
60324 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
60325 that is used to switch to a different language
60326 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
60327 to start the package
60331 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
60332 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
60336 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
60337 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands,
60340 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
60344 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
60353 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
60361 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
60364 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
60366 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
60371 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
60389 selectlanguage{$$lang}
60390 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
60398 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
60403 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
60409 this setting is ignored.
60414 \begin_layout Description
60416 \begin_inset space ~
60420 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
60427 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
60428 Use this if the language switch set in
60432 needs to be explicitly ended,
60437 's alternative command
60441 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
60442 \SpecialChar allowbreak
60445 end{otherlanguage*}
60449 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
60452 don't have an end command since the start command toggles the package on and off
60453 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
60459 selectlanguage{$$lang}
60461 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the next
60465 selectlanguage{$$lang}
60471 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
60477 this setting is ignored.
60482 \begin_layout Description
60484 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
60486 \begin_inset space ~
60490 \begin_inset space ~
60493 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point alignment).
60496 \begin_layout Description
60498 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
60500 \begin_inset space ~
60504 \begin_inset space ~
60507 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
60513 \begin_layout Description
60515 \begin_inset space ~
60519 \begin_inset space ~
60523 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
60525 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
60528 this option is set,
60529 the languages used in the document will be added
60530 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
60533 to the document class options
60534 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
60535 rather than the language package options.
60536 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
60541 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
60542 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
60544 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
60545 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
60547 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this way
60551 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
60552 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
60561 \begin_layout Description
60563 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
60565 \begin_inset space ~
60569 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
60571 \begin_inset space ~
60575 \begin_inset space ~
60579 \begin_inset space ~
60585 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
60587 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
60590 this option is set,
60592 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
60593 the language switch defined in
60596 \begin_inset space ~
60601 is output at the beginning of the document,
60602 thereby explicitly switching to the document language.
60603 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
60604 This might be needed if you use a non-default
60607 \begin_inset space ~
60612 or if a package resets the document language.
60614 the language that is active at document start is used (this usually should be the document language).
60615 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
60616 documents start with the chosen document language.
60617 When this option is not set,
60621 \begin_inset space ~
60626 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
60628 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
60631 \begin_inset space ~
60641 \begin_layout Description
60643 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
60645 \begin_inset space ~
60649 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
60651 \begin_inset space ~
60655 \begin_inset space ~
60659 \begin_inset space ~
60665 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
60669 \begin_inset space ~
60673 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
60674 Set document language explicitly
60680 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
60682 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
60689 \begin_inset space ~
60695 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
60697 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
60701 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
60703 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
60706 the end of the document.
60707 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
60711 \begin_layout Subsubsection
60712 \paragraph_spacing single
60714 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
60720 \begin_layout Description
60722 \begin_inset space ~
60726 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
60728 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
60732 \begin_inset space ~
60736 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
60739 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
60741 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
60745 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
60748 in a language different
60749 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
60751 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
60754 the document language will be
60755 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
60756 marked (by default with a blue
60759 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
60761 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
60765 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
60769 \begin_layout Description
60771 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
60773 \begin_inset space ~
60777 \begin_inset space ~
60781 \begin_inset space ~
60786 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is switched via the operating system.
60787 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different scripts (e.
60788 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60792 English and Hebrew:
60794 switching the keyboard to Hebrew will automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well,
60800 \begin_layout Description
60802 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
60804 \begin_inset space ~
60808 \begin_inset space ~
60811 support Enables the use of languages,
60812 written from right to left (RTL),
60819 \begin_layout Description
60821 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
60823 \begin_inset space ~
60827 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
60829 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
60833 \begin_inset space ~
60837 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
60838 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
60839 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
60841 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
60845 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
60847 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
60848 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g.,
60852 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
60854 you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually to the left or right,
60858 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
60863 \begin_layout Standard
60868 means that the cursor
60869 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
60870 follows the logic of the text direction,
60871 and the arrows' direction relates to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
60873 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60877 in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say,
60878 Hebrew embedded in English),
60879 the cursor starts at the right (that is,
60884 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the left.
60885 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part;
60886 right arrow in this specific case always means:
60891 in text (even if this means:
60898 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
60899 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
60900 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
60901 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left scripts,
60902 since the cursor then follows a coherent
60903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
60907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
60914 \begin_layout Standard
60916 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
60922 always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
60924 in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
60925 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
60930 ) when coming from the left.
60931 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases,
60932 at the expense of the text logic.
60933 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
60934 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
60935 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
60940 \begin_layout Subsubsection
60942 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
60946 \begin_layout Description
60948 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
60950 \begin_inset space ~
60954 \begin_inset space ~
60957 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal separator alignment).
60959 the appropriate character for the current language is selected (e.
60960 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60966 but you can also specify a specific (static) custom character here.
60969 \begin_layout Description
60971 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
60973 \begin_inset space ~
60977 \begin_inset space ~
60980 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
60986 \begin_layout Subsection
60990 \begin_layout Standard
60991 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
60992 \begin_inset space ~
60996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60998 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
61006 \begin_layout Section
61010 \begin_layout Subsection
61012 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61014 name "subsec:General-output"
61021 \begin_layout Description
61023 \begin_inset space ~
61026 search Commands that will be used for the menu
61028 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
61030 \begin_inset space ~
61036 For a detailed description see section
61038 Reverse DVI/PDF search
61043 \begin_inset space ~
61051 \begin_layout Description
61053 \begin_inset space ~
61056 Options Options for the program
61060 that is used for the export format
61066 \begin_inset space ~
61070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61072 reference "subsec:Export"
61078 Possible options are listed in the
61083 \begin_inset Newline newline
61087 \begin_inset Flex URL
61090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61092 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
61102 \begin_layout Description
61104 \begin_inset space ~
61108 \begin_inset space ~
61111 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using the menu
61113 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
61114 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
61116 \begin_inset space ~
61122 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
61125 \begin_layout Description
61127 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
61129 \begin_inset space ~
61133 \begin_inset Index idx
61138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61145 \begin_inset Index idx
61150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61152 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
61155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61166 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
61167 \begin_inset Newline newline
61171 \begin_inset Flex URL
61174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61176 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
61182 \begin_inset Newline newline
61185 For example the format
61186 \begin_inset Newline newline
61190 \begin_inset Newline newline
61193 prints the date as day/month/year.
61198 \begin_layout Description
61200 \begin_inset space ~
61204 \begin_inset space ~
61207 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
61208 is allowed to overwrite on export.
61211 \begin_layout Subsection
61217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61219 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
61224 \begin_inset Index idx
61229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61231 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
61234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61249 \begin_layout Description
61251 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
61253 \begin_inset space ~
61261 \begin_inset space ~
61265 \begin_inset space ~
61268 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
61273 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
61297 are used for Cyrillic.
61298 Combinations of the encodings are possible,
61300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
61309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
61313 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages \SpecialChar LyX
61314 sets up in the background.
61315 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
61320 \begin_layout Description
61322 \begin_inset space ~
61326 \begin_inset space ~
61330 \begin_inset space ~
61334 \begin_inset space ~
61337 options They only have an effect when the program
61341 is used as DVI-viewer,
61342 read its manual to find out more.
61345 \begin_layout Standard
61346 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
61347 But before you change something,
61348 it is strongly recommended to read the manuals of the applications.
61351 \begin_layout Description
61353 \begin_inset space ~
61356 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography,
61358 \begin_inset space ~
61362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61364 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
61372 \begin_layout Description
61374 \begin_inset space ~
61377 generation Settings for the generation of the index,
61379 \begin_inset space ~
61383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61385 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
61393 \begin_layout Description
61395 \begin_inset space ~
61398 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature,
61400 \begin_inset space ~
61404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61406 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
61414 \begin_layout Description
61420 \begin_inset space ~
61423 command Command for the program
61425 Check\SpecialChar TeX
61428 that is described in the section
61430 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
61435 Additional Features
61440 \begin_layout Standard
61441 There are additionally the following options:
61444 \begin_layout Description
61446 \begin_inset space ~
61450 \begin_inset space ~
61454 \begin_inset space ~
61458 \begin_inset space ~
61463 \begin_inset space ~
61466 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows,
61468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
61474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
61478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
61482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
61485 to separate folders.
61486 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
61488 \begin_inset Index idx
61493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61500 \begin_inset Index idx
61505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61507 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
61510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61524 \begin_layout Description
61526 \begin_inset space ~
61530 \begin_inset space ~
61534 \begin_inset space ~
61538 \begin_inset space ~
61542 \begin_inset space ~
61546 \begin_inset space ~
61549 changes Removes all manually set
61555 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
61556 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
61558 \begin_inset space ~
61563 dialog when changing the document class.
61566 \begin_layout Section
61568 \begin_inset space ~
61572 \begin_inset Index idx
61577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61586 \begin_layout Subsection
61588 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61590 name "subsec:Converters"
61595 \begin_inset Index idx
61600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61609 \begin_layout Standard
61610 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material from one format to another.
61611 You can modify converters or create new ones.
61612 To modify a converter,
61614 change the entry of the
61621 \begin_inset space ~
61626 field and press the
61631 To create a new converter,
61632 select an existing one,
61633 select a different format in the
61636 \begin_inset space ~
61646 field and press the
61653 \begin_layout Standard
61656 Converter File Cache
61663 conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
61665 Maximum Age (in days
61668 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen a document;
61669 the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
61672 \begin_layout Standard
61673 More about converters,
61674 like the flags that can be used in the converter definition,
61675 is described in the section
61686 \begin_layout Subsection
61688 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61690 name "sec:File-Formats"
61695 \begin_inset Index idx
61700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61707 \begin_inset Index idx
61712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61721 \begin_layout Standard
61722 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
61732 programs that should be used for certain formats.
61735 \begin_layout Standard
61736 You can also define the
61738 Default output format
61740 that is used when you use
61744 View Master Document
61748 Update Master Document
61754 menu or the toolbar.
61757 \begin_layout Standard
61758 More about formats and their options is described in the section
61769 \begin_layout Standard
61770 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
61771 's temporary directory,
61772 it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
61773 This is done by specifying a
61778 More about this is described in the section
61789 \begin_layout Chapter
61790 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
61792 \begin_inset Index idx
61797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61804 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61806 name "chap:Units-available-in"
61813 \begin_layout Standard
61815 \begin_inset space ~
61819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61821 reference "tab:Units"
61826 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
61827 and used in this documentation.
61830 \begin_layout Standard
61831 \begin_inset Float table
61838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61839 \begin_inset Caption Standard
61841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61842 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61857 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
61863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61865 \begin_inset Tabular
61866 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
61867 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
61868 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
61869 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
61870 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
61872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61916 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61920 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61953 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
61997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62019 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62023 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
62027 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62184 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62188 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62221 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62225 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62262 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62294 scaled point (65536
62295 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62299 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62362 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
62367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62420 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62486 % of original image width
62491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62575 \begin_layout Standard
62576 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
62579 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
62586 \begin_layout Bibliography
62587 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62588 LatexCommand bibitem
62595 The \SpecialChar LyX
62598 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62601 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
62607 \begin_inset Newline newline
62611 \begin_inset Flex URL
62614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62616 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
62624 \begin_layout Bibliography
62625 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62626 LatexCommand bibitem
62627 key "latexcompanion"
62632 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
62635 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
62636 Companion Second Edition.
62643 \begin_layout Bibliography
62644 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62645 LatexCommand bibitem
62651 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
62655 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
62663 \begin_layout Bibliography
62664 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62665 LatexCommand bibitem
62676 A Document Preparation System.
62684 \begin_layout Bibliography
62685 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62686 LatexCommand bibitem
62696 The \SpecialChar TeX
62704 \begin_layout Bibliography
62705 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62706 LatexCommand bibitem
62712 The \SpecialChar TeX
62714 \begin_inset Newline newline
62718 \begin_inset Flex URL
62721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62723 https://ctan.org/topic
62731 \begin_layout Bibliography
62732 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62733 LatexCommand bibitem
62739 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
62741 \begin_inset Newline newline
62745 \begin_inset Flex URL
62748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62750 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
62758 \begin_layout Bibliography
62759 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62760 LatexCommand bibitem
62767 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62769 name "Documentation"
62770 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
62777 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
62781 \begin_inset Newline newline
62785 \begin_inset Flex URL
62788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62790 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
62798 \begin_layout Bibliography
62799 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62800 LatexCommand bibitem
62807 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62809 name "Documentation"
62810 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
62815 how to use the program
62817 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
62821 \begin_inset Newline newline
62825 \begin_inset Flex URL
62828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62830 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
62838 \begin_layout Bibliography
62839 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62840 LatexCommand bibitem
62847 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62849 name "Documentation"
62850 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
62855 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
62861 \begin_inset Index idx
62866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62869 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
62872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62884 \begin_inset Newline newline
62888 \begin_inset Flex URL
62891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62893 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
62901 \begin_layout Bibliography
62902 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62903 LatexCommand bibitem
62910 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62912 name "Documentation"
62913 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
62918 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
62924 \begin_inset Index idx
62929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62932 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
62935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62947 \begin_inset Newline newline
62951 \begin_inset Flex URL
62954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62956 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
62964 \begin_layout Bibliography
62965 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62966 LatexCommand bibitem
62973 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62975 name "Documentation"
62976 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
62986 \begin_inset Newline newline
62990 \begin_inset Flex URL
62993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62995 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
63003 \begin_layout Bibliography
63004 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63005 LatexCommand bibitem
63006 key "makeindex-man"
63012 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63015 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
63025 \begin_inset Newline newline
63029 \begin_inset Flex URL
63032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63034 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
63040 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119703
63044 \begin_layout Bibliography
63046 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119754
63047 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63048 LatexCommand bibitem
63055 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63057 name "Documentation"
63058 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf"
63068 \begin_inset Newline newline
63072 \begin_inset Flex URL
63075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63077 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119749
63079 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf
63091 \begin_layout Bibliography
63092 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63093 LatexCommand bibitem
63100 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63102 name "Documentation"
63103 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
63113 \begin_inset Newline newline
63117 \begin_inset Flex URL
63120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63122 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
63130 \begin_layout Bibliography
63131 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63132 LatexCommand bibitem
63139 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63141 name "Documentation"
63142 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
63147 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
63149 \begin_inset Newline newline
63153 \begin_inset Flex URL
63156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63158 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
63166 \begin_layout Bibliography
63167 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63168 LatexCommand bibitem
63175 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63177 name "Documentation"
63178 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
63183 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63189 \begin_inset Index idx
63194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63197 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63212 \begin_inset Newline newline
63216 \begin_inset Flex URL
63219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63221 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
63229 \begin_layout Bibliography
63230 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63231 LatexCommand bibitem
63238 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63240 name "Documentation"
63241 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
63246 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63252 \begin_inset Index idx
63257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63260 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63275 \begin_inset Newline newline
63279 \begin_inset Flex URL
63282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63284 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
63292 \begin_layout Bibliography
63293 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63294 LatexCommand bibitem
63301 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63303 name "Documentation"
63304 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
63309 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63315 \begin_inset Index idx
63320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63323 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63338 \begin_inset Newline newline
63342 \begin_inset Flex URL
63345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63347 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
63355 \begin_layout Bibliography
63356 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63357 LatexCommand bibitem
63364 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63366 name "Documentation"
63367 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
63372 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63378 \begin_inset Index idx
63383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63386 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63401 \begin_inset Newline newline
63405 \begin_inset Flex URL
63408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63410 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
63418 \begin_layout Bibliography
63419 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63420 LatexCommand bibitem
63427 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63429 name "Documentation"
63430 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
63435 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63441 \begin_inset Index idx
63446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63449 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63464 \begin_inset Newline newline
63468 \begin_inset Flex URL
63471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63473 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
63481 \begin_layout Bibliography
63482 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63483 LatexCommand bibitem
63490 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63492 name "Documentation"
63493 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
63498 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63504 \begin_inset Index idx
63509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63512 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63527 \begin_inset Newline newline
63531 \begin_inset Flex URL
63534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63536 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
63544 \begin_layout Bibliography
63545 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63546 LatexCommand bibitem
63553 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63555 name "Documentation"
63556 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
63561 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63567 \begin_inset Index idx
63572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63575 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63590 \begin_inset Newline newline
63594 \begin_inset Flex URL
63597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63599 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
63607 \begin_layout Bibliography
63608 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63609 LatexCommand bibitem
63616 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63618 name "Documentation"
63619 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
63624 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63630 \begin_inset Index idx
63635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63638 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63653 \begin_inset Newline newline
63657 \begin_inset Flex URL
63660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63662 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
63670 \begin_layout Bibliography
63671 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63672 LatexCommand bibitem
63679 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63682 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
63687 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63689 \begin_inset Newline newline
63693 \begin_inset Flex URL
63696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63698 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
63706 \begin_layout Bibliography
63707 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63708 LatexCommand bibitem
63715 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63718 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
63723 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63725 \begin_inset Newline newline
63729 \begin_inset Flex URL
63732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63734 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
63742 \begin_layout Bibliography
63743 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63744 LatexCommand bibitem
63751 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63754 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
63759 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63760 for Cyrillic languages:
63761 \begin_inset Newline newline
63765 \begin_inset Flex URL
63768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63770 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
63778 \begin_layout Bibliography
63779 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63780 LatexCommand bibitem
63787 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63790 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
63795 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63797 \begin_inset Newline newline
63801 \begin_inset Flex URL
63804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63806 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
63814 \begin_layout Bibliography
63815 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63816 LatexCommand bibitem
63823 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63826 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
63831 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63833 \begin_inset Newline newline
63837 \begin_inset Flex URL
63840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63842 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
63850 \begin_layout Bibliography
63851 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63852 LatexCommand bibitem
63859 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63862 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
63867 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63869 \begin_inset Newline newline
63873 \begin_inset Flex URL
63876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63878 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
63886 \begin_layout Standard
63887 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
63894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63922 \begin_inset Note Note
63925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63932 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
63933 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following bibliography is the second one:
63941 \begin_layout Standard
63942 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
63943 LatexCommand bibtex
63944 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
63945 options "biblio/alphadin"
63952 \begin_layout Standard
63953 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
63957 \begin_layout Standard
63961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63967 pagedeclaration}[1]{
63970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63977 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
63985 \begin_inset Note Note
63988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63989 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink,
63991 \begin_inset space ~
63995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
63997 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
64010 \begin_layout Standard
64011 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
64012 LatexCommand printnomenclature
64018 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
64019 LatexCommand printindex